Table Of Contents Pdf

Home

1. g Heb Fl A Contents CTRL 5KIFT FI dd Search About Help lets you access a help topic relevant to your task Contents lets you access the help system s table of contents Search lets you access the help system s search feature On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e About opens a dialog displaying information about the version of your Management Client The version information is useful in case you need to contact customer support e Toolbar The NetEVS Manager s toolbar features the following options Lown Save Lets you save changes to your settings 7 a Undo Lets you undo your latest change my a Help Lets you access a help topic relevant to your task 4 ano Tip Read more about the Management Client s built in help system in Using the Built in Help System Contents Lets you access the help system s table of contents Search Lets you access the help system s search feature e Memory Indicator The memory indicator located in the lower left corner of the Management Client states how much memory is available for working with the Management Client E Memory free 110bME When you expand items in the navigation pane the Management Client uses memory to treat data stored in the individual items Expanded items keep processing even when you expand other items in the navigation pane thus letting you access already expanded items faster When
2. 4 Itis highly recommended that you read the release notes available by clicking the View Release Notes link in the lower part of the NetEVS Management Server Installation window before proceeding 5 Having read the release notes complete the steps outlined in the NetEVS Management Server Installation window 10 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 OrTip Depending on what is already installed on the computer which is going to act as Management Server you may not need to complete all of the window s four steps The step that currently requires your attention will be highlighted Each of the window s four steps are described in the following e Step 1 Internet Information Services Note NetEVS Management Server Installation automatically detects if Internet Information Services IIS is already installed If this step is not available it is simply because IIS is already installed Internet Information Services includes a range of administrative features for managing web servers and web applications and is required in order to run an NetEVS Management Server If installing on a server running Windows Vista or Windows 2008 Server IIS is automatically installed once you click the Internet Information Services step should the automatic installation fail see Installation Troubleshooting On all other types of server clicking the Internet Information Services step opens Windows built in Win
3. 3 Inthe Add or Remove Programs dialog select the NetEVS Management Server entry and click the Change Remove button A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready 4 Similarly remove the NetEVS Windows components 5 Ifthe NetEVS Management Client in earlier versions called the Manager is installed on the Management Server itself remove the Management Client Manager too 6 Run the installation file for the new version of NetEVS After as short while the installation window will open Out of the three installation steps for the Management Server you will be asked to address step 3 NetEVS Management Server 7 Click the installation window s step 3 and complete the NetEVS Management Server installation During this process you will be asked to specify your SLC and the path to your license lic file 8 When the Management Server is installed the Management Server s web page will appear in a browser If you want to install the Management Client software in earlier versions called the Manager on the Management Server itself you can do if from the Management Server s web page e Upgrading Recording Servers Once the new Management Server is installed you can remove the old recording server version and install the new one what happens to the recording server s recordings During the removal process you will be asked whether you want to keep the recording server s recordings
4. 1 From the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Tools gt NetDVMS Servers 2 In the Add Remove NetDVMS Servers window click Network 3 Specify the LAN and or WAN IP address of the NetEVS Management Server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 391 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual If all involved servers both the NetEVS Management Server and the required NetDVMS servers are on your local network you can simply specify the LAN address If one or more involved servers access the system through an internet connection you must also specify the WAN address Hetwork Configuration E e Sem Salinas Sener address LAN sewe address WAN OK Cancel 4 When ready click OK 5 Click Close to close the Add Remove NetDVMS Servers dialog e Editing NetDVMS Servers 1 From the NetEVS Management Client s Too s menu select NetDVMS Servers 2 Select an NetDVMS server from the list and click the Edit button in the Add Remove NetDVMS Servers dialog 3 Edit the relevant settings and click OK to save your changes e Removing NetDVMS Servers To remove a NetDVMS server from your NetEVS system do the following 1 From the NetEVS Management Client s Too s menu select NetDVMS Servers 2 Select an NetDVMS server from the list and click the Remove button in the Add Remove NetDVMS Servers dialog 3 Click Yes to confirm that you want to remove the server Defining Roles with Access to NetDVMS Servers Roles defined in NetEVS s Man
5. 5 In the Name field edit the name as required 6 Save the setting by clicking the NetEVS Manager s Save button A e Validating an Individual Rule You are able to validate the content of an individual rule 316 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 why would I need to validate the content of rules When you create a rule the Rules Wizard ensures that all of the rule s elements make sense However when a rule has existed for some time one or more of the rule s elements may have been affected by other configuration and the rule may no longer work For example if a rule is triggered by a particular time profile the rule will not work if the time profile in question has subsequently been deleted Such unintended effects of configuration may be hard to keep an overview of rule validation helps you keep track of which rules have been affected IMPORTANT Validation takes place on a per rule basis each rule is validated in isolation It is currently not possible to validate rules against each other for example in order to see whether one rule conflicts with another rule not even if using the Validate All Rules feature Furthermore it is not possible to validate whether configuration of prerequisites outside the rule itself may prevent the rule from working For example a rule specifying that recording should take place when motion is detected by a particular camera will validate OK if the elements in the ru
6. Note When using public access the firewall or NAT router used must be configured so requests sent to the public address and port are forwarded to the local address and port of relevant recording servers Local IP Ranges There are cases when the recording server s public address should not be used When access clients connect from the local network the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether an access client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network You do this by clicking the Network tab s Configure button See Managing Local IP Address Ranges for more information Managing Local IP Address Ranges When an access client such as Ocularis Client Lite connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Access clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers When access clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local
7. O Create new archive for recording server Change existing archive Remove archive Example of Archive Wizard opening page until archives have been created only the first of the wizard s three options will be available e Creating New Archives for a Recording Server 1 On the first step of the Archive Wizard select Create new archive on recording server and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard specify the following e Archive Name Type a descriptive name for the archive e Path Type the path to the directory in which you will store the archive The archive does not necessarily have to be on the recording server computer itself Tip The archive directory you specify does not have to be an existing one if the directory does not exist it will automatically be created e Default Select whether the archive should be the recording server s default archive e the archive to which archiving will take place if no other archive has deliberately been specified for certain cameras Only one archive can be the default archive Archies Hama Path Derice tage Dafad Ountechive Cuica 7 OuwDlbheuachive CvOurQthentinctinve ee EY Example only in this case another archive already exists OTip The Device Usage column will initially be empty for the archive you are adding Later when you have specified which cameras should use the archive the number in the Device Usage column will change accordingly T
8. On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 385 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 3 In the properties pane overwrite the existing name 4 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar Already connected Ocularis Client Lite users must log out and log in again before the name change will be visible e Deleting an Existing User defined Event Note Keep in mind however that deleting a user defined event will affect any rules in which the user defined event is used Note A deleted user defined event will not disappear from Ocularis Client Lite immediately only after Ocularis Client Lite users log out 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select User defined Events 2 In the overview pane right click the unwanted user defined event and select Delete New User defined Event 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the user defined event if you are sure click the Yes button 386 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 View Groups Managing View Groups e What Is a View Group The way in which video from one or more cameras is presented in an access client Ocularis Client Lite is called a view A view group is basically a container for one or more logical groups of such views In the access clients a view group is presented as an expandable folder from which users can select the group and subsequently the view they want to see Ed 101
9. SAK Red Sector Cameras S88 Red Sector Back Door Car p Red Sector Entrance Carm p Red Sector Reception Car EHO Retail Area PTZ Cameras PTZ Camera 1 Example of expanding cameras folder with cameras grouped into device groups In the following examples are based on grouping cameras into device groups but the principle applies for microphones speakers inputs and outputs as well e Adding a Device Group 1 In the overview pane s device list right click the item under which you wish to create the new device group 2 Select Add New Device Group Tip You may also simply press CTRL N on your keyboard The Add Device Group dialog will appear 3 In the Add Device Group dialog specify a name and description of the new device group hdd Device Group E Hame Han Buking Cameras Darina Ciebi ri ep reper build ors 204 High Sira 120 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 The description will later appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the device group in the device list 4 Click OK A folder representing the new device group is added to the list You are now able to specify which devices should belong in the device group Tip If required you are able to add device groups as sub groups under other device groups as illustrated in the following example Red Sector Cameras Recepbion rea p Red Sector Reception C Red Sector Back Door Cam p Red Sector Entrance Ca
10. A Eur hn Lommuricsbon E moi Ti Canewrac ation Shaded A Devices recording server management server link When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link opens the Select Devices and Groups window which lets you specify the devices on which the event should occur in order for the rule to apply gt In this example the event should occur on an input called Back Door Sensor in order for the rule to apply In the Select Devices and Groups window we therefore drag the input Back Door Sensor to the Selected list and click OK By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Neat Edt the mle deseopiion click an underlined ter Perform an action on trou Activated from Back Door Sensor On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 5 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 2 of the wizard 6 On step 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply In this example we simply want the rule to apply whenever input is activated on the back door sensor regardless of time When creating event based rules it is possible to bypass the time conditions we therefore want to skip the wizard s step 2 entirely 7 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 3 of the wizard 8 On step 3 of the wizard first sp
11. Adding Users without Active Directory While you primarily add NetEVS users and groups to roles through Active Directory it is also possible to add individual users but not groups without Active Directory If not using Active Directory note the following e When installing the Management Server the user under which the Management Server service runs must be a local PC user on the server See also Management Server Installation e On the computer running the Management Server simple file sharing must be disabled the following way 1 On the computer running Management Server right click the Start button and select Explore 2 In the window that opens select the Too s menu then select Fo der Options 3 Select the View tab 4 Scroll to the bottom of the Advanced settings list and make sure that the Use simple file sharing Recommended check box is cleared 5 Click OK and close the window e You add users to roles through the Management Client almost as when adding users from Active Directory see Assigning Users amp Groups to a Role However when 302 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 adding users you must refer to particular users on particular computers as in the following example where the user USEROO1 on the computer PCOO1 is added Seleciad pers Amd a Bd Select Users or Groups AEJ ie AE mM Select this obieci type Uses or Group Object Typ
12. Port In the Start field specify the first port number in the required range Then specify the last port number in the range in the End field Source IP address for all multicast streams If a recording server has more than one network interface card it is only possible to multicast on one of them This field is therefore relevant if your recording server has more than one network interface card or if it has a network interface card with more than one IP address To use the recording server s default interface simply leave the value 0 0 0 0 IPv4 or IPv6 in the field In case you want to use another network interface card or a different IP address on the same network interface card specify the IP address of the required interface e Datagram Options In this section you specify settings for data packets datagrams transmitted through multicasting MTU Maximum Transmission Unit the largest allowed physical data packet size measured in bytes Messages larger than the specified MTU will be split into smaller packets before being sent Default value is 1500 which is also the default on most Windows computers and Ethernet networks TTL Time To Live the largest allowed number of hops a data packet should be able to travel before it is discarded or returned A hop is a point between two network devices typically a router Default value is 128 e Enabling Multicasting for Individual Cameras Even when you have specified mu
13. bza A Goes Core Example IP address range and additional user name and password defined When ready click OK to return to the wizard Note that you cannot scan extremely large IP address ranges typically ranges covering more than 32767 IP addresses If ranges are below this limit but still very large the wizard will warn you that the scanning may take considerable time When ready the wizard lists all the IP address ranges you want to scan 3 Click Next 4 The wizard searches for devices within the defined IP address ranges Depending on the size of the IP address ranges and whether they are on the local network or not this may take a while While searching the wizard generates a list of the cameras it detects Tip Detection may take a while especially if large IP ranges must be searched You can interrupt the search at any time by clicking the Stop Scan button Any cameras detected up to this point will be remembered by the wizard 5 When the wizard has finished searching it will list detected devices Initially the list will only contain known hardware i e devices for which the wizard is automatically able to detect a hardware driver The wizard is able to automatically detect hardware drives for a very large number of devices Tip For a preview image from camera devices in the list click the browser button to access the camera s default web page You may be asked to provide the user name and password f
14. 2 From the menu that appears select Rename IP Hardware Recording Server 4 Recording Server 1 Se l 53 Abingdon Road Entrance Cam 10 10 501 p Camera 21 Sp Input 30 3 Allerton St Orip As an alternative to using the menu simply press F2 on your keyboard 3 You are now able to overwrite the name of the selected device Tip For information about activating renaming or removing a recording server see Managing Recording Servers 262 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Hardware Properties Info Tab The Info tab displays information about the hardware selected under a recording server e Info Tab s Fields The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the hardware The name will be used whenever the hardware is listed in NetEVS and remote access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar P a Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the hardware The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the hardware device s name in the overview pa
15. Bar Area LH 102 Games Rooms GH 103 Pool Hall Example from Ocularis Client Lite Arrow indicates a view group which contains a logical group called Amenities which in turn contains three views By default each role you define in the Management Client is also created as a view group when you add a role in the NetEVS Management Client the role will by default appear as a view group for use in the access clients e A view group based on a role will by default only be available to users groups who have been assigned to the role in question You are able to change this see ViewGroup Rights in Specifying the Rights of a Role e A view group based on a role will by default carry the role s name Example If you create a role with the name Building A Security Staff it will by default appear in Ocularis Client Lite as a view group called Building A Security Staff You are able to change the name see the following for more information e In addition to the view groups you get when you add roles you are able to create as many other view groups as you require You can also delete view groups which you do not want to use including those automatically created when adding roles See the following for more information e Adding a View Group Even though a view group is by default created each time you add a role view groups do not have to correspond to roles You are therefore able to add any number of view groups if required 1 In t
16. Date and time of the most recent recording included in the performed archiving PTZ PTZ Preset Positions Preset positions can be used in rules for example for making a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera move to a specific preset position when an event occurs as well as in patrolling the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset positions You manage preset positions on the Presets tab which is available only when the selected camera is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera The Presets tab will not be available if the selected PTZ camera does not support preset positions 96 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Use presets from device gt Door p Shelves ES 3 Window Y Default preset E Info B Settings 3 Streams Record E Archiving t Presets gt Presets tab with four preset positions defined e Adding a Preset Position Note As an alternative to defining preset positions in NetEVS preset positions may for some PTZ cameras also be defined on the camera device itself typically by accessing a device specific configuration web page and imported into NetEVS by selecting Use presets from device To add a preset position for the camera in NetEVS do the following 1 Click the Add New button This will open the Add New Preset window 19 ue e la 2 The Add New Preset window displays a pr
17. E Tip Instead of right clicking to select Add New Rule you may simply press CTRL N on your keyboard This will open the Rule Wizard On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 309 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Rely Wizard Ja Hare Mere Aude 0011 Derug Active E Siap 1 Tyga al sde First Select the rule bpa bo peneiabe oe Peto an action on event 0 Pefem an schon mn a bre mens Meret E cet thee rks descargan chck an urderirad der i form an ection on eyed hom dev The wizard will guide you through the process of specifying the content of your rule The wizard makes the process interactive yet intuitive based on your main selections it will ask you to specify your exact requirements for the rule 2 Begin by specifying a name compulsory and a description optional of the new rule in the Name and Description fields respectively OTip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 Then select the required type of condition for the rule either a rule which performs one or more actions when a particular event occurs or a rule which performs one or more actions when a specific period of time is entered e Perform an action on lt event gt If you select an event based rule the lower part of the wizard window will display an initial rule description Next Edit the mle description cick an underlined
18. IP address before PTZ cameras can be used To enable PTZ on a video encoder s channels select the required recording server in the Management Client s navigation pane or overview pane then select the PTZ tab in the properties pane Rights to Use PTZ In order to use PTZ cameras features including the ability to pan tilt and zoom operators must have role which gives them the necessary rights See About Roles for more information including step by step descriptions of how to assign users to roles and how to specify the rights of roles Events Events Tab In addition to NetEVS s motion detection some cameras can themselves be configured to detect motion If a camera is capable of such detection the camera s detections can be used as events Such events can in turn be used when creating event based rules in NetEVS Events from such cameras are called hardware configurable events as they technically occur on the actual camera hardware rather than on the surveillance system For such cameras you are able to manage the hardware configurable events on the Events tab To access the Events tab select the required camera in the overview pane then select the Events tab in the properties pane Note The Events tab will only be available if the selected camera supports hardware configurable events Note Even though events based on signals from input and or output units connected to camera devices are technically also hardware conf
19. If you later want to remove a host from the list simply select the unwanted host in the list then click the Delete button 5 Now you are able to customize the behavior of your NetMatrix Monitor you do this by adjusting settings in the window s Run Mode section Orip The NetMatrix Monitor is pre configured with typically required behavior settings marked by default in the following list You do not need to adjust the settings listed in this step unless you want to customize the way your NetMatrix Monitor should behave consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt e Always On Top If selected default this setting forces the NetMatrix Monitor window on top of other windows This setting can subsequently be changed from a menu accessible by right clicking inside the NetMatrix Monitor window e Auto Accept All Commands If selected default this setting will make your NetMatrix Monitor automatically accept all commands received from allowed hosts provided the commands are accompanied by the correct password If this setting is not used a dialog in the NetMatrix Monitor window will prompt you to accept each received command e Display Camera Info If selected default this setting will show camera information in the NetMatrix Monitor window This allows camera names or camera IP addresses to be displayed even if the NetMatrix Monitor window is running in full screen mode e Keep Video Aspect Ratio If selecte
20. Inc 183 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Stel date and ame 02 01 2007 15 00 00 y 4 January 2007 gt 1 2h 3 d 5 6 7 e si 1 12 E 14 15 16 17 19 15 2 1 Po MN Sw 3 3 m y C Today 1 4 2007 To specify an exact time overwrite the required time elements hours minutes seconds with the required values In the following example the hours element is being overwritten Start daba and tira 02 01 2007 1800 00 e OTip When you have selected time elements in order to overwrite them you are also able to use your keyboard s UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit 7 Click the Export button to export the required log content to the required location 184 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 NetMatrix Managing NetMatrix Recipients With NetMatrix NetEVS s integrated solution for distributed viewing of video you can send video from any camera on a network operating NetEVS to NetMatrix recipients A NetMatrix recipient is basically a computer capable of displaying NetMatrix triggered video There are two kinds of NetMatrix recipients computers running the dedicated NetMatrix Monitor application and computers running Ocularis Client Lite NetMatrix recipients configured in the Management Client will be listed in the NetMatrix Configuration dialog which you open by selecting NetMatrix Configuration from the NetEVS Manager s Too s menu Note Each NetMa
21. Management Server You therefore specify the IP address hostname of the Management server during the installation of the failover server Should you later need to change the address of the Management Server you do it the following way Note In order to be able to change the Management Server address the Failover Server service must be stopped While the Failover Server service is stopped the failover server will not be able to take over from regular recording servers 1 Right click the notification area s failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Failover Server Service 3 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon again 4 From the menu that appears select Change Settings The Failover Recording Server Settings window appears You are able to change the following setting e Management Server hostname IP address Lets you specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the NetEVS Management Server with which the failover server should be able to communicate e Viewing Status Messages 1 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Show Status Messages The Failover Recording Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages e Viewing Version Information Knowing the exact version of your Failover Server service is often a benefit for example
22. Managing User defined Events ci a 384 VIEW GOUDES a a o E ia 387 Managing VIEW Groups ii oda 387 NetDUVMS SERVEES eses rios ide 390 Integrating NEUD VMS Se Ve Sii a a beds 390 Managing NEtDVMS SEVE S Estrato E a 390 Defining Roles with Access to NetDVMS Servers ccccccseeeeeeeeeecseeeeteeeeeeeeees 392 VIDEO DEVICE DRIVER Sui acota 395 Managing Video Device DrivVerS cooococccoconocccccnonanrrcnar ner 395 ACCES SELINA e rd ao te tea ee 397 ACCESS CIENT OVERVICW AS ASA AA 397 Servers Must Be Time SynNcChroniZed sssessssssssssnessnesesesssrsssssnnnnneneneneseune 397 Ocumare Centeno ooo 398 ASMA O 399 NETMATRIX MONTO Resurrrarr a AE EAEE fae eee 401 NetMathix Monitor Introducci n aria 401 Installing the NetMatrbe Montoya 402 Configuring the NetMatrix Monitor 0oocccccccccccccnccanccccrcccnr nn rr rr rr 403 Day to Day Use of the NetMatrix Monitor cccccccccccnccccnncncncn cnn rr 407 NetMatrix Monitor Window Shortcut Menu 0ccccccccccccnnncccnncnanc cnn 410 Notification Area Shortcut Menu cccccsccsssseecceeceecccusnneeeeeetseecegeeentteesessaauaes 411 BACKUP MOVE RESTORE Si ali Aa 413 How to Back Up Move amp Restore System COnfiguration cccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeenes 413 DATABASE PROTECTION uote na eae nea aaa 422 Protecting Databases from COrruptiOn cccccccceeseee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeengeeeeenes 422 SNMP Sa A os 424 vi Table Of Contents NetEVS 2 0 SNMP SUPPOR cascrse A 424 VIRUS gt CANNIN
23. On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Smartsearch Determines whether the Ocularis Client Lite Search feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in Ocularis Client Lite Note The View live right also requires that the role has been granted the right to view the access clients Live tab This right is granted as part of the application rights Note The Browse video Export video as AVI JPEG Export video in database format Get sequences and Ocularis Client Lite search rights also require that the role has been granted the right to view the access clients Browse tab This right is granted as part of the application rights Microphone Related Rights When specifying role rights for microphones the following rights are available e Visible Determines whether the selected microphone s will be visible in Ocularis Client Lite e Listen to live audio Determines whether listening to live audio from the selected microphone s will be possible in Ocularis Client Lite e Browse audio Determines whether browsing of recorded audio from the selected microphone s will be possible in Ocularis Client Lite e Export audio Determines whether the export feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected microphone s in Ocularis Client Lite e Get sequences This feature is currently not supported Determines whether the Sequences feature can be used when brow
24. Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 351 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 3 On Step 1 of the Rule Wizard select the required rule type 352 In this example we want to base the rule on an event Therefore we select Perform an action on lt event gt Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half or the wizard window Next Edi the nde description click an underlined tem Perfornm an action on event from devices recorder server Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content Event link Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they are related to plugins dependent on hardware configuration built into NetEVS itself etc In this example we want the event to be activated input Input comes from and is configured on separate hardware rather than on NetEVS itself so we go to the Hardware Configurable group select the event Input Activated and click OK Select an Event x Everts A Sg Devices A Plugins Motion Stated Motion Stopped Sj Handeare Configurabis Input Changed 4 T Input Deactivated Motion Ered ever El Moton Stated event
25. Recording Server Installer 2 0b English 3 The web page is available in a number of different languages In this example we assume that you view the web page in English and that you want to install English 16 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 versions of the NetEVS components On the web page find the Recording Server Installer section and then click the English link under the required recording server version often only one version will be available Note Depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear after you click the link If such security warnings appear accept security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button text depends on your browser version This will open the NetEVS Recording Server Setup wizard which will guide you through the installation Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for OnSSI NetE S 2 0 Recorder The InstallShield Wizard will install OnSS NetEVS 2 0 Recorder on your computer To continue click Next cos 4 On the first step of the wizard click Next 5 Select required installation folder and then click Next 6 When asked which type of server to install click the Recording Server icon This lets you install a regular recording server Imstallsb eld Wizard E 7 He Larra rd Record Lama lor ado order and chon acces Gere Tapt fabian hig rola Fallera Serene E gut henner Sainte ica p
26. Sj Msi 7 Back in the Specify Backup dialog the path to your backup file is now listed Click OK 8 Back on the Restore Database dialog s General page your backup is now listed under Se ect the backup sets to restore Make sure you select the backup by selecting the check box in the Restore column Cortbene Eat paa 1 2 General Opin Desira lor eie Select or ippa e name of a nea on esti Gatabene har you restore operation To databane Survedlance To a porin beer Mon moan popii Tume by re Specdy Be boca and location al backup sets ko hitar gt Fron databace From device CAPhogeam Fiet Microso SOL Servet HSSIL TIMSS 9 Now go to the Restore Database dialog s Options page and select Overwrite the existing database Leave the other options as they are 420 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 10 When ready click OK to begin the restoration When the restore is finished you will see a confirmation Microsoft SOL Server Management Studio Express EJ i j The restore of database Surveillance completed successhuly 43 OrTIip If you get an error message telling you that the database is in use try exiting Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express completely then repeat steps 1 10 When finished exit Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express If you also backed up the SurveillanceLog database from the old Management Server restore it o
27. The alert box will inform you about the executed command The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds If required you can close the alert box manually at any time On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 409 NetEVS 2 0 410 User Manual Shortcut Menus Two shortcut menus are available when working with the NetMatrix Monitor NetMatrix Monitor Window Shortcut Menu By right clicking anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window you get access to a shortcut menu Full Screen wf Als On Top Config Hide do The shortcut menu has the following options Full Screen Lets you view the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen mode i e completely maximized without any title bar etc To return to regular view simply select Full Screen again rTip To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or regular view you can also simply double click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window Always On Top Forces the NetMatrix Monitor window on top of other windows on your screen Config Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Note that before the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Parserd Validation ES Enter Paso o Cca Hide Window Sends the NetMatrix Monitor window to hidden mode in which you will not see the window until there is
28. To enable disable prebuffering select clear the Enable prebuffering check box When enabling remember to specify a prebuffer size Specifying Prebuffer Size Select or type the required prebuffer size in seconds in the Prebuffer size box Clicking the Prebuffer size box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one second The number of seconds you specify in the Prebuffer size box must be sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements Using Prebuffering in Rules The use of prebuffering enables you to create rules specifying that recording should begin prior to the event or time triggering the rule Maximum Storage Limits The Record tab s Maximum storage limits specify how long recordings are kept in the database for Tip With archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the camera s database For the speaker s database you are able to specify a maximum time limit e g one day as well as a maximum database size limit e g two gigabytes Whichever of the two limits is reached first will apply e Specifying a Maximum Storage Time Limit On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 To specify a maximum time limit select or type the required values in the Time period boxes Days Hours and Minutes Clicking the Time period boxes up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one day hour minute respectively e Specifying a Maximu
29. be enabled through the Management Client see Managing Failover Servers and the service must be started in order for the failover server to be able to take over from regular recording servers ta Failover Server service is stopped To start the Failover Server service right click the icon and select Start Failover Server Service Le Failover Server service is starting Appears when the Failover Server service is in the process of starting Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Failover Server service is enabled and started LE Failover Server is disabled or running offline Typically appears if e the failover server is not enabled through the Management Client see Managing Failover Servers e the Failover Server service is running but the Management Server service is not e the failover server s information about the Management Server address is incorrect see Changing the Management Server Address in the following for more information e the user account under which the Failover Server service runs has no access to your NetEVS system How to troubleshoot this During installation of the failover server you specified a user account 46 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 under which the Failover Server service should run For the failover server to work it is important that the user account in question has access to your NetEVS system with administrator rights
30. click OK to begin the backup When backup is finished you will see a confirmation Microsoft SOL Server Management Studio Express ES 1 j The backup of database Surveillance completed successfully 43 When finished exit Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express Tip Also consider backing up the SurveillanceLog database using the same method The SurveillanceLog database name may be different if you renamed the system configuration database contains all your NetEVS system logs including errors reported by recording servers and cameras Backing up this database is not vital since it does not contain any system configuration but you may later appreciate having access to system logs from before the Management Server move e New Database when Installing New Management Server The following only applies if you are storing your NetEVS system s configuration in a SQL Server Express Edition database on the Management Server itself Management Server installation is divided into four steps During step 3 of the installation on your new Management Server make sure you select Create a new On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 417 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 418 database for the system configuration database even though you have a backup of the database from your old Management Server In the following we will overwrite the new and empty database by restoring the backup we just created Since we are going to overwrite the new
31. device etc on which the logged incident occurred On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 179 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Navigating the Event Log If the Event Log contains more than one page of information you are able to navigate between the log s pages by clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the log pane Lx lets you move one step towards the log page containing the most recent log entries Qan indicates which page you are currently viewing e g page 1 of 171 By clicking the button you are able specify a page number and go straight to that page EJ lets you move one step towards the log page containing the oldest log entries Searching the Event Log To search the Event Log use the Search criteria box in the top part of the log pane 1 Specify your search criteria by selecting the required service name source etc from the lists Orip You can combine selections or make no selection in certain lists as required The more search criteria you combine the less search results you will typically get 2 Click the Refresh button to make the log page reflect your search criteria OTip To clear your search criteria and return to viewing all of the log s content click the Clear button Rule Log The Rule Log records rules in which the Make new lt log entry gt action has been specified 180 Viewing the Rule Log To view the Rule Log expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client
32. select Too s gt Options This will open the Options dialog 2 In the Options dialog select the Network tab 3 Overwrite the existing information in the Range Start and Range End columns as required 4 When ready click OK e Removing Local IP Address Ranges 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Too s gt Options This will open the Options dialog 2 In the Options dialog select the Network tab 3 Select the unwanted IP address range 218 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 4 Click the Remove button 5 When ready click OK Notification Profiles E Mail Managing Notification Profiles With notification profiles you can set up ready made e mail notifications which can automatically be triggered by a rule for example when a particular event occurs You are even able to include still images and AVI video clips in the e mail notifications e Prerequisites Before you can create notification profiles you must specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server you are going to use for the e mail notifications Optionally if you want the notification profile s e mail notifications to be able to contain AVI video clips the compression settings for use when generating the AVI files must also be specified Outgoing SMTP Mail Server 1 Go to the NetEVS Manager s menu bar and select Too s gt Options 2 In the Options window specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail serv
33. 1 should start recording action immediately then stop recording stop action after 10 seconds However even though an event based rule is activated by an event on one device you can easily specify that actions should take place on one or more other devices Example Rule Involving Several Devices When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 Camera 2 should start recording action immediately and the siren connected to Output 3 should sound action immediately then after 60 seconds Camera 2 should stop recording stop action and the siren connected to Output 3 should stop sounding stop action You can of course also combine events and scheduled times in a rule Example Rule Combining Time Events and Devices When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 and the day of the week is Saturday or Sunday time condition Camera 1 and Camera 2 should start recording action immediately and a notification should be sent to the security manager action then 5 seconds after motion is no longer detected on Camera 1 or Camera 2 the two cameras should stop recording stop action The required complexity of rules will vary from organization to organization Some may require only a number of simple rules some may require a mix of simple and complex rules On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 305 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 306 Create Many Simple or a Few Complex Rules Depending on your organization s re
34. 342 User Manual Select Days EJ C Monday C Tuesday O Wednesday Thursday L Friday e Saturday Fl Sunday By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Next Edt the mle descnption click an underlined te Perform an action in a time interval within the time period 1300 to 18 00 and dey of week is Saturday 7 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 3 of the wizard 8 On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform In this example we want to start patrolling according to a specific patrolling profile We therefore select the action Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt ist Select actions to perform _ Start recording on lt devaces gt Stan feed on lt devices gt Set live frame rate on devices Set recording frame rate on lt devicez gt 2 Start patrolling on lt derice gt using profile Fause patroling on lt dewicez gt Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window In this example Based on our selection Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt the wizard automatically prompts us to specify the required camera and patrolling profile Mext Edt the rule deseopbion cick an underlined item Pertorm an action in a time interval within the time
35. AVI video clips in e mail notifications under the notification profile select Include images and specify the following e Time before event secs This setting is used to specify the start of the AVI file By default the AVI file will contain recordings from two On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 221 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 222 seconds before the notification profile is triggered you are able to change this to the number of seconds you require e Time after event secs This setting is used to specify the end of the AVI file By default the AVI file will end four seconds after the notification profile is triggered you are able to change this to the number of seconds you require e Frame rate Specify the number of frames per second you want the AVI file to contain Default is five frames per second The higher the frame rate the higher the image quality and AVI file size 8 Click the Finish button Deleting Notification Profiles 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select Notification Profiles This will show a list of your existing notification profiles in the overview pane 2 In the overview pane right click the unwanted notification profile and select Delete Notification 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the selected notification profile In you are sure click the Yes button Using Rules to Trigger E mail Notifications Use the Rule Wizard for creat
36. Archive Retention dave Arches Rebention 66 Ountuchive 24 3 3 QurDihecduchare Example only selecting retention sizes When ready click Next 4 On the fourth step of the wizard specify an archiving schedule i e the intervals with which the archiving process will be started You have a large amount of flexibility If required you are able to make archiving take place very frequently indeed in principle every minute all year round or very infrequently for example every first Monday of every 36 months What is the ideal interval The ideal interval to use between each archiving process depends entirely upon your organization s needs Consider your system s recording settings make an estimate of the amount of data you expect to record within for example a day a week or a month then decide on a Suitable interval Keep in mind however that your organization s needs may change over time it is thus a good idea to regularly monitor your archiving settings and adjust them if required In the following example we have selected that archiving should take place twice every week at three o clock in the morning on Wednesdays and Sundays Note that regional settings on your computer may mean that dates and times appear differently in your version of NetEVS 276 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 a Database Archiving Configuration Wizard va Select a schedule for archiving N etEVS Frequ
37. Assigning Users amp Groups to a Role e Starting the Failover Server Service The Failover Server service starts automatically However if you have stopped the service manually you can start it the following way 1 Right click the notification area s failover server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Start Failover Server Service Start Failover Server Service Show Status Messages Change Settings About Exit Failover Server Manager e Stopping the Failover Server Service Note While the Failover Server service is stopped the failover server will not be able to take over from regular recording servers 1 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Failover Server Service e Changing the Management Server Address The failover server must be able to communicate with your NetEVS system s Management Server You therefore specify the IP address hostname of the Management server during the installation of the failover server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 141 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Should you later need to change the address of the Management Server you do it the following way Note In order to be able to change the Management Server address the Failover Server service must be stopped While the Failover Server service is stopped the failover server will not be able to take over from regular recording servers 1 Right click the
38. Boot 210 Hiebrork Lorea A 211 Metrsork Comers B 212 Pe Heb Ce i esa 225 Meteor Carera e 232 Meteor Camera Fast AHD iden Server du 2010 Video Serves General GB Setting GP info Recod A arching You are now able to verify or change the settings of the selected type of camera 86 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Properties ci fost 211 Heb Camera A Genpa ms Breghiress 55 Geka 54 Compresa Sl Contras z Chel aul Sies MPEG Inchade Daba Vou Inti T ited Wh Resolution IA Antati n B JPEG streamed Frames pal pecond ral E MPEG Bi rate control mode Y nibs Ed pate Ed rate control priority Hor pe General dE Settings C ino Record 8 uchena 3 If you have made changes to the settings save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar Poen Streams Streams Tab Some cameras support multi streaming with which you can establish two independent streams to the recording server a stream for live viewing and another stream for playback purposes with different resolution encoding and frame rate Note Only some cameras support multi streaming Even when cameras support multi streaming individual multi streaming capabilities may vary considerably between different cameras Refer to the documentation for your cameras for exact information To see if a camera offers different types of streams you can also view the Settings tab You manage multi
39. Cece Erais PTE PLS Dace CUA Pos PLE Paa Camas 1 mu 1 wy Pda Ti F 1 Coal y Hero al A q Setra e pez PTZ tab with PTZ enabled for two of a video encoder s channels e Enabling PTZ on a Video Encoder To enable the use of PTZ cameras on a video encoder do the following on the PTZ tab 1 In the list of devices connected to the video encoder select the Enable PTZ box for the camera s on which you want to use PTZ Enable PTZ Devid Camera 3 gt 2 Inthe PTZ Device ID column verify the ID of the PTZ camera s in question 3 In the COM Port column select which of the video encoder s COM serial communications ports should be used for controlling PTZ functionality on each required PTZ camera COM Peat COM 1 ne COM 1 R com 2 4 In the PTZ Protocol column select which positioning scheme to use for each required PTZ camera PTZ Protocol Abeohile NS 5 Relative e Absolute When operators use Pan Tilt Zoom controls for the camera the camera is adjusted relative to a fixed position often referred to as the camera s home position On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 265 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Relative When operators use Pan Tilt Zoom controls for the camera the camera is adjusted relative to its current position Refer to the camera s documentation if in doubt 5 When ready save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar You are now
40. Change the value of the property 4 In the NetEVS Manager s toolbar click the Save button When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the grey information box below the settings table On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Automatic and Manual Activation of Output Output can be activated automatically or manually Automatic Activation of Output With the Management Client s rules feature you are able to create rules that automatically activate or deactivate output and rules that trigger actions when the state of an output is changed For example you may create a rule specifying that a siren should sound if motion is detected on a particular camera or you may create a rule specifying that a camera Should start recording if a siren sounds See Defining Rules Including Outputs for more information Manual Activation of Output Output may be activated manually from the Management Client and Ocularis Client Lite To activate an output manually from the Management Client do the following 1 In the navigation pane expand Devices and select Outputs 2 In the overview pane expand the required outputs folder and select the required output hip You may select a group of outputs for example A Outputs to manually activate all outputs in the group
41. First Select the rule type to generate C Perform an action on lt event gt Perform an action in a time interval 4 Click the Next button to go to step 2 of the wizard 5 On step 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply gt In this example we want the rule to apply within a specific time profile so we select the time condition Within selected time in lt time profile gt First Select comditions to apply e Within selected lime in lt lime profiles Outside selected time in time prohle E Within the time period lt startime gt to lt endtime Day of week is lt days gt 346 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Based on our selection the wizard prompts us to specify the required time profile in the rule description Next Edit the mle description click an underlined item Perform an action in a time interval within selected time in time profile 6 Click the underlined item to specify the exact content of the rule description In this example we click the time profile link select the time profile Daytime and click OK swe a Time Profile Tins Profiles cu 5 The rule description now reflects our selection Newt Ede the mle descnpion chck an underlined ten Perform an action in a time interval within selected time in Dartime 7 Click the wizard s Next button to move
42. Free column which displays the current amount of free space in the destination storage area See also the IMPORTANT note in the previous Then make sure the required database is selected in the Include media data column if check box is not selected only the database structure not its content will be moved and click Next The database will be moved A bar displays how the beginning of the moving job progresses np e e e es es You will be informed whether the job has begun successfully or whether it has failed If the job failed you will be able to view a status message indicating what caused the failure Move database hor device Tamera T Example Indication of successful beginning of a moving job del Move database for device Camera S Example Indication of failed moving job with link to status message Note that the status Success only indicates that the moving job has begun successfully not that the job is complete Moving of large databases may take considerable time Grip You can follow the further progress of the moving job by looking at the Database Configuration information on the Record tab for the device in question 4 Click Finish Tip Protect your databases Databases may become corrupted if the recording server is shut down abruptly for example due to a power failure or similar See Protecting Databases from Corruption for useful information about how to avoid corrupt databases 3
43. IP address or host name of the Management Server to which the recording server should be connected Fortunately you do not have to re install recording servers in order to specify which Management Servers they should connect to Once a recording server is installed you can verify change its basic configuration the following way How to Verify Change Management Servers Note In order to verify change a recording server s basic configuration the recording server service must be stopped This means that recording and live viewing will not be possible while you verify change the recording server s basic configuration 1 On the computer running the recording server right click the recording server icon in the notification area EN A Ed 10 33 AM Dig pA 238 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 OTip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray it is located at the far right of the recording server computer s Windows taskbar 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Recording Server Service Stop Recording Server Service PS hk Show Stabus Messages Change Settings About Exit Recording Server Manager 3 Right click the notification area s recording server icon again 4 From the menu that appears select Change Settings start Recording Server Service Show Status Messages Change Settings ls About Exit Recording Server Manager The Recording Serve
44. Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Knowing Archive Structure Lets You Target Backups When recordings are archived they are stored in a certain sub directory structure within the archive During all regular use of your NetEVS system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with Ocularis Client Lite regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not Knowing the sub directory structure is thus primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings See Archive Structure in the following for more information Viewing Backed Up Archives If you need to view your backed up recordings you cannot view them directly from the backup media Instead copy the backed up archiving directories into their original place in your NetEVS system s archiving directory structure This way you will able to use all of Ocularis Client Lite s features kinetic timeline browser search evidence export etc when browsing the recordings e Archive Structure When recordings are archived they are stored in a certain sub directory structure within the archive Note During all regular use of your NetEVS system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with Ocularis Client Lite regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not Knowing the sub directory structure is thus primarily interesting if y
45. License Agreement link to read the license agreement for the software This step opens the Database Setup Wizard which will guide you through the process of preparing a database for use with the Management Server Database Setup This wizard will guide your through the process of configuring a SQL Server for the NetEVS Server You can either choose to use an MS SQL Server 2005 Express database on the local computer or select an existing MS SQL Server on the network To continue click Next Next gt Cancel Opening page in Database Setup Wizard In the Database Setup Wizard you will get the choice of using an existing SQL 2005 Server on the network or setting up a SQL Server Express Edition a lightweight yet powerful version of a full SQL server on the Management Server computer itself Which SQL Server type is right for our organization The SQL Server Express Edition is easy to install and prepare for use and will often suffice for systems with less than ten recording servers However if you plan to perform frequent regular backups of your database using an existing SQL Server on the network is recommended For large installations such as installations with ten recording servers or more using an existing SQL Server on the network is always recommended Simply follow the wizard s steps by clicking the Next button IMPORTANT During the database preparation process you will be asked whether you w
46. Long Does it Take to Complete a Scheduled Archiving Archiving of data will never take longer than twice the amount of time it took to record the data and never longer than 120 minutes The time it takes for NetEVS to complete an archiving job is determined by several factors The amount of data to be archived is obviously an important factor However like all other system processes archiving also ties up system resources If NetEVS were to archive everything as quickly as possible a disproportional amount of system resources might be tied up by the archiving Therefore NetEVS uses a number of parameters to determine the ideal amount of resources to spend on each archiving job and thus the amount of time it will take to complete each scheduled archiving These parameters include but are not limited to e When the next archiving is scheduled e A minimum number of kilobytes to archive per second e A compulsory period of archiving free time inserted after each finished archiving job to ensure that archiving jobs do not overlap in time e Whether the maximum size limit of the archive is about to be reached and consequently if any existing data needs to be removed before the new data can be archived what Happens if Archiving Is Not Finished before the Next Scheduled Archiving On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 73 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual NetEVS system inserts a compulsory period of archiving free time after each finished archiving j
47. Manual Server Logs Mail Server AV Generation Netw NetEVS Manager Number of log rows to retrieve per page 50 Default preview frame rate 1 FPS a Max number of previews 64 E V Motion detection on when adding camera devices Enable multicast live when adding camera devices Refresh required for setting to take effect PTZ manual session timeout One of the tab s settings applies for all types of logs e Number of log rows to retrieve per page Lets you specify the number of log rows you want to view on a single log page If a log contains more than the specified number of rows you will be able view the remaining rows on Subsequent log pages 3 Go to the Options window s Management Server Logs tab Settings Log enabled Days to keep log entries 365 Maximum number of entries 1000000 In the tab s left box select the required log The selected log s settings are displayed in the tab s right box 172 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Log enabled Lets you enable disable the selected log By default all logs are enabled Note The System Log and Audit Log cannot be disabled by clearing the box e Days to keep log entries Lets you specify how many days the log s information should be kept for Default is 365 days one year Note Excess log content will be deleted if the log reaches its m
48. NetEYS 2 0 Recorder The InstallShield Wizard will install OnSS NetEVS 2 0 Recorder on your computer To continue click Next caos 4 On the first step of the wizard click Next 5 Select required installation folder and then click Next 24 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 6 When asked which type of server to install click the Failover Server icon Imtalbs ld Wizard EJ a E Dipha mahi hape d Srs bi rial HSI E Dearne i Chandiand Recon Serve bor ado morder and chon acces Falco Eros E gue Poco Greta iy banat rl lr al a ld Poder O Installation will begin wait while the required components are installed 7 When the required components are installed specify verify the following e Name A name for the failover server If required you can later change the name through the NetEVS Management Client e NetEVS Management Server The IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the Management Server to which the failover server should connect when required If required you can later change the Management Server IP address host name as part of the basic administration on the Recording Server service e MediaDB The path to the failover server s media database The media database is the failover server s default storage area i e the default location in which recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual camera databases Once the regula
49. New Rule Rules Wis Be _ ____________ IB ihesik CTRL N l H Validate All Rules g Refresh F5 J Tip Instead of right clicking to select Add New Rule you may simply press CTRL N on your keyboard 2 The Rule Wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field In this example the rule will cover a specific camera Camera 1 We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name Mame Camera 1 Live Speedup on Motion Grip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of the Rule Wizard select the required rule type In this example we want to base the rule on an event namely detected motion Therefore we select Perform an action on lt event gt Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half or the wizard window On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 335 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Next Edi the mle description cick an underlined tem Perfonm an action on event from devices recomdarscaryar 4 Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content Event link Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply In order for you to get a good overview s
50. Note The availability of features for manually activating an output depends entirely on the device in question and may thus vary Typically the following elements are shown for each output in the preview pane E DIA Dar k Ou Divspaue 3 Select clear the check box to activate deactivate the selected output When an output is activated the indicator lights up green w 1337 25 Acwared Chupa Ta On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 229 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Alternatively click the rectangular button L to activate the output for the duration defined in the Output Trigger Time setting on the Settings tab this feature setting may not be available for all outputs After the defined duration the output is automatically deactivated e Using Device Groups for Convenient Output Management You are able to group the outputs in your outputs list by using device groups Device groups let you specify common properties for all outputs within a device group in one go For more information see Using Device Groups e Output List s Status Icons The following icons are used to indicate the status of each output in the output list 2 Output is enabled An enabled output can communicate with the recording server and can be activated automatically through a rule 7 Output is communicating a Output is temporarily disabled Often shown when the output is communicating with NetEVS while the output is being disabled or enab
51. Performed Archivings for Microphone Each time archiving is performed for a microphone according to the scheduling defined for the selected archive the archived recordings are stored in separate subdirectories under the selected archive location Technically each performed archiving is thus stored individually although this fact will be completely transparent when browsing the archived recordings in access clients such as Ocularis Client Lite The fact that archived recordings are stored individually means that you are able to view a list of each performed archiving with exact timestamps information about the recordings included in each performed archiving e Path Path to the archive directory e Begin time Date and time of the oldest recording included in the performed archiving e End time Date and time of the most recent recording included in the performed archiving Events Events Tab Some devices are capable of creating events themselves Such events can in be used when creating event based rules in NetEVS Events from such devices are called hardware configurable events as they technically occur on the actual camera hardware rather than on the surveillance system For microphones supporting events you are able to manage the hardware configurable events on the Events tab To access the Events tab select the required microphone in the overview pane then select the Events tab in the properties pane Note The Ev
52. Rem Perfonm an action on event from devices recordar scaryoar Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content e Event Clicking the event link lets you select the event which must occur in order for the rule to apply for example Motion Started 310 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Devices recording server management server When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link lets you specify the devices on which the event should occur in order for the rule to apply Depending on your event specification you may be able to select from a list of cameras inputs outputs etc In the following example illustration the selectable devices are all cameras Select Group Members E Device Groups Peinder eaid 4 Acca deny Sirett Pb Cersa 1 on Aoi 209 HFD Camera 110 110 50 72 H Recording Serve 1 Limia n as 21M Camera na 101 50 Mi d Y Camera 1 o tot 2 FA Camisa ca eae 212 PTS Camera 101050 71 Tp Camera l on Anis Fp Cersa 1 on dogs 2330 Camera 101 11050 53 f Camera 1 on dogs 2 Dia 1 qm 65 211 Th Camera 1 00061 212 Camera 1 on dogs 233 Th Camera l oni PEO Tp Camera 1 ondo 07 Larrea l de 0 OS You specify the required devices by moving them from the Available devices list to the Selected devices list TO move a device from the Available devices list to the Selected devic
53. Remove button in the NetMatrix Configuration dialog 3 Click Yes to confirm that you want to remove the NetMatrix recipient e Advanced Tips for Ocularis Client Lite NetMatrix Recipients 186 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 If the NetMatrix recipient is an Ocularis Client Lite user you can send the same video to NetMatrix panes in several of Ocularis Client Lite s views provided the views NetMatrix positions share the same port number and password Do the following 1 In Ocularis Client Lite create the required views and NetMatrix positions that Share the same port number and password 2 In NetEVS Manager add Ocularis Client Lite recipient in question as a NetMatrix recipient 3 Include the NetMatrix recipient in a rule Defining Rules Sending Video to NetMatrix Recipients To be able to send video to NetMatrix recipients you must after you have configured a NetMatrix recipient include the NetMatrix recipient in a rule that triggers the video transmission to the requested NetMatrix recipient Do the following i Start the Rule Wizard and in step 1 select a rule type and if necessary a condition in step 2 See Managing Rules for more information In Rule Wizard s step 3 Step 3 Actions select the Set NetMatrix to view lt devices gt action Click the NetMatrix link in the initial rule description In the Select NetMatrix Configuration dialog select the required NetMatrix rec
54. User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Management Client System Administration Management Client Overview The Management Client is the feature rich administration client used for configuration and day to day administration of your NetEVS system The Management Client software is typically installed on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar Management Client s Elements The Management Client window is divided into a number of panes The number of panes will change depending on your task Note The following illustrations outline the Management Client window s default layout the window layout can be customized and may therefore be different on your computer gt MEN gt Getting Started mn NetEVS offers different features that meet the needs of even the largest surveillance in features are available from the navigation pane in following groups r surveillance system and information about the system s curren Microphones 0 Speakers e do Inputs o lanagement of recording servers connected to your surveillance system Q Outputs of cameras inputs and outputs You may for example grou e devices and a ent of ice settings ules and Alerts lanagement of rules time profiles notification profiles and alerts When working with recording servers and devices cameras inputs outputs the Management Client window will contain a menu bar and up to four panes On Net Surveillance Sy
55. Where The very feature rich Ocularis Client Lite must be installed on users computers How Users connect to the Management Server for initial authentication then transparently to the recording servers for video recordings etc O NetEVS handles an unlimited number of cameras servers and users across multiple sites if required NetEVS is capable of handling IPv4 as well as IPv6 5 git oe NetMatrix Monitor Analog Cameras Ocularis Client Lite Access Cliant Example of an NetEVS solution The number of cameras and recording servers as well as the number of connected access clients can be as high as you require Management Client NetEVS furthermore includes fully integrated NetMatrix functionality for distributed viewing of video from any camera on your surveillance system to any computer with an Ocularis Client Lite or the dedicated NetMatrix Monitor application also included installed 2 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 System Requirements System Requirements The following are minimum requirements for the computers used in an NetEVS solution e Computer Running Management Server e CPU Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Dual Core recommended e RAM Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended e Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended e Graphics Adapter Onboard GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024x768 16 bit colors e Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or
56. a network drive which is temporarily unavailable NetEVS will retry archiving after an hour If that fails another retry will take place after yet another hour and so forth If the time of the next scheduled archiving is reached between two retries an archiving attempt will be made at the scheduled time if that attempt fails NetEVS will retry archiving after an hour and so forth How Long Does it Take to Complete a Scheduled Archiving Archiving of data will never take longer than twice the amount of time it took to record the data and never longer than 120 minutes The time it takes for NetEVS to complete an archiving job is determined by several factors The amount of data to be archived is obviously an important factor However like all other system processes archiving also ties up system resources If NetEVS were to archive everything as quickly as possible a disproportional amount of system resources might be tied up by the archiving Therefore NetEVS uses a number of parameters to determine the ideal amount of resources to spend on each archiving job and thus the amount of time it will take to complete each scheduled archiving These parameters include but are not limited to e When the next archiving is scheduled e A minimum number of kilobytes to archive per second e A compulsory period of archiving free time inserted after each finished archiving job to ensure that archiving jobs do not overlap in time e Whether the ma
57. a selected user or group This ability is especially convenient if you are using groups in fact it is the only way of viewing the roles of individual group members 1 Open the Effective Roles window There are three ways in which you can open the Effective Roles window e From the NetEVS Manager s menu bar by selecting Tools gt Effective Roles e From the overview pane when working with roles by right clicking anywhere inside the pane then selecting Effective Roles 298 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e From the navigation pane by expanding Security then right clicking Roles then selecting Effective Roles 2 In the Effective Roles window s Enter user field type the user name of the required user Tip By clicking the browse button to the right of the field you are able to browse for the user in question using Active Directory Effective Roles E Ente up ined Fiske Fi thet hiarr Buki A Donum Shall Parking Aree Secuity Stal Feher Close 3 If you typed the user name directly into the Enter user field click the Refresh button in the lower part of the window to display the roles of the user If you used Active Directory to browse for the user the user s roles will be displayed automatically Removing a User from a Role Tip To find out which roles a user has use the Effective Roles feature Note Keep in mind however that a user may also have roles throu
58. able to add a hardware configurable event more than once The reason for this is that you are able to specify different properties for each instance of the event e Deleting a Hardware Configurable Event Note Keep in mind however that deleting a hardware configurable event will affect any rules in which the event is used To delete a hardware configurable event on the Events tab do the following 1 In the Events tab s Configured Events list select the no longer required event OTip If there are several instances of the same event use the properties list in the right side of the tab to verify that you have selected the correct event 2 Click the De ete button Note The selected event will be deleted without further warning 3 Click the Save button in the Management Client s toolbar orani On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 209 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Multicasting About Multicasting NetEVS supports multicasting of live streams from recording servers In cases when many Ocularis Client Lite users want to view live video from the same camera multicasting can help save considerable system resources Multicasting is thus particularly useful if using Ocularis Client Lites NetMatrix functionality where multiple Ocularis Client Lite users often require live video from the same camera Multicasting is only possible for live streams not for recorded video audio 210 What Is Multicasting In regular network communicat
59. addresses and port numbers When access clients connect from the internet the surveillance system should reply with the recording servers public addresses i e the address of the firewall or NAT On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 217 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether an access client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network e Defining Local IP Address Ranges 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Too s gt Options This will open the Options dialog OrTip You can also access the Options dialog from the Network tab this can be handy if you are also configuring the public IP address of a recording server 2 In the Options dialog select the Network tab 3 On the Network tab click the Add button 4 In the Range Start column specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the Range End column OrTip If required a range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 5 If more ranges are required repeat steps 3 4 6 When ready click OK e Editing Local IP Address Ranges 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar
60. and acting as domain controller must be available on your network Consult your network administrator if in doubt Active Directory User and Group Concepts Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups Users Users are Active Directory objects representing individuals with a user account Example On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 5 Alex Rodriguez ha Robert Poole 5 Debbie Perna Karen Smith eo Joe Testerman Groups Groups are Active Directory objects capable of containing several users In this example the Management Group has three members i e it contains three users 69 Management Group i Alex Rodriguez Karen Smith 4 Joe Testerman Groups can contain any number of users By adding a group to NetEVS you add all of its members in one go Once the group has been added to NetEVS any changes subsequently made to the group in Active Directory such as new members added or old members removed will immediately be reflected in NetEVS Note that a user can be a member of more than one group at a time If Not Wishing to Use Active Directory While adding of users and groups through Active Directory is the primary way of adding users in NetEVS it is also possible to add users to NetEVS without Active Directory See Adding Users without Active Directory Users Assigning Users to a Role l 2 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and
61. archive in days and GB as specified when defining archives through the Archive Wizard e Using Archive Wizard to Select Archive for Speaker When archiving is enabled for a speaker the speaker s recordings will by default be archived in the default archive of the recording server to which the speaker belongs If more than one archive has been created on the recording server you can use the Archive Wizard to archiving location for the speaker 1 Click the Archiving tab s Archive Wizard button to open the Database Archiving Configuration Wizard normally just referred to as the Archive Wizard 2 When dealing with a speaker the wizard only offers one option Select archive for device Click Next to continue 3 In the Archive Name column select the required archive You cannot select more than one archive for a speaker However if you later want to use another archive for the speaker you can simply run the wizard again and select another archive When ready click Next 4 The speaker s archiving settings will be changed to reflect your selection A progress bar will indicate how the change progresses On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 365 NetEVS 2 0 366 User Manual When ready the wizard will display a confirmation In case the selected archive could not be used the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem 5 When ready click Finish List of Performed Archivings
62. as well From the menu above the settings list select the required type of microphone to verify or change the settings of the selected type of microphone 3 If you have made changes to the settings save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar an e Record Tab The Record tab lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected microphone Microphones recording and storage settings are completely independent of cameras and speakers Note Recordings from a microphone will only be saved in the microphone s database when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met e Enabling and Disabling Recording Recording is by default enabled To enable disable recording for the selected microphone select clear the Record tab s Enable recording check box Note Recording must be enabled for the microphone before you are able to record i e save audio from the microphone A rule specifying that a microphone should record under particular circumstances will not work if recording is disabled for the microphone in question e Recording Settings Prebuffering is essentially the ability to save audio in the microphone s database before the initial boundaries of a recording Use of prebuffering can be highly advantageous It allows you to save audio from before the events or times used to start recordings On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 191 NetEVS 2 0 192 User Ma
63. available memory drops to 300 MB the memory indicator numbers turn red When the memory indicator drops to 0 MB meaning there is no more memory available for the Management Client you cannot expand any more items and you will see a warning dialog On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 61 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual To free up memory refresh the Management Client Click OK to exit the dialog then press F5 on your keyboard or select Refresh from the Action menu Logging in to the Management Client Note Access to the NetEVS Management Client requires certain user rights Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt 1 In Windows Start menu select A Programs gt OnSSI NetEVS gt NetEVS Manager _ or _ Click the NetEVS Manager desktop icon This will make the login window appear Connect to Server O NetEVS oss p Server type letEVS Server address Authentication Windows Authentication y User name George admin v Password Remember password Comet Canos Management Client login window 2 The login window s Server type field will in many cases appear dimmed and pre filled with the required information If not select NetEVS 3 Inthe Server address field type the IP address or host name of the computer running the NetEVS Management Server Gtip If you have logged in before you can simply select previously used server IP addresses or host names from the li
64. be deactivated and or modified as required Read more about microphone management in Managing Microphones Managing Microphones You have two entry points for managing microphones e Inthe Management Client s navigation pane expand Devices then select Microphones Next in the Management Client s overview pane expand the A Microphones folder This provides you with an excellent overview of your system s microphones and you can group microphones in device groups for easy management However enabling disabling of individual microphones can only be handled under recording servers see the following The text expanding will be displayed next to the A Microphones folder while the Management Client expands the folder Devices NS All Microphones expanding 188 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Expanding the microphones folders in this example the All Microphones folder may take a few seconds because the Management Client does not load information about the microphones until the folder in question is expanded thus enabling faster navigation between the individual elements in the Management Client In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers then in the overview pane expand the required recording server expand the required device and select the required microphone Note Check the Supported Devices page at www onssi com to verify that microphones are Su
65. be used in rules in order to trigger actions Thus when a user defined event occurs a rule can trigger that one or more actions should take place on the NetEVS system Example When user defined event 37 occurs PTZ camera 224 should stop patrolling and go to preset position 18 Through roles you define which of your users should be able to trigger the user defined events see Specifying the Rights of a Role for more information User defined events can be used in two ways simultaneously if required e For Providing the Ability to Manually Trigger Events in Ocularis Client Lite In this case user defined events simply make it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in Ocularis Client Lite Thus when a user defined event occurs because it is manually triggered by an Ocularis Client Lite user a rule can trigger that one or more actions should take place on the NetEVS system e For Providing the Ability to Trigger Events through API In this case user defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 131 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual system Using user defined events this way requires that a separate API Application Program Interface a set of building blocks for creating or customizing software applications is used when triggering the user defined event Authentication through Active Directory is required for using user define events this way This ensures tha
66. benefit for example in case you ever need to contact product support 1 Right click the notification area s recording server icon 2 From the menu that appears select About 44 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 start Recording Server Service Show Status Messages Change Settings Exit Recording Server Manager 3 A small dialog opens The dialog will show the exact version of your Recording Server service On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 45 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Failover Server Service Failover Server Service Administration When you have installed a failover server you are able to check the state of the Failover Server service by looking at the Failover Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the failover server The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Failover Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray it is located at the far right of the Management Server computer s Windows taskbar A A E 10 33 am i i E j Example Failover Server service icon in notification area note that failover servers also have a Recording Server service other icon e Failover Server Service State Icons The following icons represent the states of the Failover Server service LE Failover Server service is enabled and started The failover server must
67. button names depend on your browser version 4 The Ocularis Client Lite Setup Wizard begins In the wizard click Next and follow the installation instructions Typically you download Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server then install it on your computer see Download and Installation from Server Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install Ocularis Client Lite from a CD On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 399 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 1 Verify that your computer meets Ocularis Client Lite s minimum system 400 requirements Insert the surveillance system software CD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install Ocularis Client Lite link Tip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button names depend on your browser version When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue the installation and follow the steps in the installation wizard On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 NetMatrix Monitor NetMatrix Monitor Introduction NetMatrix is a feature allowing distributed viewing of video from any camera on your surveillance system to any monitor NetM
68. cece eee eee eee ee ee ee nr 20 FOlOVer Server Insta ma as 23 WOUDISSMOO CIN die 27 Installation Troubleshoo0tUNdO iii AA AAA 27 DOr GING its ias in 34 Upgrading from a Previous VersiOn cccccccccccccscsnentceecessccusannneteettesggnennnys 34 SERVICES BASIC ADMINISTRATION casona orita 38 Management Server Servico 38 Management Server Service Administration sssssessssssssssssnenenensrnsressrenns 38 RECOrdind Server Servia DAA AAA AA 41 Recording Server Service Administration ococccccccccnnnnnnrrannncca rra rro 41 Failover Server SEVICE nia 46 Failover Server Service Administration ccooccccccccccccncnnnnnrranrrcca rara 46 DOWNLOAD MANAGER COMPONENTS AVAILABILITY cccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeessaeeeseaneeenas 49 Using tne Downoad Manada 49 Installing New Components on Management Server ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneuens 51 Making New Components Available through the Download Manager 51 MANAGEMENT CLIENT SYSTEM ADMINISTRA TON A ws eeu setae ts 53 Management Client Overview sciccnisacsictecvainteanrsse ces ass 53 Logging in to the Management CLICNt ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee eens eee eeeeeeeeeesaaeeeneeas 62 Getting LA O ene ta an ha dered 63 ASS a as 67 Managing Alerts aaa 67 AL CUVINE E a r r r EAD 69 ADOUCAFCNIVINO a A E AEA 69 NetEVS 2 0 Table of Contents Back Up Archives Rather than Camera Datab Se6sS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 70 Knowing Archive Structure L
69. connect to these addresses when viewing multicast video from the recording server in question For each multicast camera feed the IP address port combination IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 6000 must be unique You can thus either use one IP address and many ports or many IP addresses and fewer ports By default NetEVS suggests a single IP address and a range of 1000 ports but you can change this as required Example If you want multicast for 1000 cameras you would need either e one IP address and a range of 1000 different ports OR e arange of two IP addresses and a range of 500 different ports or any matching combination OR e arange of 1000 IP addresses and a single port You specify this information in the following fields e IP address In the Start field specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the End field 250 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 OrTIip If required a range may include only one IP address IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 232 0 1 0 Ortip IP addresses for multicasting must be within a special range set aside for dynamic host allocation by IANA the authority overseeing global IP address allocation If using IPv4 you can read more about the range which goes from 232 0 1 0 to 232 255 255 255 at www iana org assignments multicast addresses If using IPv6 the range is different see www iana org assignments ipv6 multicast addresses
70. default is port 80 When NetEVS detects a device it will automatically access the device with the device s factory default user name and password If one or more devices within the specified IP address range require a non factory default user name and or password specify such user names and passwords one at a time by clicking the Add button Add P Ramee to Scan Egl e 1P Aiaj onga Stat F Address 10710411 End IP didas 101050 3 se Wee TOP por carr Patam blanca Gh port rumbas sl e puhara User mama Pasand fide Factor Delma are a jar Example IP address range and additional user name and password defined When ready click OK to return to the wizard On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Adding an IP Address Range To add a new IP address range click the Add button This will open the Add IP Range to Scan dialog which lets you edit the IP address range by changing the beginning and end of the IP address range as required GTip The beginning and end IP address may be identical allowing you to only scan for a single device if required You are also able to specify which port number to scan default is port 80 If scanning for devices which support TCP HTTP most devices do keep the Use TCP port scanning box selected When NetEVS detects a device it will automatically access the device with the device s factory default user name and password If one or more
71. default port 80 user name password and hardware driver Orip If you do not specify a user name and password the factory default user name and password for the device will automatically be added when you make your selection in the Hardware Driver column Remember to select the Include check box for each required device Grip Provided you have specified a valid user name and password hardware drivers can often be automatically detected Simply click the Auto Detect button If the driver is detected a check mark will appear in the second column If the driver cannot be detected a question mark will appear in which case you should manually select the required driver On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 257 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Example For first device a driver could automatically be detected for second device a driver could not be auto matically detected and must be selected manually Grip For a preview image from a camera device in the list click the browser button E to access the camera s default web page You may be asked to provide user name and password for the device when accessing it this way Repeat for each required device When ready click Next On the last step of the wizard verify the information then click Finish The required devices are added to the recording server and will appear in the NetEVS Manager s lists Managing Added Hardware Managing Hardware For each recording serve
72. device group However if the selected device group contains more than 400 microphones the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Note Content of the Settings tab may vary depending on the types of microphones selected The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change values when you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between O and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table e Specifying Common Settings for All Microphones in a Device Group If using device groups see Managing Microphones you are able to quickly specify common settings for all microphones within a given device group 1 In the microphone list in the Management Client s overview pane click the required device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s microphones will be listed Depending on the amount and type of microphones in the device group the list may only contain a few settings If the device group contains more than 400 microphones the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one
73. enabled for a microphone the microphone s recordings will by default be archived in the default archive of the recording server to which the microphone belongs On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 195 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual If more than one archive has been created on the recording server you can use the Archive Wizard to archiving location for the microphone 1 Click the Archiving tab s Archive Wizard button to open the Database Archiving Configuration Wizard normally just referred to as the Archive Wizard 2 When dealing with a microphone the wizard only offers one option Select archive for device Click Next to continue 3 In the Archive Name column select the required archive You cannot select more than one archive for a microphone However if you later want to use another archive for the microphone you can simply run the wizard again and select another archive When ready click Next 4 The microphone s archiving settings will be changed to reflect your selection A progress bar will indicate how the change progresses When ready the wizard will display a confirmation In case the selected archive could not be used the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem 5 When ready click Finish e List of Performed Archivings for Microphone Each time archiving is performed for a microphone according to the scheduling defined for the selected archive the archived rec
74. events occur e Edit Notification lets you edit an existing notification profile e Delete Notification lets you delete a notification profile e Rename Notification lets you rename an existing notification profile e Alerts The Action menu features four commands concerning alerts e Add New Alert Type lets you create an alert e Edit Alert Type lets you edit an existing alert type e Delete Alert Type lets you delete a alert type e Rename Alert Type lets you rename an existing alert type e Roles The Action menu features four commands concerning roles in the surveillance system e Add New Role lets you create a new role Roles define which rights users and groups have on the surveillance system e Delete Role lets you delete a role e Rename Role lets you rename an existing role e Add Member lets you add users and groups to the selected role e Effective Roles lets you view all roles of a selected user or group This is especially convenient if you have imported groups of users in fact it is the only way of viewing the roles of individual group members For more information see Viewing Effective Roles On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 59 NetEVS 2 0 60 User Manual Tools Menu Trusted Servers lets you add servers which should be able to communicate with NetEVS even though they are not directly part of the NetEVS surveillance system See Managing Trusted Servers for more information
75. fbTip Protect your databases Databases may become corrupted if the recording server is shut down abruptly for example due to a power failure or similar See Protecting Databases from Corruption for useful information about how to avoid corrupt databases 82 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Info Info Tab The Info tab lets you view and edit basic information about a camera Properties E e Denice brain Har Red Secta Hacip Lam lirica Camera incurted on al Eor Hopie eak Loera pee ea reduding don bo ol ce supple those Heel belsprore end 4321 Hardware narra os 2400 Vadeo Seres 1010 50 23 GoTo Lire mrii 3 G Setting info 0 Recd E Achana Eveni J Maton e Info Tab s Fields The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the camera The name will be used whenever the camera is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar orani Grip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the camera A description is not mandatory The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example t
76. for Speaker Each time archiving is performed for a speaker according to the scheduling defined for the selected archive the archived recordings are stored in separate subdirectories under the selected archive location Technically each performed archiving is thus stored individually although this fact will be completely transparent when browsing the archived recordings in access clients such as Ocularis Client Lite The fact that archived recordings are stored individually means that you are able to view a list of each performed archiving with exact timestamps information about the recordings included in each performed archiving e Path Path to the archive directory e Begin time Date and time of the oldest recording included in the performed archiving e End time Date and time of the most recent recording included in the performed archiving Viewing the Current State of a Speaker To view the current state of a speaker in the Management Client do the following 1 2 In the navigation pane expand Devices and select Speakers In the overview pane expand All Speakers and select the required speaker OTip You may select a group of speakers for example All Speakers to view the current status of all speakers in the group Information about the current status of the selected speaker is presented in the preview pane When a speaker is not active it is shown as On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manu
77. for devices on port 80 If the suggested IP address ranges are acceptable simply go to step 3 Occasionally you may want to remove or edit the suggested IP address ranges change the default port number or add further IP address ranges Removing an Unwanted 1P Address Range To remove an IP address range select the unwanted IP address range and click the Remove button You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the IP address range in question Editing an IP Address Range To edit an IP address range select the required range and click the Fdit button This will open the Add IP Range to Scan dialog which lets you edit the IP address range by changing the beginning and end of the IP address range as required Tip The beginning and end IP address may be identical allowing you to only scan for a single device if required If scanning for devices which support TCP HTTP most devices do keep the Use TCP port scanning box selected You are also able to change the port number to scan default is port 80 When NetEVS detects a device it will automatically access the device with the device s factory default user name and password If one or more devices within the specified IP address range require a non factory default user name and or password specify such user names and passwords one at a time by clicking the Add button On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Add amp Range to Sca
78. hardware Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit basic settings for a selected speaker or for all speakers within a selected device group However if the selected device group contains 400 speakers or more the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing Note Content of the Settings tab may vary depending on the types of speakers selected The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change values when you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between O and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table e Specifying Common Settings for All Speakers in a Device Group If using device groups see Managing Speakers you are able to quickly specify common settings for all speakers within a given device group 1 In the speaker list in the Management Client s overview pane click the required device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s speakers will be listed Depending on the amount and type of speakers in the device group the list may only contain a few settings If the device group contains more than 400 speakers the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing Y
79. in case you ever need to contact product support 1 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select About 3 A small dialog opens The dialog will show the exact version of your Failover Server service 48 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Download Manager Components Availability Using the Download Manager As you probably know from the NetEVS installation process the Management Server has a built in web page The web page enables administrators and end users to download and install required surveillance system components from any location locally or remotely The web page is capable of displaying two sets of content e One targeted at system administrators enabling them to download and install key NetEVS ons Saas components such as recording servers and the NetEVS Management Client This is the content you see A en a ose during the NetEVS installation process e One targeted at end users providing them with Pm access to client applications such as Ocularis FIT Client Lite as well as various drivers plugins ian language packs etc The example to the right shows the web page displaying content targeted at system administrators The web page automatically has some content this is why you can use it immediately during the NetEVS installation process However as a system administrator you can customize what should be dis
80. in itself shut down NetMatrix Monitor application it will merely send the window into hidden mode To shut down NetMatrix Monitor application do the following 1 Right click the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen CISMA Dx 0s Example only your notification area may have different content Right clicking the icon lets you access a shortcut menu Show Window Contig Exit On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 411 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 2 From the menu select Exit Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop Alternatively use Windows Start menu 412 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Backup Move amp Restore How to Back Up Move amp Restore System Configuration It can sometimes be necessary to move the NetEVS Management Server installation from one physical server to another The Management Server stores your NetEVS system s configuration in a database If moving the Management Server from one physical server to another it is vital that you make sure that your new Management Server also gets access to this database The system configuration database can b
81. indicates info the only level available in the Alert Log e UTC Time Timestamp in coordinated universal time UTC an international high precision time standard e Local Time Timestamp in the local time of the NetEVS Management Server e Alert Type Type of logged incident e Description Description of the logged incident if a description is available e Source Type Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred Since alerts are administrator defined and relate to incidents on the NetEVS system source type will normally be System e Source Name Name of the source on which the logged incident occurred normally System e Event Type Type of event represented by the logged incident Navigating the Alert Log If the Alert Log contains more than one page of information you are able to navigate between the log s pages by clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the log pane Lec lets you move one step towards the log page containing the most recent log entries un indicates which page you are currently viewing e g page 1 of 171 By clicking the button you are able specify a page number and go straight to that page A lets you move one step towards the log page containing the oldest log entries Searching the Alert Log To search the Alert Log use the Search criteria box in the top part of the log pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual i Event Log NetEVS 2 0 Specify
82. ine iule desciam cick an Lndelned ber Perform an action on ingat Activated from Red Sector Door Sensor start recording 5 seconds before on Red Sector Entrance Carr and Send notification to Securty Red Sector Entrance images from Red Sector Entrance Cam Perform action 10 seconds after stop recording immechately For more information about rules in general see About Rules Options Options Dialog The NetEVS Manager s Options dialog lets you specify a number of settings related to the appearance of the application to logging to mail server configuration etc You access the Options dialog from the NetEVS Manager s menu bar by selecting Tools gt Options General Server Logs Mail Server AVI Generation Network NetEVS Manager Number of log rows to retrieve per page Default preview frame rate Max number of previews Y Motion detection on when adding camera devices C Enable multicast live when adding camera devices Refresh required for setting to take effect PTZ manual session timeout The Options dialog features the following tabs On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 223 Net 224 EVS 2 0 User Manual e General The General tab lets you specify the following Number of log rows to retrieve per page Lets you specify the number of log rows you want to view on a single log page Default is 50 rows If a log contains more than the specif
83. is then forwarded to recording servers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether an access client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network e Defining Local IP Address Ranges 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Tools gt Options This will open the Options dialog OrTip You can also access the Options dialog from the Network tab this can be handy if you are also configuring the public IP address of a recording server In the Options dialog select the Network tab On the Network tab click the Add button In the Range Start column specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the Range End column Tip If required a range may include only one IP address example 192 168 10 1 192 168 10 1 If more ranges are required repeat steps 3 4 When ready click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 169 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Editing Local IP Address Ranges 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Too s gt Options This will open the Options dialog 2 In the Options dialog select the Network tab 3 Overwrite the existing information in the Range Start and Range End columns as required 4 When ready click OK e Removing Local IP Address Ranges 1 In the NetEVS Manage
84. lt gt 0nSS IP To The Core NetEVS 2 0d User Manual On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI One Blue Hill Plaza 7th Floor P O Box 1555 Pearl River NY 10965 P 845 732 7900 T 845 732 7900 info onssi com www onssi com Legal Notice This product manual is intended for general information purposes only and due care has been taken in its preparation Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient and nothing herein should be construed as constituting any kind of warranty OnSSI reserves the right to make adjustments without prior notification C 2009 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc OnSSI and the Eye logo are registered trademarks of OnSSI Ocularis NetDVMS NetEVS NetDVR ProSight NetGuard NetGuard EVS NetSwitcher NetMatrix NetTransact NetCentral NetPDA and NetCell are trademarks of OnSSI Other names are the property of their respective owners Table Of Contents NetEVS 2 0 Table Of Contents INTRODUCTION Sueca cias 1 FrOGUGE OV CIMICW atari 1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS E os 3 SY Stemi CUI CINICINUS cta ein 3 IMportantiPOrt INGUIN DELS isa ii 5 Servers Must Be Time Synchronized occcccccccccnccnnonccnrcca rn rra rr rr 7 INSTALLATION 2 a E A E a 9 Installation O Ver vie W ia 9 Management Server ITOStallati n aiii AAA 10 Recording Server INStallallOMsscsseacsrsatasesesugtansseacees cecageaanasenereamaaeanarsaserneaeenes 16 Management Client Installation ccccc cece
85. notification area s failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Failover Server Service 3 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon again 4 From the menu that appears select Change Settings The Failover Recording Server Settings window appears You are able to change the following setting e Management Server hostname IP address Lets you specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the NetEVS Management Server with which the failover server should be able to communicate e Viewing Status Messages 1 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Show Status Messages The Failover Recording Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages e Viewing Version Information Knowing the exact version of your Failover Server service is often a benefit for example in case you ever need to contact product support 1 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select About 3 A small dialog opens The dialog will show the exact version of your Failover Server service 142 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Hardware Detection Wizard The Hardware Detection Wizard helps you detect IP hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders on your network and add them to r
86. of the wizard s detection options you use By default outputs are disabled You can easily enabled outputs when needed Read more about output management in Managing Outputs Managing Outputs There are two entry points for managing outputs e Inthe Management Client NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Devices then select Outputs Then in the overview pane expand the A Outputs folder This provides you with an excellent overview of your system s outputs and you can group outputs in device groups for easy management However enabling disabling of individual outputs can only be handled under recording servers see the following The text expanding will be displayed next to the outputs folder in this example the A Outputs folder while the Management Client expands the folder Devices Expanding outputs folders may take a few seconds because the Management Client does not load information about the outputs until the folder in question is expanded thus enabling faster navigation between the individual elements in the Management Client e Inthe Management Client s navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers then in the overview pane expand the required recording server and select the required output Note Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration inter
87. one go press the CTRL key on your keyboard while selecting 5 Click OK The selected devices will be added to your device group on the device list e Specifying Common Settings for All Devices in a Device Group When using device groups you are able to quickly specify common properties for all devices within a given device group 1 In the overview pane s device list click the required device group In the properties pane all properties which are available on all of the device group s devices will be listed grouped on tabs 2 Specify the required common properties Note Properties not available on a of the devices in the device group will not be listed such properties must still be configured individually for each device Note If the device group contains 400 or more devices the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing For camera groups the Streams tab is also unavailable for viewing and editing if the group contains 400 cameras or more OTip The Settings tab has convenient functionality for quickly switching between settings for the device group and settings for individual devices 122 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Deleting a Device Group 1 In the overview pane s device list right click the unwanted device group folder 2 Select Delete Group Grip You may also simply press DELETE on your keyboard 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the device
88. overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 189 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual dorar Grip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the microphone A description is not compulsory The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the microphone s name in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar e Hardware name Name of the hardware with which the microphone is connected The field is non editable However the hardware name can be changed by clicking the Go To button next to the field Clicking the Go To button will take you to the hardware information where the name is editable e Unit number Non editable field displaying the unit on which the microphone is attached on the hardware e Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit basic settings for a selected microphone or for all microphones within a selected device group However if the selected device group contains more than 400 microphones the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many d
89. period 1300 to 18 00 and day of week is Saturday Start patrolling on device using profe We click the device link expand the relevant camera folder select the required camera and click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 select Device ka Cameras CA All Cameras H Lab Cameras 4 Parking lot E e 5 Red Sector Cameras gt Retail Area PTS Cameras Next click the profile link select the required patrolling profile from our list of previously defined patrolling profiles and click OK Select a Profile x e Al Camaras Ub Lab PTZ 1 Hell dara PIZ By doing this we have further specified the content of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Next Edit the nde desenption cick an underlined item erform an achon in a time interval A Ahin the time period 1300 to 1500 and day of week is Saturday start patrolling on Retai Area PTZ using Retail Area Saturday Atternoon 10 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 4 of the wizard 11 On step 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would start patrolling within the specified time period but never stop it Based on the elements in our rule description the wizard therefore automatically sugg
90. recording server becomes available again recordings stored by the failover server will be transferred to the regular recording server and merged with recordings there Note The database path cannot be changed while the failover server is taking over from a regular recording server Changes you make will be applied when the failover server is no longer taking over from a regular recording server e Enable this failover server A failover server must be enabled before it will be able to take over from regular recording servers Select box to enable the failover server clear box to disable it IMPORTANT A disabled failover server will not be able to take over from regular recording servers On the Network tab you are able to define the failover server s public IP address etc This is relevant especially if using NAT Network Address Translation and port forwarding See the description of the Network tab for a regular recording server for more information 3 If you have made changes to the properties save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar A Qe e Assigning Failover Servers to Recording Servers In the Management Client you select a recording server then use the Failover tab to specify which failover group s should take over from the recording server in question On the Failover tab you even have the flexibility of being able to assign a primary and a secondary failover group to each reco
91. required rules see How to Create Typical Rules e Editing a Rule 1 In the overview pane right click the required rule and select Edit Rule Delete Rule Copy Rule EJ validate Rule DELETE Validate All Rules a Refresh The Rule Wizard opens 2 In the Rule Wizard change the rule as required 3 When ready click the Rule Wizard s Finish button e Copying a Rule The Management Client conveniently lets you copy and re use the content of rules This way you can avoid having to create near identical rules from scratch 1 In the overview pane right click the rule you wish to copy and select Copy Rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 313 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual My First Rule Se SE ee 1 iM Gerani Aida y E Add New Rule CTRL N Edit Rule Delete Rule DELETE gt Eg Dele Copy Ride Ey Validate Rule Validate All Rules a Refresh FS The Rule Wizard opens displaying a copy of the selected rule 2 In the Rule Wizard rename and change the rule as required 3 When ready click the Rule Wizard s Finish button e Deactivating and Activating a Rule A rule is by default active meaning that NetEVS will apply the rule as soon as the rule s conditions apply If you do not want a rule to be active you can deactivate the rule When the rule is deactivated NetEVS will not apply the rule even if the rule s conditions apply A deactiva
92. required user defined event 3 In the properties pane overwrite the existing name 4 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Ocularis Client Lite users which are already connected must log out and log in again before the name change will be visible e Deleting an Existing User defined Event Note Keep in mind however that deleting a user defined event will affect any rules in which the user defined event is used Note A deleted user defined event will not disappear from Ocularis Client Lite immediately only after Ocularis Client Lite users log out 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select User defined Events 2 In the overview pane right click the unwanted user defined event and select Delete New User defined Event 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the user defined event if you are Sure click the Yes button Failover Servers About Failover Servers A failover server is a spare recording server which can take over in case a regular recording server becomes unavailable It should therefore always be installed on a separate computer A failover server has two services e A Failover Server service which handles the processes of taking over from the regular recording server By default this service is always running since it constantly checks the state of relevant record
93. rights In the lower half you then specify which authentication settings should apply for users groups with the selected role The process is described in detail in Defining Roles with Access to NetDVMS Servers e NetMatrix Rights Specifying role rights on the NetMatrix tab is only relevant if you have configured NetMatrix recipients on your NetEVS system On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 293 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual From Ocularis Client Lite it is possible to send video to selected NetMatrix recipients The NetMatrix tab lets you specify which NetMatrix recipients Should be selectable for this purpose in Ocularis Client Lite The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half you select the NetMatrix recipient for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half you then specify if users groups with the selected role should be able to select the NetMatrix recipient in Ocularis Client Lite e Visible Determines whether users groups with the selected role will be able to select and send video to the NetMatrix recipient from Ocularis Client Lite When you make selections for a NetMatrix recipient the icon representing the NetMatrix recipient in the upper half of the tab changes to reflect your selections NetMatrix recipient which users groups with the selected role will not be able to select in Ocularis Client Lite NetMatrix recipient which users groups with the selected role will be able to select in Ocular
94. rule specifying that outgoing audio from the speaker should be recorded under particular circumstances will not work if recording is disabled for the speaker in question e Recording Settings Prebuffering is essentially the ability to save audio in the speaker s database before the initial boundaries of a recording Use of prebuffering in this context can occasionally be advantageous It allows you to save audio from before the events or times used to start recordings Note Unlike video and incoming audio which NetEVS continuously receives from connected cameras and microphones outgoing audio is only transmitted when Ocularis Client Lite users press a button to talk through speakers This can depending on which events or times are used to start recordings mean that there will be very little or no outgoing audio available for prebuffering The following example illustrates how prebuffered audio is added to a recording This is the stream received by NetEVS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 361 NetEVS 2 0 362 User Manual a These are the initial boundaries of a recording as defined for example by start and stop events a However a rule specifies that recording should start five seconds prior to the start event so five seconds of prebuffered audio is added ee This is what is actually recorded Enabling and Disabling Prebuffering Prebuffering is by default enabled with a prebuffer size of 3 seconds
95. s navigation pane then select Rule Log Rule Log Content On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Each row in the Rule Log represents a log entry Each row contains the following information e Level Displays an icon indicating the level of the log entry indicates info indicates error Mindicates warning e UTC Time Timestamp in coordinated universal time UTC an international high precision time standard e Local Time Timestamp in the local time of the NetEVS Management Server e ID Identification number of the logged incident e Service Name Name of service on which the logged incident occurred e Rule Name Name of the rule triggering the log entry e Source Type Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred Since the log entries are administrator defined and relate to incidents on the NetEVS system source type will normally be System e Source Name Name of the source on which the logged incident occurred normally System e Event Type Type of event represented by the logged incident e Generator Type Type of equipment on which the logged incident was generated Since the log entries are administrator defined and relate to incidents on the NetEVS system generator type will normally be System e Generator Name Name if any of the equipment on which the logged incident was generated e Description Description of the logged incident if a description is available e N
96. so For example when motion is detected when an event occurs or when a specific period of time begins Recording is then stopped after a specified amount of time when motion is no longer detected when an event occurs when a time period ends or similar The term recording originates from the analog video era when video was taped only when the record button was pressed Note Recordings from a camera will only be saved in the camera s database when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 89 NetEVS 2 0 90 i aperiat io e Diag paling Enable econdng oo Pgs here pHing Recording lere rate PPE GE SHE EPS C Enable prebutenng Pretuer pe Sedat e Meca thongs brit Dawe recorded data mm the piacia bre pence Time penod 1 Da bb Hour Oe Minutes Saws recoded date unh the species cre m isached Je 5 00 44 Gigabytes Dalsbare confia sti n Database narra Local Ciel sul Dutatase path C Media webs pe Uad Spacer 0 0068 Dala Wind q Settings Giro Recod US Acheng T Event He Motion Record tab Enabling and Disabling Recording Recording is enabled by default User Manual To enable disable recording for the selected camera select clear the Record tab s Enable recording check box Note Recording must be enabled for the camera before you are able to record i e save video from the camera A rule specifying that a camera should record under particu
97. specify common properties for all devices within a device group in one go e When dealing with roles you are able to specify common security settings for all devices within a device group in one go e When dealing with rules you are able to apply a rule for all devices within a device group in one go By default some device groups already exist for every recording server A Cameras All Microphones All Speakers All Inputs and All Outputs Since these device groups are meant to represent all cameras microphones etc on the recording server you cannot remove devices from these device groups You can add as many other device groups as required For device groups you have added yourself you are completely free to decide which devices to include The only restriction is that you cannot mix different types of devices for example cameras and speakers in a device group If a device group contains 400 devices or more the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing For camera groups the Streams tab is also unavailable for editing and viewing if the group contains 400 cameras or more When you click the plus sign next to the device folder your NetEVS system will load the contents of the device folder which may take a few seconds While expanding the text expanding is displayed next to the folder name On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 119 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Devices 3 All Cameras Ay Lab Cameras expanding
98. started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server Input requires attention Status unknown Defining Input Related Rules To be able to automatically trigger an action activated by an input you must after you have enabled the input and created an event based on the input include the input in a rule See Managing Inputs for more information For example you may create a rule specifying that a camera should record if a particular input is activated For the following example to be useful to you you should have a general knowledge about how to manage rules See also About Rules for an introduction to rules or How to Create Typical Rules for other step by step descriptions of how to create rules e Defining a Rule where an Input Triggers an Action In the Rules feature all registered external input activation deactivation or change is treated as an event Based on an event you are able to specify a wide variety of actions to take To define a rule specifying that an input should result in one or more actions for example the starting of recording on a certain camera do the following 156 1 2 Start the Rule Wizard In Rule Wizard s step 1 Step 1 Type of rule select the Perform an action on lt event gt option Click the event link in the initial rule description In the Select an Event dialog s Hardware Configurable group select the appropriate option f
99. streaming on the Streams tab The tab is only available when the selected camera or device group supports multi streaming However if you select a device group with 400 or more cameras the Streams tab will not be available for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time To access the Streams tab expand Devices in the Management Client s navigation pane expand the relevant camera folder in the overview pane select the required camera and then select the Streams tab in the properties pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 87 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Pipetas y im n niigemahon eam b JPEG creamed HPEG Gin df Settings i bai hr Liri Fiam Recold 013 O E Shesms 0 Record hi Ahing Y Event The tab will by default list a single stream the selected camera s default stream used for live video as well as for video which is being recorded for playback purposes e How to Add a Second Stream 88 On the Streams tab click the Add button This will add a second stream to the list you cannot have more than two streams In the Stream column select the required type of stream If you want to use the stream for live video select the check box in the Live column Leave the check box cleared if you only want to use the stream for video which will be recorded You can use the same stream for both live and recorded video if required You cannot use two different
100. streams for the same purpose for example for live video If you want to use the stream for recorded video select the check box in the Record column Leave the check box cleared if you only want to use the stream for live video Note how the selection in the Plugins column always follows the stream you have selected for recorded video This is because the integrated plugin which NetEVS uses for motion detection is always applied on the video stream which will be recorded Click the Save button in NetEVS Manager s toolbar danis On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e How to Edit Already Added Streams 1 On the Streams tab select the stream you want to edit 2 Make the required changes 3 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar e How to Remove a Previously Added Stream 1 On the Streams tab select the unwanted stream 2 Click the De ete button 3 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar Recording Record Tab The Record tab lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected camera What does recording mean In IP video surveillance systems the term recording means saving video from a camera in the camera s database on the surveillance system In many IP video surveillance systems all of the video received from cameras is not necessarily saved Instead saving of video in a camera s database i e recording is started only when there is a reason to do
101. structure not its content will be moved and click Next 3 The database will be moved A bar displays how the beginning of the moving job progresses SR RR RRR RR RRR RRR EA You will be informed whether the job has begun successfully or whether it has failed If the job failed you will be able to view a status message indicating what caused the failure Move database for device Lamers 5 Example Indication of successful beginning of a moving job Move database for device Tamera 5 Example Indication of failed moving job with link to status message Note that the status Success only indicates that the moving job has begun successfully not that the job is complete Moving of large databases may take On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 considerable time Tip You can follow the further progress of the moving job by looking at the Database Configuration information on the Record tab for the device in question 4 Click Finish Tip Protect your databases Databases may become corrupted if the recording server is shut down abruptly for example due to a power failure or similar See Protecting Databases from Corruption for useful information about how to avoid corrupt databases Info Info Tab The Info tab lets you view and edit basic information about a selected microphone The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the microphone The name will be used when
102. suggests the stop action stop patrolling It furthermore 348 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Suggests that patrolling is stopped immediately when the time period ends Newt Edk the mule descopuon cick an Undenned Le Perform an action in a time interval within selected time in Derytime Start patrolling on FITZ Camera Daytime Perform an Acton when tine interval ends Stop patrolling immediately This is exactly what we want we do not need to change it 14 Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Rule Wizard window Pile Cami Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 15 Click the wizard s Finish button This will add your new rule to the list of rules E Default Start Feed Rule My Other Rule PTZ Camera Daytime Patrolling E Creating the Second Rule Patrolling During Nighttime Tip You do not have to create the second rule from scratch you can simply make a copy of the first rule then change it To copy a rule select the rule in the Rules list right click and select Copy Rule This will open the Rule Wizard which will display an editable copy of the rule 1 Copy the first rule then make the following changes to the rule e Change the rule name s
103. talk through the Speaker in question Some users may not have a microphone attached some users may not have the rights required to talk through speakers etc OrTip Find more information about microphones and speakers from an Ocularis Client Lite user s perspective in the separate Ocularis Client Lite documentation available on the NetEVS software CD Motion Detection Motion Tab The Motion tab lets you enable and configure motion detection for the selected camera Motion detection configuration is a key element in your NetEVS surveillance solution Your motion detection configuration may determine when video is recorded when alerts are generated when external output such as lights or sirens is triggered etc Time spent on finding the best possible motion detection configuration for each camera may therefore help you later avoid unnecessary alerts etc Depending on the physical location of the camera it may be a very good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc Note Before you configure motion detection for a camera it is highly recommended that you have configured the camera s image quality settings such as resolution compression etc on the Settings tab If you later change image quality settings you should always test any motion detection configuration afterwards On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 113 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 114 Y Enable
104. that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is stopped on a camera Note This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 323 NetEVS 2 0 Recording Started Recording Stopped Settings Changed Settings Changed Error q Archive Available Archive Unavailable Database Disk Full Database Repair Database Storage Area Available 324 User Manual Occurs when recording is started Occurs when recording is stopped Occurs when settings on a device are successfully changed Occurs when an attempt is made to change settings on a device and the attempt is unsuccessful Occurs when an archive for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable see Archive Unavailable in the following Occurs when an archive for a recording server becomes unavailable for example if the connection to an archive located on a network drive is lost When this is the case it will not be possible to archive recordings You can use the event to for example trigger a notification profile so an e mail notification is automatically sent to relevant people in your organization Occurs when a database disk is full A database disk
105. the device group the list may only contain a few settings If the device group contains more than 400 speakers the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time You are now able to verify or change the common settings 2 If required you are able to specify settings for the device group s individual speaker types as well From the menu above the settings list select the required type of speaker to verify or change the settings of the selected type of speaker 3 If you have made changes to the settings save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar r a Recording Record Tab The Record tab lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected speaker Speakers recording and storage settings are completely independent of cameras and microphones Note Recordings of what is being said through a speaker will only be saved in the speaker s database when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met IMPORTANT Although what is being said through a speaker can be recorded and archived there is currently no way of playing back or exporting such recorded outgoing audio Features for playing back and exporting recorded outgoing audio will be available in subsequent releases as soon as possible e Enabling and Disabling Recording 372 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2
106. to remove video device drivers from a recording server see Video Device Drivers Removal 396 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Access Client Access Client Overview The access client provided with NetEVS is Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Client Lite is very feature rich and flexible for future integration of plugins etc Ocularis Client Lite must be installed on users computers e How Do Ocularis Client Lite Users Connect to the Surveillance System Users connect to the NetEVS Management Server for initial authentication then transparently to the recording servers for access to for video recordings etc e How Do I Set Up Users and their Rights You set up your surveillance system s users and their access rights as part of the roles definition process in the NetEVS Management Client NetEVS Manager e Where Can I Find More Information See www onssi com or the Ocularis Client Lite documentation Servers Must Be Time Synchronized Part of the security surrounding the use of remote access clients with NetEVS is based on so called tokens When a client logs in to the surveillance system the client receives a token from the Management Server The token contains important security related time information The Management Server also sends a similar token to the required recording server s This is partly due to the fact that recording servers may be located all around the world each recording serve
107. upgrade information Note Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software CD before installing any part of NetEVS Note For trusted domains to work the Management Server must run as a domain user with local administrator rights Your NetEVS installation process begins with the installation of the NetEVS Management Server software The Management Server is the center of your NetEVS installation 1 Shut down any software running If upgrading it is highly recommended that you remove any previous versions of the Management Server before upgrading Note however that you may not want to remove the Management Server database as it contains your NetEVS configuration 2 Insert the NetEVS software CD If the NetEVS Management Server Installation window does not open automatically upon inserting the CD run the following file from the CD setup exe Tip Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the setup exe file from the location you have saved it to 3 The NetEVS Management Server Installation window will open listing the steps involved in the installation iH NetEVS bala iea OnSSI NetEVS Server Installation Inte a information e sre ced that inte net Infor ation Se s IIS is not 1 sta le T pani comput Si bes des ara aed ar Sanna fe atu ons To con stal A naging w Ne E red fe she ng the fe i an for tion Services link above
108. you have the preview window enabled To enable the preview pane select View gt Preview Window in the NetEVS Manager s menu bar Note however that cannot use the preview pane to judge the effect of frame rate changes as a special frame rate for the preview pane s thumbnail images is used defined in the Options dialog e Specifying Common Settings for All Cameras in a Device Group If using device groups you are able to quickly specify common settings for all cameras within a given device group 1 In the camera list in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane right click the required device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s cameras will be listed Note that you are unable to view and or edit the contents of the Settings tab if the device group contains more than 400 cameras because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Depending on the amount and type of cameras in the device group the list may only contain a few settings On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 85 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Pinger ia ES EJ hi E Gential Dalsi Siras E Mee Flares pe econ GB Settings GP info Recd a ducha You are now able to verify or change the common settings 2 If required you are able to specify settings for the device group s individual camera types as well From the menu above the settings list select the required type of camera Pipetas cy Ed el ay Al
109. your search criteria by selecting the required alert type source etc from the lists Orip You can combine selections or make no selection in certain lists as required The more search criteria you combine the less search results you will typically get Click the Refresh button to make the log page reflect your search criteria Orip To clear your search criteria and return to viewing all of the log s content click the Clear button The Event Log records event related information e Viewing the Event Log To view the Event Log expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client s navigation pane then select Event Log e Event Log Content Each row in the Event Log represents a log entry Each row contains the following information Level Displays an icon indicating the level of the log entry indicates info indicates error Mindicates warning UTC Time Timestamp in coordinated universal time UTC an international high precision time standard Local Time Timestamp in the local time of the NetEVS Management Server Description Description of the logged incident ID Identification number of the logged incident Event Type Type of event represented by the logged incident Service Name Name of service on which the logged incident occurred Source Type Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred for example Management Server or Device Source Name Name of the Management Server
110. 0 Note When using public access the firewall or NAT router used must be configured so requests sent to the public address and port are forwarded to the local address and port of relevant recording servers e Local IP Ranges There are cases when the recording server s public address should not be used When access clients connect from the local network the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether an access client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network You do this by clicking the Network tab s Configure button See Managing Local IP Address Ranges for more information Adding Hardware Cameras etc Hardware Detection Wizard The Hardware Detection Wizard helps you detect IP hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders on your network and add them to recording servers on your NetEVS system To access the Hardware Detection Wizard expand the Servers folder in the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane and select the Recording Server node then in the overview pane right click the required recording server and select Hardware Detection Wizard Hardware Detection Wizard Welcome to the Hardware Detection Wizard On O n S SI This wizard helps you detect and set up IP devices on the n
111. 0 Recording is by default enabled To enable disable recording for the selected speaker select clear the Record tab s Enable recording check box Note Recording must be enabled for the speaker before you are able to record i e Save audio from the speaker A rule specifying that outgoing audio from the speaker should be recorded under particular circumstances will not work if recording is disabled for the speaker in question e Recording Settings Prebuffering is essentially the ability to save audio in the speaker s database before the initial boundaries of a recording Use of prebuffering in this context can occasionally be advantageous It allows you to save audio from before the events or times used to start recordings Note Unlike video and incoming audio which NetEVS continuously receives from connected cameras and microphones outgoing audio is only transmitted when Ocularis Client Lite users press a button to talk through speakers This can depending on which events or times are used to start recordings mean that there will be very little or no outgoing audio available for prebuffering The following example illustrates how prebuffered audio is added to a recording This is the stream received by NetEVS These are the initial boundaries of a recording as defined for example by start and stop events However a rule specifies that recording should start five seconds prior to the start event so five seconds of prebuf
112. 0 e Unicasting sends data from a single source to a single recipient e Multicasting sends data from a single source to multiple recipients within a clearly defined group e Broadcasting sends data from a single source to everyone on a network broadcasting can thus significantly slow down network communication Note The successful implementation of multicasting also requires that your network equipment switches etc has been set up to relay multicast data packets to the required group of recipients only If not multicasting may not be different from broadcasting The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA the organization responsible for the global coordination of IP addressing has set aside certain IP address ranges for multicasting For a complete list of valid multicast addresses see www iana org assignments multicast addresses if using IPv4 or www iana org assignments ipv6 multicast addresses if using IPv6 e What Are the Requirements In order to use multicasting your network infrastructure must support IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol an IP multicasting standard Furthermore multicasting must be configured through the Management Client as described in Managing Multicasting Note If a recording server has more than one network interface card it is only possible to multicast on one of them Through the Management Client you are able to specify which one to use Read more about multicasting in Managing
113. 09 8 06 52 PM 4 29 2009 4 07 30 PM 4 29 2009 4 06 52 PM Communication error stream event Communication established stream event 3022 3010 4 29 2009 8 06 49 PM 4 29 2009 4 06 49 PM Communication error stream event 3022 4 29 2009 8 06 33 PM o0lsiolselselseisie seolsiels es 3 4 29 2009 4 06 33 PM Communication established stream event Jeu 4 29 2009 2 05 47 PM Communication error stream event 4 79 9009 4 05 47 PM m 7 818 8 9 8181818 9 8 818181 8 818181 04 29 2009 04 12 06 PM On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 The navigation pane is your main navigation element in the Management Client In the navigation pane the NetEVS Manager s features are grouped into the following categories e Basics General information for example about licenses in your NetEVS system e Servers Management of recording servers and failover servers spare recording servers connected to your NetEVS system e Devices Management of cameras microphones speakers inputs and outputs e Rules and Alerts Management of rules time profiles notification profiles and alerts e Security Management of roles users and groups e Server Logs Access to the various logs of your NetEVS system OrTip Right clicking items in the navigation pane gives quick access to management features e Menu Bar The NetEVS Manager s menu
114. 1 On the recording server stop the Recording Server service by right clicking the recording server icon in the computer s notification area also Known as the system tray then selecting Stop Recording Server Service 2 Open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 3 In the Add or Remove Programs dialog select the NetEVS Recording Server entry and click the Change Remove button A wizard window will open Follow On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 35 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready 4 Now open a browser and connect to the Management Server s web page at the following address http Management Server address port installation admin where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server If not accessing the web page on the Management Server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the Management Server 5 From the web page install the new version of the recording server software 6 Repeat for each recording server on your NetEVS system e Upgrading the NetEVS Manager Management Client If the NetEVS Manager Management Client in earlier versions called the Manager is installed on separate computers such as the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar yo
115. 2 06 PM Teer Communication established stream event ID 3010 Source Type Sour Device 4 29 2009 8 11 47 PM 4 29 2009 8 11 34 PM 4 29 2009 4 11 47 PM 4 29 2009 4 11 34 PM Communication error stream event Communication established stream event 3022 3010 4 29 2009 8 11 17 PM 4 29 2009 4 11 17 PM Communication error stream event 3022 4 29 2009 8 10 45 PM 4 29 2009 8 10 39 PM 4 29 2009 4 10 45 PM 4 29 2009 4 10 39 PM Communication established stream event Communication error stream event 3010 3022 4 29 2009 8 10 26 PM 4 29 2009 4 10 26 PM Communication established stream event 3010 4 29 2009 8 09 26 PM 4 29 2009 8 09 06 PM 4 29 2009 4 09 26 PM 4 29 2009 4 09 06 PM Communication error stream event Communication established stream event 3022 3010 4 29 2009 8 08 58 PM 4 29 2009 4 08 58 PM Communication error stream event 3022 4 29 2009 8 08 19 PM 4 29 2009 4 08 19 PM Communication established stream event 3010 4 29 2009 8 08 09 PM 4 29 2009 4 08 09 PM Communication error stream event 3022 4 29 2009 8 07 58 PM 4 29 2009 8 07 54 PM 4 29 2009 4 07 58 PM 4 29 2009 4 07 54 PM Communication established stream event 3010 Communication error stream event 3022 4 29 2009 8 07 39 PM 4 29 2009 4 07 39 PM Communication established stream event 3010 4 29 2009 8 07 30 PM 4 29 20
116. 4 Quetrchives Cunha Ounirckeve e You cannot select more than one archive for a camera However if you later want to use another archive for the camera you can simply run the wizard again and select another archive When ready click Next On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 95 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 4 The camera s archiving settings will be changed to reflect your selection A progress bar will indicate how the change progresses When ready the wizard will display a confirmation In case the selected archive could not be used the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem 5 When ready click Finish e List of Performed Archivings for Camera Each time archiving is performed for a camera according to the scheduling defined for the selected archive the archived recordings are stored in separate subdirectories under the selected archive location Technically each performed archiving is thus stored individually although this fact will be completely transparent when viewing the archived recordings with Ocularis Client Lite The fact that archived recordings are stored individually means that you are able to view a list of each performed archiving with exact timestamps information about the recordings included in each performed archiving e Path Path to the archive directory e Begin time Date and time of the oldest recording included in the performed archiving e End time
117. 500 MB of disk space will be available for operating system use and by using archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the databases e Database Configuration The Record tab s Database configuration section displays information about the database used for the camera e Database Configuration Section s Fields The Database Configuration section contains the following fields e Database Name Non editable field displaying the name of the database used for the camera e Database Path Non editable field displaying the path to the database used for the camera e Used Space Non editable field displaying the current size of the database for the camera On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 93 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Database Wizard The Database Configuration section features a Database Wizard button Clicking the Database Wizard button will start the Database Configuration Wizard with which you are able to quickly and conveniently empty or move the database for the camera Archiving Archiving Tab You are able to view and manage the archiving settings of a selected camera on the Archiving tab Note Being able to manage a camera s archiving settings requires that one or more archives have been defined on the recording server to which the camera belongs See About Archiving for more information Note Another tab called Archiving will be displayed if you view the properties of a record
118. 70 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Info Info Tab The Info tab lets you view and edit basic information about a selected speaker The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the speaker The name will be used whenever the speaker is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar drani Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the speaker A description is not compulsory The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the speaker s name in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar e Hardware name Name of the hardware with which the speaker is connected The field is non editable However the hardware name can be changed by clicking the Go To button next to the field Clicking the Go To button will take you to the hardware information where the name is editable e Unit number Non editable field displaying the unit on which the s
119. Database Wizard The Database Configuration section features a Database Wizard button Clicking the Database Wizard button will start the Database Configuration Wizard with which you are able to quickly and conveniently empty or move the database for the microphone Archiving Tab You are able to view and manage the archiving settings of a selected microphone on the Archiving tab Note Being able to manage a microphone s archiving settings requires that one or more archives have been defined on the recording server to which the microphone belongs See About Archiving for more information Note Another tab called Archiving will be displayed if you view the properties of a recording server this is where you create and manage the recording server s archives For more information see Archiving tab Recording Server Properties What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a microphone s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the microphone s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice See About Archiving for more information To access the Archiving tab select the required microphone in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 r Database abona Gon
120. G octanos 425 Virus Scanning Informat Nara teca E a 425 REMOVAL orinar 426 Download Manager REMOVAL cccccccseteee cece ee eeeeeeeeee teen eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetanaaeennngs 426 Management Clent Removal ni ia 426 Management Server Removal ni AA 426 NetMatroe Monitor REMOVAL usina ct toenbuenadet 428 Non Required Components Removal from Management ServVerF ccccconccccccnnnnnoss 428 Recording Server REMOVA dni aaa AAA aueaaeae woke 429 Oculanis Client Lite Removal 429 Video Device Drivers Removal isisniiaidn iia Madders 430 COPYRIGHT TRADEMARKS El Ge ia ias 431 COPIONE arin aa ns e e eS 431 Trademarks timido oia toca 431 DISCOS Sader diran ada dora saci 431 vil NetEVS 2 0 Table of Contents THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK viii User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Introductions Product Overview lt gt NetEVS is a fully distributed solution designed for large multi site and NZ multiple server installations requiring 24 7 surveillance with support for devices from different vendors The solution offers centralized management of all devices servers and users and empowers an extremely flexible rule system driven by schedules and events NetEVS consists of the following main elements e The Management Server is the center of your NetEVS installation o What Stores the surveillance system s configuration in a relational database either on the Management Server computer itself or on a separate SQL Server on the network Also han
121. IMPORTANT Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required The fact that the default rule is present does therefore not in itself guarantee that video will be recorded upon detected motion as the default rule may subsequently have been deactivated or modified Default Goto Preset when PTZ Is Done Rule NetEVS comes with a number of default rules one of them is the Default Goto Preset when PTZ is Done rule The rule ensures that PTZ Pan Tilt zoom cameras will go to their respective default preset positions after they have been operated manually IMPORTANT This rule is by default not enabled Even when the rule is enabled you must have defined default preset positions for the required PTZ cameras in order for the rule to work you do this on the Presets tab On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Managing Rules You create and manage rules in the Management Client In the NetEVS Manager s Navigation pane expand the Rules and Alerts folder then select Rules A Rules list will appear in the overview pane The Rules list provides an overview of all existing rules on your system From the Rules list you are able to create rules edit rules copy rules validate rules etc e Creating a New Rule 1 In the overview pane right click the Ru es item and select Add New Rule 5 E Ausl IB AR CTRL N 3 gt f Validate All Rules a Refresh FS
122. IP address allocation If using IPv4 you can read more about the range which goes from 232 0 1 0 to 232 255 255 255 at www iana org assignments multicast addresses If using IPv6 the range is different see www iana org assignments ipv6 multicast addresses Port In the Start field specify the first port number in the required range Then specify the last port number in the range in the End field Source IP address for all multicast streams If a recording server has more than one network interface card it is only possible to multicast on one of them This field is therefore relevant if your recording server has more than one network interface card or if it has a network interface card with more than one IP address To use the recording server s default interface simply leave the value 0 0 0 0 IPv4 or IPv6 in the field In case you want to use another network interface card or a different IP address on the same network interface card specify the IP address of the required interface e Datagram Options In this section you specify settings for data packets datagrams transmitted through multicasting MTU Maximum Transmission Unit the largest allowed physical data packet size measured in bytes Messages larger than the specified MTU will be split into smaller packets before being sent Default value is 1500 which is also the default on most Windows computers and Ethernet networks TTL Time To Live the largest allowe
123. In the properties pane s role settings list verify that the required user is listed c If the user is not listed add the required user to the Administrators role by clicking the Add button below the role settings list For more information see Assigning Users amp Groups to a Role 1 On the computer on which you will install the failover server shut down any OnSSI software running If upgrading it is highly recommended that you remove any previous versions of the failover server before upgrading 2 With an Internet Explorer browser connect to the NetEVS Management Server at the following address http Management Server address port installation admin where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server This will open the Management Server s built in web page If not accessing the web page on the Management Server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the Management Server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 23 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual oss NetEVS a NetEVS contains a set of administrative applications which are downloaded and installed from this page User applications can be found on the default download page If you want to view this page in another language use the language menu in the top right corner Video Device Drivers Installer Video Device Driv
124. Issue Recording Server Startup Fails due to Port Conflict On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 29 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual This is an issue if either the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Service or an existing installation of NetDVMS is running Both use port 25 If port 25 is already in use it may not be possible to start the NetEVS Recording Server service It is important that port number 25 is available for the recording server s SMTP service since many cameras are only capable of communicating via this port SMTP Service Verification and Solutions To verify whether SMTP Service is installed do the following 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Add or Remove Programs 3 In the left side of the Add or Remove Programs window click Add Remove Windows Components 4 In the Windows Components Wizard select the Internet Information Services IIS item and click the Details button 5 In the Internet Information Services IIS window verify whether the SMTP Service check box is selected If it is SMTP Service is installed If SMTP Service is installed select one of the following solutions e Solution 1 Disable SMTP Service or set it to manual startup This solution lets you start the recording server without having to stop the SMTP Service every time 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Administrative Tools 3 In t
125. License Information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 165 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Note The cameras or dedicated input output boxes for which you do not have a license will not send data to the surveillance system Cameras added after all available licenses are used are unavailable Cameras without licenses will be identified by an exclamation mark symbol when listed in the Management Client s overview pane Tip In the short period until you have obtained additional licenses you can disable some less important cameras to allow some of the new cameras to run instead See Managing Hardware for more information License Activation Activating Licenses You can activate your licenses in two ways online or offline Tip If the computer running the Management Client has internet access use online activation for a quick and convenient activation procedure e Activate Licenses Online 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Basics right click License Information and select Activate License Online 2 The Online Activation Wizard opens On the wizard s first step select either e Existing User to use an existing user account on the online licensing system OF e New User to set up a new user account on the online licensing system When ready click Next 2 On the wizard s next step specify user name and password Note If you select Save password the password will be saved on the computer and can be access
126. Management Server software use the following procedure on the computer on which the Management Server software is installed Note If you are not an NetEVS system administrator do not attempt to remove the software 426 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 Stop the Management Server by right clicking the Management Server icon in the computer s notification area also Known as the system tray then selecting Stop Management Server Service EN a o 10 33 AM _ X Example Management Server icon in notification area e Open Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window e Inthe Add or Remove Programs window select the NetEVS Management Server entry and click the Change Remove button e A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready 2 Removing the Management Server Database To remove your Management Server database use the following procedure on the computer on which Management Server is was installed Note If you are not an NetEVS system administrator do not attempt to remove the Management Server database IMPORTANT The database stores the configuration you have made through the NetEVS Management Client e important settings relating to cameras rules etc If you are removing software in preparation of upgrading to a newer version of NetEVS you should therefore typically not remove the d
127. Multicasting Managing Multicasting You specify multicasting settings for a recording server on the Multicast tab To access the Multicast tab expand Recording Servers in the Management Client s navigation pane select the required recording server then select the Multicast tab in the properties pane Multicasting is only possible for live streams not for recorded video audio Note The successful implementation of multicasting also requires that your network equipment switches etc has been set up to relay multicast data packets to the required group of recipients only If not multicasting may not be different from broadcasting which can significantly slow down network communication See also About Multicasting On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 211 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Pi nga e Mukan re corhgurstor Eraba rra Bee NA tn address hom Geis nge i aged lo ney mias otra that aoe glarhed oni the esconding pene IP sckchess Sart 201 0 End 201 0 Fost Sant EXI End 7o00 Source IP address for all m tica crear 00100 Pal D000 Wise defaul miia IP Une dela interlace Osean cps HTU 1500 TIL 12 Y rio re Setting ig Storage ES Acheng t F ilire Migticart aT Haak e Enabling Multicasting On the Multicast tab select the Enable multicast check box If the entire IP address range for multicast see the following is already in use on one or more other recording servers you cannot enable multicasti
128. NetDVMS Servers lets you add NetDVMS surveillance system servers specifically and receive data from them in your NetEVS system See Integrating NetDVMS Servers for more information View Groups opens the Add Remove View Group window which lets you add remove and edit the names of view groups By default all roles you define in the Management Client are also created as a view group The view groups in the Management Client will be created as shared view groups in Ocularis Client Lite and be made available for users and groups with corresponding roles NetMatrix Configuration lets you configure connections to NetMatrix recipients i e computers with the NetMatrix Monitor or Ocularis Client Lite installed so they can receive distributed video from NetEVS Effective Roles lets you view all roles of a selected user or group This is especially convenient if you have imported groups of users in fact it is the only way of viewing the roles of individual group members For more information see Viewing Effective Roles Options opens the Options dialog which lets you define and edit several global NetEVS settings There are settings for logs user defined events and general settings for the preview pane If you want to use notification profiles you are also able to define settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server and for AVI generation Help Menu de Edit View Action Tools Help
129. OTip A time profile is able to contain several periods of time If you want your time profile to contain further periods of time simply add more single times or recurring times e Specifying a Recurring Time When you select Add Recurring Time the Select Recurring Time window appears a Select Recurring Time 5 Time range Stat 1 30 PA a End Cimsbicrr 1 5 hours 1 Recurrente pater Daly Rec even 7 wakia or weekly C Monthly O Sunday Monday C Tuesday C Wednesday Oea C Thursday C Friday C Saturday Range of recurence sat Mon 152005 Ng end dale End after 10 socur nces End bx Men 11 7 2005 cova Time and date format may be different on your system In the Select Time window specify time range recurrence pattern and range of recurrence Click OK Orip A time profile is able to contain several periods of time If you want your time profile to contain further periods of time simply add more single times or recurring times 4 When you have specified the required time periods for your time profile click the Time Profile window s OK button Your new time profile is added to the Time Profiles list in the overview pane Time FProhles 2 Time Profiles New time profile appearing in Time Profiles list If at a later stage you wish to edit or delete the time profile you can do that from the Time Profiles list e Editing a Time Profile 380 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc U
130. Output Related Rules oooccccccccccccnncccccncrcnr rn rr rr 230 PUDE AQURESS Sica ASA A AAA 233 Managing PUbIC ACATESS OS AAA A 233 RECOFGING SE VeES iaa 235 Ma aging Recording Servers 235 How to Verify Change Management Servers sssssssssrsrrrrersrsrrnrerrrrnrerereear 238 Database Management sisi 240 Recording Server Properties ssssssssssssssnsnesesssssressrosnsnnsnsnenennnenenenessune 244 Benefit of Using Failover GrOUPS ccccccccoccncnnncncccncccn narrar rar rr rr 248 Primary and Secondary Failover GroUpD sssssssssssesssssrssessnsssnsnnnnnensnesesense 249 How to Select Required Failover GrOUPS sssessssssesesesessssssssssnenenenennsrssene 249 Adding Hardware Cameras tC ociccccccccnnnnnnccccnorcnan nan rar rr rr 253 Managing Added Hardware ccscccccccssccscseceuceccecsccusnaneeeeettecggnenntesssssaguags 258 DISADI Nai 259 Ee WG asia cada aaa saco ilaen ss 260 Table Of Contents NetEVS 2 0 ENADING sates aatcok ctutaneae sais iio o idas 262 PIS DIN in ias 262 ATEO aa 267 Back Up Archives Rather than Camera DatabDa Se S cccccceseeeeeeeeneeseeeeeees 268 Knowing Archive Structure Lets You Target BackupS 0ccccccccccccnnnnnannnnannnnnn ao 268 Viewing Backed Up ArGChiVeS ostia aia 269 Roess USers Sc RO NES AA AAA 282 ROS isa 282 USES GROUP a o dit ate o el haters 296 PIELCGUISILES cascara DD DI ISI 296 O 296 A A er eee ere ee ok gen er ee Oy ee ee eer re 297 O tera wa ae see e
131. Public Access To enable public access select the Network tab s Enable public access box Defining Public Address and Port When public access is enabled you are able to define the recording server s public address and public port number in the Public address and Public port fields respectively As public address use the address of the firewall or NAT router which clients accessing the surveillance system from the internet must go through in order to reach recording servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 233 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 234 Specifying a public port number is compulsory it is always a good idea that port numbers used on the firewall or NAT router are different from the ones used locally Note When using public access the firewall or NAT router used must be configured so requests sent to the public address and port are forwarded to the local address and port of relevant recording servers Local IP Ranges There are cases when the recording server s public address should not be used When access clients connect from the local network the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether an access client belongs on a local IP range or on the internet For this purpose you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from a local network You do this by clicking the Network ta
132. S supports multicasting sending of single data packets to multiple recipients within a group thereby saving bandwidth and system resources of live streams from recording servers to Ocularis Client Lite To enable multicasting of live streams from the selected camera select the check box Remember that for the feature to work multicasting must also be configured for the recording server see Managing Multicasting If multicasting is not possible for example due to restrictions on the network or on individual clients NetEVS will revert to unicasting sending of separate data packets to 112 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 separates recipients e Default microphone Select a default microphone for Ocularis Client Lite to use by default when a user selects this particular camera A user can select another microphone if desired However while you have defined a default microphone for a camera it cannot be guaranteed that all Ocularis Client Lite users will hear audio from this microphone Some users may not have speakers attached some users may not have the rights required to listen to audio etc e Default Speaker Select a default speaker for Ocularis Client Lite to use by default when a user selects this particular camera A user can select another speaker if desired However while you have defined a default speaker for a camera it cannot be guaranteed that all Ocularis Client Lite users will be able to
133. Server Service Note While the Recording Server service is stopped NetEVS will not be able to interact with devices connected to the recording server Consequently no live viewing or recording will be possible 1 Right click the notification area s recording server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Recording Server Service Stop Recording Server Service p Show Stabus Messages Change Settings About Exit Recording Server Manager Changing Basic Recording Server Settings To change basic settings for the Recording Server service such as which port numbers to use do the following Note In order to be able to change settings the Recording Server service must be stopped While the Recording Server service is stopped NetEVS will not be able to interact with devices connected to the recording server Consequently no live viewing or recording will be possible 1 Right click the notification area s recording server icon On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Recording Server Service Stop Recording Server Service K Show Status Messages Change Settings About Exit Recording Server Manager 3 Right click the notification area s recording server icon again 4 From the menu that appears select Change Settings start Recording Server Service Show Stabus Messages Change Settings US About Exit Recording Se
134. Stop the Recording Server service by right clicking the recording server icon in the computer s notification area also known as the system tray then selecting Stop Recording Server Service EN a E 10 33 AM EE Example recording server notification area icon 2 Open Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 3 In the Add or Remove Programs window select the NetEVS Recording Server entry and click the Change Remove button 4 A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready Ocularis Client Lite Removal To remove Ocularis Client Lite do the following on the computer on which Ocularis Client Lite is installed 1 In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 In the Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select Ocularis Client Lite x x where x x refers to the version number 3 Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 429 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Video Device Drivers Removal Note Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to a recording server When the video device drivers are removed communication between the recording server and the camera devices will no longer be possibl
135. To access the Archiving tab select the required microphone in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane i Dalaba abrira Gorin shor Te Enable saechiang Duri thesducheve Boche path Liu uchr Terehe Desue maip dap every 10 e biar 00 00 and 23055 Footer DB 1 hours Saches 1 days 1 GE Eegn Tine End Tire 16 01 2007 1110000 1601007 1 19 3 Cialis 141 2007 11 0000 16012007 110953 Cuh 16 09 2007 10 50 00 16 01 2007 10 59 59 1600 40 10443 1601 00 10 43 3 Gh Setting Gp info Recod E Archiving Y Everts 2 Motion e Database Archiving Configuration The Database archiving information section in the upper part of the tab contains the following e Enable archiving Only available if one or more archives have been created on the recording server Selecting box lets you enable archiving for the microphone in question If you do not use the Archive Wizard to specify 206 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 otherwise archiving of recordings from the microphone will take place in the recording server s default archive Archive name Name of the archive selected for the recording server Archive path Path to the archive directory Schedule Archiving schedule i e how often archiving should take place Scheduling is defined for each of a recording server s archives and thus depends on the selected archive Retention Retention time for database
136. To verify whether the user account has access to your NetEVS system do the following 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and select Roles 2 In the overview pane s roles list select the Administrators role 3 In the properties pane s role settings list verify that the required user is listed If the user is not listed add the required user to the Administrators role by clicking the Add button below the role settings list For more information see Assigning Users amp Groups to a Role e Starting the Failover Server Service The Failover Server service starts automatically However if you have stopped the service manually you can start it the following way 1 Right click the notification area s failover server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Start Failover Server Service Start Failover Server Service Show Status Messages Change Settings About Exit Failover Server Manager e Stopping the Failover Server Service Note While the Failover Server service is stopped the failover server will not be able to take over from regular recording servers 1 Right click the notification area s Failover Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Failover Server Service On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 47 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Changing the Management Server Address The failover server must be able to communicate with your NetEVS system s
137. Too s gt Trusted Servers 2 The Add Remove Servers window opens From this window you can manage trusted servers 382 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 AddRemeve Servers ES Leert k Hare UAL Slate as Cial paniki hiipi Urrira Important Berea bit 001 PD Unkincawn Ed Segre aed Serre hipaa T241 1 Unifar itd Sara Hip 00010 11 544 Line ripper Fieras Mabasa Cisa e Adding Trusted Servers 1 In the Add Remove Servers window click the Add button 2 In the Add Server window specify the following e Name Name of the trusted server the name is only used for display purposes in the Management Client e Server Address IP address or hostname of the trusted server If specifying a hostname the host in question must exist and be available on the network Server addresses must not contain slashes or begin with http or https NetEVS automatically adds http to the server address once you add the server Add Server g Hai Server didas 3 When ready click OK If more trusted servers are required repeat steps 1 3 e Network Configuration With the network configuration settings you specify the NetEVS Management Server s server LAN and WAN addresses in order for the NetEVS Management Server and the trusted servers to be able to communicate 1 In the Add Remove Servers window click Network 2 Specify the LAN and or WAN IP address of the NetEVS Manageme
138. User Manual IMPORTANT Removing a recording server will remove all configuration specified for the recording server through the Management Client including all of the recording server s associated hardware cameras input devices etc 1 Expand the Servers folder in the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane and select the Recording Servers node 2 Right click the no longer required recording server in the overview pane 3 From the menu that appears select Remove Recording Server 4 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the recording server and all of its associated hardware from the NetEVS system If you are sure click Yes 5 The recording server and all of its associated hardware will be removed e Troubleshooting Missing Recording Servers If you have installed several recording servers on your surveillance system the recording servers should automatically be listed in the Management Client If your Management Client does not list all the recording servers you have installed the most likely reason is that the missing recording servers have not been correctly configured to connect to the Management Server in a NetEVS system recording servers point to Management Servers not the other way round The configuration normally takes place during one of the steps in the recording server installation process During installation of the recording server you specified recording server setup parameters among these the
139. Window gt Wi C gt Window gt Door Plugins to disable MotionDetectionPlugin Add Remove Y Customize transitions E Go to specific preset on finish E Info 3 Settings 3 Streams Record E Archiving Presets EY Patrolling WL lt L gt Patrolling tab displaying a patrolling profile with customized transitions e Adding a New Patrolling Profile 1 Click the New button This will open the Add New Profile dialog 2 In the Add New Profile dialog specify a name for the patrolling profile Add Hew Profile Egi Entes proble mames ayhan Fotolia La Orip Use a descriptive name the name of the patrolling profile may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about the patrolling profile e g when using the patrolling profile in a rule 3 Click OK The new patrolling profile will be added to the Patrolling tab s Profile list You are now able to specify required preset positions and other settings for the patrolling profile e Specifying Preset Positions for Use in a Patrolling Profile 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list Froldea Daytme Patrolling w Daytime Patrolling N Nighthine Fatoling y La aie ond a E tei 2 Click the Add button This will open the Se ect Preset dialog 102 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 3 Inthe Select Preset dialog select the preset positions requi
140. a in question In order to work as intended some or all of the properties must be specified identically on the camera device as well as on NetEVS Even though the following list is not exhaustive you may often be able to specify the following properties e Enabled Determines whether use of the hardware configurable event is enabled Select True to enable select Fa se to disable e Include Images Determines whether video should be sent from the camera to NetEVS when the event occurs Select True if video is required select False if video is not required e Motion Window Many cameras capable of detecting motion can be configured with different motion detection settings for different parts the camera s images For example if a camera covers a two lane road different motion detection settings may have been defined for the right lane and left lane area of the camera s images Such areas are generally known as motion windows Provided one or more motion windows have been defined on the camera device the Motion Window setting lets you specify which motion window to use for the event When the camera detects motion within the specified motion window the event will occur When specifying use of a motion window make sure you type the name of the motion window exactly as it has been specified on the camera Note You can only specify one motion window in the field However you are able to add more than one instance of an event see Usin
141. abase to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice Archiving is configured on a per recording server basis Once you have configured the archiving settings for a recording server where to store archives how often to transfer recordings to the archives etc you can enable archiving for individual cameras When archiving is enabled for a camera the contents of the camera s database will automatically be moved to an archive at regular intervals Dl configure any required failover servers A failover server is a spare recording server which can take over in case a regular recording server becomes unavailable See About Failover Servers Dl configure each recording server s individual cameras See Managing Cameras rip You are able to group cameras and configure common properties for all cameras within a group in one go Tip Motion detection a vital setting on most IP surveillance systems is enabled by default However you may want to fine tune motion detection settings or disable motion detection for particular cameras DlEnable and configure microphones if any See About Microphones DlEnable and configure speakers if any See About Speakers DlEnable and configure input if any See About Inputs 64 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc U
142. abase uses the default name Enter database name Surveillance Olaf ope e rt is adr erir ra cae ed rd Dala Example During Management Server installation it is possible to change the database name from the default name Surveillance to another name Right click the Surveillance database and select Tasks gt Back Up gb Mio1232 SQL Server 9 0 3042 3 Databases 3 System Databases O Ginea a g si New Database A CI Secur 3 New Query Serve Script Database as P La Replc 5 Ga Tasks Detach Rename Shrink Daite Back Up Refresh Restore j Properties erases Generate Scripts 4 On the Back Up Database dialog s General page do the following 416 e Under Source Verify that the selected database is Surveillance and that the backup type is Full e Under destination A destination path for the backup is automatically suggested Verify that the path is satisfactory If not remove the Suggested path and add another path of your choice On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 A Bak Up Database Sui ok 7 Daa y Some q y Hep A Esas Tarca Ha model Driug h Full m dae a Emi A har uranio ll Ci pence Echo Dao Bap val ll ee E dd ci der 5 On the Back Up Database dialog s Options page do the following e Under Reliability Select Verify backup when finished and Perform checksum before writing to media 6 When ready
143. able to configure preset positions and patrolling for the PTZ camera s in question e Disabling PTZ on a Video Encoder To disable the use of PTZ cameras on a video encoder do the following on the PTZ tab 1 In the list of devices connected to the video encoder clear the Enable PTZ box for the camera s on which you no longer want to use PTZ Dewi nable PTZ Camera 3 2 Save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar 266 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Archiving About Archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice Archiving is configured on a per recording server basis Once you have configured the archiving settings for a recording server where to store archives how often to transfer recordings to the archives etc you can enable archiving for individual cameras When archiving is enabled for a camera the contents of the camera s database will automatically be moved to an archive at regular intervals Depending on your requirements you are able to configure one or more archives for each of your recording servers Archives can be located either on the recording server computer it
144. able to patrol according to two different patrolling profiles and a time profile being used to determine which patrolling profile should be used Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e You have specified a time profile covering at least one of the time periods you want to differentiate between You could specify time profiles covering both time periods but it will not be necessary since rules can be set up to apply within as well as outside a time profile To specify a time profile expand Rules and Alerts in the Management Client s navigation pane then select Time Profiles The Time Profiles list will appear In the Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add New Time Profile For detailed information about specifying time profiles see Managing Time Profiles e The camera in question is a PTZ camera e Preset positions and at least two patrolling profiles are defined for the camera When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it moves between a number of preset positions Thus before you able to define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera the preset positions required for the patrolling profiles must be defined To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s navigation pane and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the overview pane Select the required PTZ camera from the list and select the Presets tab in the properti
145. ad of right clicking to select Add New Time Profile you may simply press CTRL N on your keyboard 378 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 This will open the Time Profile window A Time Profr E yr Todas Fis polls CO m Darien E ee a sd iea M in 8 ae a Ln po 11 L 12 Saal Di Cancel Time and date format may be different on your system 2 In the Time Profile window type a name for the new time profile in the Name field Optionally type a description of the new time profile in the Description field 3 In the Time Profile window s calendar select either Day View Week View or Month View then right click inside the calendar and select either Add Single Time or Add Recurrence Time Grip If you select a time period by dragging in the calendar before right clicking the selected period will automatically be used in the dialog that appears when you select Add Single Time or Add Recurring Time e Specifying a Single Time When you select Add Single Time the Select Time window appears m Select Time E Skad irme Men 952005 s DPM E rod time Mon 252005 we 300 FM O A dey event Time and date format may be different on your system In the Select Time window specify Start time and End time If the time is to cover whole days select the A day event box Then click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 379 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual
146. ae aa nae cae 303 ADOUC RUNES ais 303 Manada RUGS mia 309 DEACTIVAUNG a Rule an 314 Activa tno RM DO 315 EVERS OVEFVISW tii sd A eds 319 ACUONS SLOP Actions OVEIWISWissisisaraa cda 325 Howto Create Typical RUGS cia ide 332 Basi RUGS ir dia 333 P EZ Rel ate RUS 333 Prerrequisito naa hates bernie ade 334 Creatina the RUS 335 A SS E 339 Creating tne Uli oi 340 PRE FS USOS asada anoto ran ena aes 345 Creating the First Rule Patrolling During Daytime ssssssssssssrsrnrsnsnerersrsns 345 Creating the Second Rule Patrolling During Nighttime cc cece eee eens 349 POr QUISIMOS ii A A a 350 creating tie RUNS rai 351 SMTP Mall Severa As 356 Outgoing SMTP Mail Server SettingS ommmccocccccnnccnnna ronca rr 356 SP Saona diosss 357 ADOUE SPEARS isc 357 Man AGING Speakers ini 358 Enabling and Disabling PrebufferinQ coooccccccccccccccnnncnanarrccrrcn rr rr rro 362 Specifying PreDUFer SIZE ata EAE AN a anes 362 Using Prebuffering in RUS iia ios 362 Database Management 368 NetEVS 2 0 Table of Contents SEUS epic state emene say ienceaenoeane 371 RECO IN A nha etenee 372 Enabling and Disabling Prebuffering cccssccccesccssccuuuncceeeusseeccesnureeneessaauags 373 Specityina PREDUIMEr SIZE aa ica 374 Using Prebufering IN RUIG S nia a aa aaoi 374 AFC ANIO rn ra nos 375 Mae PROMO Sisa NN 378 Manan Time PRO Mesias 378 MUSES SEVEN A SS 382 Managing Trusted Serve Sas iaa 382 User DENEA EVENTS ar na Ar ETE A A RATAA 384
147. agement Client can be given access to data from NetDVMS servers This is done by coupling NetEVS roles with NetDVMS user rights e Prerequisites On the NetDVMS server open the Image Server Administrator window to see if one of the NetDVMS users has user rights that can be used in connection with an NetEVS role 392 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Write the NetDVMS user s user name and password or Windows account down You will need this information when you use NetEVS s Management Client to define roles with access to NetDVMS servers Note that user names and passwords are case sensitive You can also create a new user in NetDVMS and assign the required user rights in NetDVMS so they match the NetEVS role See the NetDVMS documentation for more information about creating new users in NetDVMS Note Before you are able to give roles access to NetDVMS servers the servers must be added through NetEVS s Management Client See Managing NetDVMS Servers for more information Process of Defining Roles To give access to data from NetDVMS servers do the following in the NetEVS Management Client 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and select Roles 2 Select the required role from the list If you want to define a new role see About Roles for more information 3 At the bottom of the Role Settings pane select the NetDVMS Servers tab 4 Select the NetDVMS server to which you w
148. ager s navigation pane and select the required log If you want to target the exported log s content select the required criteria in the Search criteria section above the log For example you may select that your export Should only contain log messages at a particular level such as errors or warnings Remember to click the Refresh button to make the log page reflect your selected criteria ES 4 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Action gt Export Log This will open the Export Log window Export Log ES r Export nioma s Fiersa Fin L ri Em Espot eige Stat date ad ime 120500 11 25 36 AM e End date and me AO 11 25 oe we He Cie In the Export Log window s Filename field specify a name for the exported log file By default exported log files will be saved in your My Documents folder However you are able to specify a different location by clicking the browse button l l next to the field Any criteria you have selected in order to target the content of the exported log will be listed in the Filters field The field is non editable if you find that you need to change your criteria close the window and repeat steps 2 4 Specify the time period you want the export to cover You do this by specifying the required boundaries in the Start date and time and End date and time fields respectively By clicking the arrow you are able to select the required date from a calendar On Net Surveillance Systems
149. ailover servers use the Failover tab to select which groups of failover servers should take over from a regular recording server in case the recording server in question becomes unavailable To access the Failover tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Failover tab in the properties pane Peg 3 Falo corde on Fakri group Prena Pao group F kina Gro 1 e arian Lak yoe F akra Gree Sere Farid pende Corea por TOPE 11000 Char thee por peques Betta ol hs better dev 4 nio Gb Setting od Storage ip Archer E Fado 17 e Selecting Required Failover Groups Failover servers are always grouped a group can contain one or more failover servers Benefit of Using Failover Groups Grouping has a clear benefit When you specify which failover servers should be able to take over from a recording server you do not select a particular failover server rather you select a failover group If the selected group contains more than one 248 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 failover server this gives you the security of being able to have more than just one failover server ready to take over if the recording server becomes unavailable For information about configuring failover groups see Managing Failover Servers Primary and Secondary Failover Group For each recording server you are able to select a primary and an optional secondary failover group If the recording server b
150. al NetEVS 2 0 When the speaker active it is shown as e Using Device Groups for Convenient Speaker Management You are able to group the speakers in your speaker list by using device groups Device groups let you specify common properties for all speakers within a device group in one go For more information see Using Device Groups e Speaker List s Status Icons The following icons are used to indicate the status of each speaker E Speaker is enabled An enabled speaker can communicate with the recording server and can if required be started stopped automatically through a rule ry Speaker is being recorded Note that what is being said through the speaker can be recorded but cannot subsequently be played back or exported for example to prove that a warning was given Speaker is communicating with NetEVS Gi Speaker is temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when the speaker is communicating with NetEVS while the speaker is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Defau t Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules A Speaker is disabled A disabled speaker cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server Speaker requires attention Status unknown E Note that some icons may be combined as in this example where Speaker is enabled is combined with Speaker is being recorded since a speaker being recorded is also an enabled speake
151. also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice The Events tab for managing hardware configurable events The Client tab lets you specify information which will affect access client s use of the selected camera The Motion tab for managing the selected camera s motion detection settings e Using Device Groups for Convenient Camera Management Group the cameras in your camera list by using device groups Device groups let you specify common properties for all cameras within a device group in one go For more information see Using Device Groups e Camera List Status Icons The following icons are used to indicate the status of each camera in the camera list a0 a p Camera is enabled Camera is recording Camera is communicating Camera Is stopped A stopped camera can be started automatically through a rule When a camera is stopped no information is transferred from the camera to NetEVS in which case neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a stopped device will still be able to communicate with the recording server aS opposed to when the device is disabled Camera Is disabled A disabled camera cannot be started automatically through a rule it must be enabled manually in the Management Client When a camera is disabled neither live viewing nor recording will be possible A disabled device will not be able to communicate with the recording server aS opposed to when
152. ame rate e Start and stop PTZ patrolling e Pause and resume PTZ patrolling e Move PTZ cameras to specific positions e Set output to activated deactivated state e Send notifications via e mail e Generate log entries e Generate alerts e Apply new device settings for example a different resolution on a camera e Make video appear in NetMatrix recipients NetMatrix is an integrated system for viewing of video from any camera on any monitor on a network operating with NetEVS e Start and stop plugins e Start and stop feeds from devices How is stopping the feed from a device different from manually disabling the device Stopping a device means that video will no longer be transferred from the device to NetEVS in which case neither live viewing nor recording will be possible However a device on which the feed has been stopped will still be able to communicate with the recording server and the feed from device can be started automatically through a rule as opposed to when the device is manually disabled in the Management Client IMPORTANT Some rule content may require that certain features are enabled for the devices in question For example a rule specifying that a camera should record will not work as intended if recording is not enabled for the camera in question Before creating a rule it is therefore highly recommended that you verify that the devices involved will be able to perform as intended For a number of typically required rules such p
153. and empty database it is important that it has the same name as the backed up database if your backed up database has the default name Surveillance just use the default name Surveillance when creating the new database too The password for the database is not significant in this backup restore context but we recommend that you just use the default setting Allow server to control password Restoring the System Configuration OThe following only applies if you are storing your NetEVS system s configuration in a SQL Server Express Edition database on the Management Server itself Prerequisite Stop the Management Server Service on the new Management Server to prevent configuration changes being made until you have restored the system configuration database 1 Open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express from Windows Start menu by selecting A Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server 2005 gt SQL Server Management Studio Express When you open the tool you are prompted to connect to a server Specify the name of the required SQL Server and connect with the defaults Tip You do not have to type the name of the SQL server If you click inside the Server name field and select lt Browse for more gt you can select the required SQL Server from a list instead 2 Once connected you will see a tree structure in the Object Explorer in the left part of the window Expand the SQL Server item then the Databases item 3 Right click th
154. and manage the archiving settings of a selected recording server on the Archiving tab Management of the recording server s archiving settings takes place through the Archive Wizard which you can access from the Archiving tab What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice See About Archiving for more information To access the Archiving tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane Note Another tab called Archiving will be displayed if you view the properties of an individual camera this is where you enable disable archiving for the camera in question For more information see Archiving tab Camera Properties 246 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Hes chale 1201 2007 11 50 00 dr Lettre ri ladon F Siaga El Auch e Archiving Tab s List of Archives Each archive you have added through the Archive Wizard will be listed with the following information e Name Name of the archive e Progress Displays the percentage of completion for any ongoing archiving process If archiving is not ongoing no information is displayed e Location Path to the
155. ant to assign the role 5 Select a user with the NetDVMS user rights that represent the correct user rights for the NetEVS role you are assigning it to You can do this in two ways e Inthe Basic Authentication section enter the user name and password for a user which is defined as basic authenticated user in NetDVMS Or e Inthe Windows Authentication section enter the Windows account name for a user which is defined as a Windows authenticated user in NetDVMS Grip If in doubt whether a user is defined as a Basic or Windows authenticated user in NetDVMS open the Image Server Administrator window on the NetDVMS server and click the User Setup button See the NetDVMS documentation for more information Note The selected NetDVMS user has not automatically been assigned to the role in question through NetEVS s Management Client The user s NetDVMS user rights have just been borrowed by the role but the actual user has not been assigned to the role On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 393 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Note NetEVS does not verify that the specified user name or password is correct or that the specified user name password or Windows account name correspond to a defined user in NetDVMS Therefore make sure that you enter the information correctly Note also that user names and passwords are case sensitive 6 From the File menu select Save to save your settings 394 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Man
156. ant to create a new database use an existing database or overwrite an existing database For a new installation you would typically select the default option Create new database However if you are installing the database as part of upgrading to a newer version of NetEVS and you want to use your existing database make sure you select Use existing database On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 When you have prepared the database you will be returned to the NetEVS Server Installation window for the last step in the Management Server installation e Step 3 NetEVS Management Server This step opens a wizard which will guide you through the process of installing the Management Server software itself NetEVS Server Setup Welcome to the NetEVS Server Setup This wizard will guide Les through the process of specifying license He nformation web server site na installing the server To continue click Next Opening page in Management Server Setup Wizard Simply follow the wizard s steps by clicking the Next button OTip The wizard will ask you to specify your SLC Software License Code and the location of your temporary license lic file The system will verify both before you are able to continue Therefore have your SLC and license file ready On one of the wizard s steps you will be asked to select an IIS Internet Information Services web site for the Management Server service ormat
157. archive directory e Disk Free Space Free space left on the disk on which the archive is located not free space left in the archive itself e Used Space Space used in the archive e Default Checked box indicates which archive is the recording server s default archive e Schedule Archiving schedule i e how often archiving should take place tip You may have to use the tab s horizontal scroll bar to view all columns in the list e Accessing the Archive Wizard To access the Archive Wizard from the Archiving tab click the tab s Archive Wizard button e Monitoring Archives Status On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 247 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual The lower part of the Archiving tab displays status information about the archive you have selected in the list in the upper part of the tab e Started Displays the start date and time of any ongoing archiving process If archiving is not ongoing no information is displayed e Estimated completion Displays an estimated completion time for any Ongoing archiving process If archiving is not ongoing no information is displayed While archiving is ongoing a bar displays the percentage of completion e Next scheduled Displays the date and time of the next scheduled archiving Failover Tab A failover server is a spare recording server which can take over in case a regular recording server becomes unavailable see also About Failover Servers If your organization uses f
158. archives have been created on the recording server Selecting box lets you enable archiving for the camera in question If you do not use the Archive Wizard to specify otherwise archiving of recordings from the camera will take place in the recording server s default archive e Archive name Name of the archive selected for the recording server e Archive path Path to the archive directory e Schedule Archiving schedule i e how often archiving should take place Scheduling is defined for each of a recording server s archives and thus depends on the selected archive e Retention Retention time for database in hours and archive in days and GB as specified when defining archives through the Archive Wizard e Using Archive Wizard to Select Archive for Camera When archiving is enabled for a camera the camera s recordings will by default be archived in the default archive of the recording server to which the camera belongs If more than one archive has been created on the recording server you can use the Archive Wizard to archiving location for the camera 1 Click the Archiving tab s Archive Wizard button to open the Database Archiving Configuration Wizard normally just referred to as the Archive Wizard 2 When dealing with a camera the wizard only offers one option Se ect archive for device Click Next to continue 3 In the Archive Name column select the required archive Device Hama Anchia Hara Path Camera
159. ast one patrolling scheme must be defined for the PTZ camera in question Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e The camera in question is a PTZ camera e At least two preset positions are defined for the camera To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s navigation pane and select Cameras Then in the overview pane expand the All Cameras folder to display a list of cameras Select the required PTZ camera from the list and select the Presets tab in the properties pane For descriptions of the exact functionality of the Presets tab see Preset Positions e At least one patrolling profile is defined for the camera To define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s navigation pane and select Cameras Then in the overview pane expand the All Cameras folder to display a list of cameras Select the required PTZ camera from On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 339 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual the list and select the Patrolling tab in the properties pane For descriptions of the exact functionality of the Patrolling tab see Patrolling Creating the Rule 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts then right click Rules and select Add New Rule E fesi B E Add New Rule pa CTRLHN Validate All Rules F Refresh F5 x Tip Instead of right clicking t
160. at one or more plugins are available on your system No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Stops one or more plugins When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select required plugins and on which devices to stop the plugins Note This type of action requires that at one or more plugins are available on your system No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Changes device settings When you select this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select required devices and you On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 331 NetEVS 2 0 lt devices gt Set NetMatrix to view lt devices gt User Manual will be able to define required settings on the devices you have specified Note If defining settings for more than one device you will only be able to change settings that are available for all of the specified devices Example You specify that the action should be linked to Device 1 and Device 2 Device 1 has the settings A B and C and Device 2 has the settings B C and D In this case you will only be able to change the settings that are available for both devices na
161. atabase When installing the newer version you will get the option of using the existing database e Open Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window e Inthe Add or Remove Programs window select the NetEVS Database Server entry and click the Change Remove button e A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 427 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual NetMatrix Monitor Removal Note If you are not a surveillance system administrator it is highly recommended that you consult your surveillance system administrator before removing any surveillance system related software Prerequisites Before removing the NetMatrix Monitor make sure the application is not running If the NetMatrix Monitor is running shut it down by right clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also Known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen then selecting Exit Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor To remove the NetMatrix Monitor application do the following e In Windows Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window e Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs s
162. ate the rule later 338 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 15 Click the wizard s Finish button This will add your new rule to the list of rules Rule a S E Aules Alert on Qubput Actvated ee A A A A EOE EN D E D A N A E EEE n a Ea aa ay E Camera 1 Record on Motion Examples PTZ Related Rules Use Specific Patrolling Profile During Specific Part of Day Note The rule described in the following is an example only If wishing to base a real life rule on the example be prepared to substitute the example s device names and parameters with device names and parameters relevant to your system This rule ensures the following e During a specific part of a specific day a specific PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile A patrolling profile is the exact definition of how patrolling should be carried out including the sequence for moving between preset positions timing settings etc e When the specified part of the day ends the PTZ camera will stop patrolling Grip If when patrolling stops you want the PTZ camera to immediately start patrolling according to another patrolling profile use the principle described in the example Use Different Patrolling Profiles for Day Night Prerequisites When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it continuously moves between different preset positions Therefore the required preset positions and at le
163. ator rights Failover Servers Are Grouped Failover servers are always grouped a group can contain one or more failover servers Grouping has a clear benefit When you later specify which failover servers should be able to take over from a recording server you do not select a particular failover server rather you select a group of failover servers If the selected group contains more than one failover server this gives you the security of being able to have more than just one failover server ready to take over if the recording server becomes unavailable Initially your failover servers will all appear in the group Unused Failover Servers Navigation AAA HE NetEVS Failover Groups 1 Basics 87 Unused Failover Servers ig Getting Started J My failover server License Information EJ Servers gy Recording Servers Falover Servers 5 Devices A red x on a failover server icon simply indicates that the failover server in question is currently not in use Creating Failover Groups You can create as many new failover groups as required In the overview pane right click Failover Groups and select Add Group from the menu that appears On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 q _A MMMM fy Unused he Add Group I Specify a name and a description optional of your new group then click OK Adding Failover Servers to a Group In the overview pane right click the group to which you want to add
164. atrix Monitor window should react when a disconnect command is received o Show Alert If selected this setting will show a small alert box in the bottom right corner of your screen when a disconnect command is received The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds o Hide Window If selected this setting will automatically send the NetMatrix Monitor window to hidden mode when a disconnect command is received When the window is in hidden mode you still be able to access it by clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray 6 When ready click OK e Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor 1 Open the NetMatrix Monitor window 406 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Right click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window and select Config from the menu that appears Pull Screen wf Always On Top Config Le Hide Window 2 Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Password Validation E Enter Pasovend o Cancel 3 Click OK This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Each of the window s settings is described in the previous section First Time Configuration 4 Make the required changes and click OK when ready Day to Day Use of the NetMatrix Monitor You watch video feeds from connected cameras in the NetMatrix Monitor window Opening the NetMatrix Mon
165. atrix is configured on the NetEVS system by through the Management Client The NetMatrix Monitor application is one of two options for viewing NetMatrix triggered video on client computers the other option is Ocularis Client Lite Note It is not possible to use the NetMatrix Monitor application if your NetEVS system uses IPv6 A computer on which NetMatrix triggered video can be shown is known as a NetMatrix recipient Being able to view NetMatrix triggered video requires that either the dedicated NetMatrix Monitor application or Ocularis Client Lite is installed on the NetMatrix recipient This section describes the NetMatrix Monitor application Example Viewing video in the NetMatrix Monitor There are two ways in which NetMatrix triggered video can appear on a NetMatrix recipient e Another user wants to share important video and sends it to the required NetMatrix recipient e The video is sent to the required NetMatrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs on the surveillance system for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened or when the surveillance system detects motion in the video from a camera As part of the video exchange between computers on the NetMatrix enabled surveillance system certain computers are able to send commands to NetMatrix recipients The commands typically tell the NetMatrix recipients to connect to or disconnect from video feeds from a particular cameras Exa
166. ault database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice See About Archiving for more information To access the Archiving tab select the required speaker in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 375 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Database corbiguraton Enable sching Auch narra Chur theaducheve fechere path CDi hch E crecida Digri resta dap every 10 e ian 00 00 and 23055 Fenian DB 1 hours Aacha 1 dave 1 GE __Hechive Wiserd Degn Tre End Time C uiis 16 01 2007 111000 1601 2007 111953 COurlthestocheve 1601 2007 11 1601 2007 11S TAa 16 01 2007 10 50 00 16 01 2007 10 59 53 CO Oia hentai VENAL 104433 1500 2007 eS he Ge Setting Gp info Record Archiving Everts 2 Motion e Database Archiving Configuration The Database archiving information section in the upper part of the tab contains the following e Enable archiving Only available if one or more archives have been created on the recording server Selecting box lets you enable archiving for the speaker in question If you do not use the Archive Wizard to specify otherwise archiving of recordings from the speaker will take place in the recording server s default archive e Archive name Name of the archive selected for the recording server e Archive path Path to the archive directory e Schedule Archiving sch
167. available compression quality will be determined entirely by the selected codec e Key frame every Not available for all codecs If you want to use key frames select the check box and specify the required number of seconds between keyframes in the neighboring field A keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals The keyframe contains the entire view of the camera whereas the following frames contain only the pixels that change This helps greatly reduce the size of files If the check box is not available or not selected every frame will contain the entire view of the camera e Data rate Not available for all codecs If you want to use a particular data rate select the check box and specify the required number of kilobytes per second in the neighboring field If the check box is not available or not selected date rate will be determined entirely by the selected codec 4 When ready click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 77 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Cameras Adding Cameras You add cameras through the NetEVS Manager s Hardware Detection Wizard Managing Cameras Enabling disabling as well as renaming of individual cameras takes place on the recording server hardware management level see Managing Hardware For all other configuration and management of cameras expand Devices in the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane then select Cameras A list of cameras will appear in the overview pane Device
168. avigating the Rule Log If the Rule Log contains more than one page of information you are able to navigate between the log s pages by clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the log pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 181 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual ERS yem gt cea TIA a E rri i are au i o e apa et TE i ab 1 AS 1 i r i i ra l i ra i i lets you move one step towards the log page containing the most recent log entries indicates which page you are currently viewing e g page 1 of 171 By clicking the button you are able specify a page number and go straight to that page lets you move one step towards the log page containing the oldest log entries e Searching the Rule Log To search the Rule Log use the Search criteria box in the top part of the log pane 1 Specify your search criteria by selecting the required rule name etc from the Export lists OrTIp You can combine selections or make no selection in certain lists as required The more search criteria you combine the less search results you will typically get Click the Refresh button to make the log page reflect your search criteria Tip To clear your search criteria and return to viewing all of the log s content click the C ear button Exporting Logs You are able to export logs and save the exported logs as tab delimited text txt files ata location of your ch
169. aximum allowed size see Maximum number of entries before the specified number of days is reached e Maximum number of entries Lets you specify the maximum size of the log Default is 1000000 one million entries Note Excess log content will be deleted if it reaches its maximum allowed age see Days to keep log entries before the specified number of entries is reached 4 When ready click OK Logs System Log The System Log records system related information e Viewing the System Log To view the System Log expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client s navigation pane then select System Log e System Log Content Each row in the System Log represents a log entry Each row contains the following information e Level Displays an icon indicating the level of the log entry indicates info indicates error Mindicates warning e UTC Time Timestamp in coordinated universal time UTC an international high precision time standard e Local Time Timestamp in the local time of the NetEVS Management Server e Description Description of the logged incident e ID Identification number of the logged incident On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 173 NetEVS 2 0 174 User Manual Source Type Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred for example Management Server or Device Source Name Name of the Management Server device etc on which the logged incident occurred Event Typ
170. b s Configure button See Managing Local IP Address Ranges for more information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Recording Servers Managing Recording Servers NetEVS recording servers are used for recording video feeds and for communicating with cameras and other devices A NetEVS surveillance system will typically contain several recording servers although only a single recording server is required for the system to work Recording servers on your system i e computers with the NetEVS Recording Server software installed and configured to communicate with the NetEVS Management Server will be listed in the Management Client s overview pane when you expand the Servers folder in the navigation pane and then select the Recording Servers node NetEVS Manager File Edit View Action Tools Help Navigation 34 NetEVS LL Basics i Getting Started el License Information dy Recording Servers lt 4 Failover Servers Recording Server listed in recording server pane e Authorizing a Recording Server When first using the system or when new recording servers have been added to the system you must authorize the new recording servers why must I authorize recording servers In a NetEVS system recording servers point to the Management Server not the other way round In theory recording servers which you do not want to include in your surveillance system could thus be configured to conn
171. bar features the following menus e File Menu Bile Edit view Action Tools He Save CTRL 5 Logoff Eik The File menu features three commands e Save lets you save your current configuration OrTip As an alternative to selecting File gt Save simply press CTRL S on your keyboard e Logoff lets you log out of the Management Client and log in with another user account if necessary e Exit lets you close down and exit the Management Client e Edit Menu On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 55 NetEVS 2 0 56 User Manual Sie Edt view Action Tools Hel Mm Undo CTRL Z The Edit menu features a single command e Undo lets you cancel your latest action Tip As an alternative to selecting Edit gt Undo simply press CTRL Z on your keyboard View Menu The View menu features up to three commands depending on context e Reset Application Layout lets you reset the layout of the different panes in the Management Client to their default settings This is useful if you have moved resized or auto hidden panes and want to return to the standard layout After selecting Reset Application Layout you must restart the application to restore the standard layout e Preview Window lets you toggle the preview pane on and off when working with recording servers and devices OTIip If the preview pane displays images from many cameras at a high frame rate it may slow down performance To specify the numbe
172. based motion detection depends on the configuration of the cameras in question Occurs when a device detects that it is being tampered with Note The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Exact use of tampering detection depends on the configuration of the devices in question Occurs when a device detects a temperature change that a On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 127 NetEVS 2 0 Video Lost Communication Error Communication Started Communication Stopped Feed Overflow Started Feed Overflow Stopped Live Client Feed Requested Output Activated 128 User Manual certain temperature is exceeded or similar Note The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Exact use of temperature detection depends on the configuration of the devices in question Occurs when a device detects that a video signal is lost Note The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Exact use of this type of detection depends on the configuration of the devices in question Occurs when a connection to a device is lost or when an attempt is made to communicate with a device and the attempt is unsuccessful Occurs when communication with a device is successfully established Occurs when communication with a device is successfully stopped Feed overflow occurs when a recording server is unable to process received video as quickly as specified in the configurat
173. ble e Strong heat make sure the server has adequate ventilation e Strong magnetic fields avoid e Power outages make sure you use a UPS see more information in the previous e Static electricity make sure you ground yourself if you are going to handle a hard disk drive e Fire water etc avoid On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 423 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual SNMP SNMP Support NetEVS supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol a standard protocol for monitoring and controlling network devices for managing their configuration or collecting Statistics etc NetEVS will act as an SNMP agent which can generate an SNMP trap as a result of a triggered rule A third party SNMP management console can then receive information about the rule triggering event and operators of the SNMP management console can configure their system for further action as required The implementation uses Microsoft Windows SNMP Service for triggering SNMP traps The SNMP Service must therefore be installed on recording servers This will when the SNMP Service has been configured through its own user interface enable recording servers to send mib Management Information Base files to the SNMP management console e Installing the SNMP Service 1 On the required recording servers open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 In the left side of the Add or Remove Programs dialog
174. cense Information You get an excellent overview of the licenses in your NetEVS system if you expand Basics in the Management Client s navigation pane and then select License Information This will bring up the License Information page on which you can see Your software license code The total number of available device channels typically cameras but it could also be dedicated input output boxes you are licensed to run How many licenses you have used both the number of activated licenses and the number of temporary not activated licenses Whether you need to get additional licenses in order to have enough licenses for all of your cameras License Information Total Licenses Activated Licenses Temporary Licenses Expired Licenses Missing Licenses Recording Sarvar Linlrrtaed i W A iA Device Channel 355 Lal 25 i a Camera 255 i 25 D 0 Microphone Lindimebed O o O a Speaker Unlimited 4 o A 6 Inguat Lindrreed La a a Cutgpit Linhirmted si a 0 la The first hardware grace expires 02 07 3009 Example only numbers and dates may be different on your system Any expiration dates listed on the page are in the Management Server s local time Since you are not necessarily located in the same time zone as the Management Server the Management Server s current local time is displayed in the bottom right corner of the page You can activate licenses online or offline by expanding Basics in the navigation pane and right clicking
175. cifying a value of 120 a minimum of two minutes will pass between the sending of each e mail notification even if the notification profile is triggered again by a rule before the two minutes have passed o If specifying a value of 0 e mail notifications will be sent each time the notification profile is triggered by a rule This can potentially result in a very large number of e mail notifications being sent If using the value 0 you should therefore carefully consider whether you want to use the notification profile in rules which are likely to be triggered frequently 5 If you want send a test e mail notification to the specified recipients click the Test E mail button 6 If you want to include still images in e mail notifications under the notification profile select Include images and specify the following e Number of images Specify the maximum number of still images you want to include in each of the notification profile s e mail notifications Default is five images e Time btw images ms Specify the number of milliseconds you want between the recordings presented on the included images Example With the default value of 500 milliseconds the included images will show recordings with half a second between them e Embed images in e mail If selected default images will be inserted in the body of e mail notifications If not images will be included in e mail notifications as attached files 7 If you want to include
176. cking the browse button to the right of the field you are able to browse for the user in question using Active Directory Fifective Roles ES Entel upa ind Role Fiii tha Hara Eiir A Denit Shalt Parking Ama fenai Stall Rehat Close 3 If you typed the user name directly into the Enter user field click the Refresh button in the lower part of the window to display the roles of the user If you used Active Directory to browse for the user the user s roles will be displayed automatically Removing a Group from a Role On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 301 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Tip To find out which roles are held by a group or by individual group members use the Effective Roles feature Note Keep in mind however that group members may also hold roles as individuals 1 Inthe Management Client s navigation pane expand Security then select Roles This will list current roles in the overview pane 2 Inthe overview pane select the role from which you want to remove the group then select the Users or Groups tab in the properties pane 3 On the Users or Groups tab select the group you want to remove then click the Remove button in the lower part of the tab G Tip You can select more than one group or a combination of groups and individual users if required 4 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected group s user s If you are sure click Yes Not Using Active Directory
177. click Add Remove Windows Components This will open the Windows Components Wizard 3 In the wizard select the check box next to Management and Monitoring Tools then click the Details button to open the Management and Monitoring Tools dialog 4 In the Management and Monitoring Tools dialog select the check box next to Simple Network Management Protocol then click OK 5 Back in the Windows Components Wizard click Next and follow the wizard s further steps 424 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Virus Scanning Virus Scanning Information Virus scanning should in some cases be avoided if allowed in your organization e If you are using virus scanning software on a recording server it is likely that it will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data in the databases containing recordings e If you are using virus scanning software on an archiving location it is likely that it will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning all the data being archived e If you are using virus scanning software on the Management Server it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager This may affect system performance negatively Some virus scanning software may furthermore temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively If allowed in your organizatio
178. commended that you monitor and adjust the system once it is running For example it is often a good idea to spend time on testing and adjusting the motion detection sensitivity settings of individual cameras under different physical conditions day night windy calm weather etc once the system is running The setup of rules which determine most of the actions performed by the NetEVS system including when to record video is another example of configuration which to a very large extent depends on your organization s needs Minstall the various components of your NetEVS system See Installation Overview MiLog in to the Management Client See Logging in to the Management Client LJauthorize use of your NetEVS system s recording servers See Managing Recording Servers why must I authorize recording servers By authorizing recording servers before they can be used surveillance system administrators have full control over which recording servers are able to send information to their NetEVS Management Server LIpetect the hardware devices i e cameras and video encoders which should be added to each recording server See Hardware Detection Wizard What is the Hardware Detection Wizard The Hardware Detection Wizard helps you detect IP hardware devices such as cameras and video encoders on your network and add them to your NetEVS system The wizard offers you two ways of detecting and adding hardware devices With automatic hardwa
179. ct the required language sub folder Then you double click the required installation exe file When a new component has been installed on the Management Server you will see a confirmation dialog box Making New Components Available through the Download Manager When you have installed new components they will be selected in the Download Manager by default and immediately be available to users via the web page You can always show or hide features on the web page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure Orip You can change the sequence in which components are displayed on the web page In the Download manager s tree structure simply drag component items and drop them at the required position Moving Components Between Web Page Versions You are able to move components between the two versions of the web page e On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 51 NetEVS 2 0 52 User Manual between the one targeted at system administrators and the one targeted at end users TO move a component simply right click it and select the web page version to which you want to move the component Hiding and Removing Components You have three options You can hide components from the web page by clearing check boxes in the Download Manager s tree structure In that case the components will still be installed on the Management Server and by selecting check boxes in the Download Manager s tree struct
180. ctions the lower part of the wizard window lets you edit the rule description Next Edit the mde description click an undedined item Example only your selections may be different Click the underlined items in bold italics to specify their exact content For example clicking the days link in our example would let you select one or more days of the week on which the rule should apply Having specified your exact conditions click the wizard s Next button to move to the next step of the wizard and select which actions should be covered by the rule Depending on the content and complexity of your rule further wizard steps may let you define further information such as stop events and stop actions For example if a rule specifies that a device should perform a particular action during a time interval for example Thursday between 08 00 and 10 30 the wizard may ask you to specify what should happen when that time interval ends Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box Mame My Third Rule Description gt ctia v AE On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 OTip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 8 When ready click the wizard s Finish button Orip To view step by step descriptions of how to create typically
181. ctly which computers are allowed to send commands to your NetMatrix recipient is defined as part of the configuration of your NetMatrix Monitor application In the following you will find information about installing the NetMatrix Monitor configuring the NetMatrix Monitor and day to day use of the NetMatrix Monitor On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 401 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Installing the NetMatrix Monitor Note Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software CD before installing the NetMatrix Monitor application Since the NetMatrix Monitor software communicates directly with cameras it is important that NetMatrix Monitor users download and install the latest video device drivers see Managing Video Device Drivers 1 402 Insert the surveillance system software CD wait for a short while select required language then click the Install NetMatrix Monitor link Alternatively if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet run the NetMatrix Monitor exe file from the location you have saved it to OrTip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software When this is the case click the Run button When the installation wizard starts click Next to continue the installation Read and accept the License Agreement Specify your User Name and Company Name hiinat hirtii i
182. curs when a storage area for a recording server becomes unavailable for example if the connection to a storage area located on a network drive is lost When this is the case it will not be possible to store recordings You can use the event to for example stop recording and trigger a notification profile so an e mail notification is On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 automatically sent to relevant people in your organization Failover Occurs when a failover server takes over from a recording Started server A failover server is a spare recording server which can take over in case a regular recording server becomes unavailable Failover Occurs when a recording server becomes available again and Stopped is able to take over from a failover server ki A number of events custom made to suit your system may also be selectable Such user defined events can be used for e Making it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in Ocularis Client Lite e Countless other purposes For example you may create user defined events which will occur if a particular type of data is received from a device For information about how to define user defined events in the Management Client see Managing User defined Events User defined Events Managing User defined Events User defined events are events which are custom made to suit your system Like other events user defined events can
183. d default this setting will keep the original aspect ratio of images when the NetMatrix Monitor window On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 is resized If this setting is not used images will be stretched to fill the available space Reconnect On Startup If selected default the NetMatrix Monitor will automatically attempt to connect to the last connected camera when starting If this setting is not used no camera connection will be attempted at startup Camera Layout Lets you select whether the NetMatrix Monitor window should run in 1x1 or 2x2 mode O In 1x1 mode the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying video feeds from a single camera at a time In 2x2 mode default the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of showing video feeds from up to four cameras at a time If using 2x2 mode the video feeds will be inserted in top left to bottom right order according to a first in first out principle video feeds will remain in the position in which they were loaded when all four positions are used any new video feeds will replace the oldest image feeds If you select Insert Camera On Top new video feeds will always be displayed in the top left position while any previously received video feeds will be shifted one position forward and eventually be pushed out e Startup Mode Lets you select how the NetMatrix Monitor window Should open when starting O W
184. d microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the NetEVS system Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required Read more about speaker management through the Management Client in Managing Speakers IMPORTANT Although what is being said through a speaker can be recorded and archived there is currently no way of playing back or exporting such recorded outgoing audio Features for playing back and exporting recorded outgoing audio will be available in subsequent releases as soon as possible Managing Speakers You have two entry points for managing speakers e Inthe Management Client s navigation pane expand Devices and select Speakers Then in the overview pane expand the All Speakers folder This provides you with an excellent overview of your system s speakers and you can group speakers in device groups for easy management However enabling disabling of individual speakers can only be handled under recording servers see the following The text expanding will be displayed next to the speakers folder in this example the A Speakers folder while the Management Client expands the folder Devices pa All Speakers expanding Expanding the speakers folders in this example the A Speakers folder may take a few seconds because the Management Client does not load information about the speakers until the folder in question is expanded thus enabling faster navigation between the in
185. d have very high priority when talking through a speaker whereas the role Security Assistant should have low priority when talking through the speaker Now if a user with the role Security Manager and a user with the role Security Assistant want to talk through the speaker at the same time the user with the role Security Manager will win the ability to talk If two users with the same role want to speak at the same time the first come first served principle applies On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 291 NetEVS 2 0 292 User Manual Note For the right to work the role must also be granted the right to view Ocularis Client Lite in Live mode This right is granted as part of the application rights Furthermore the speaker s must be visible in Ocularis Client Lite you determine as part of the device rights Application Rights The Application tab lets you specify which applications in your NetEVS system users groups with the selected role should be able to use Simply select the required applications e NetEVS Management Client Determines whether users groups with the selected role are able to use the Management Client e Browse Determines whether users groups with the selected role are able to use Browse mode in Ocularis Client Lite e Live Determines whether users groups with the selected role are able to use Live mode in Ocularis Client Lite e Setup Determines whether users groups with the selected role are able to
186. d lets you select different options if opened while working with a recording server see Recording Server Database Management e Empty Database for Device To empty the database of the selected camera microphone or speaker do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Empty databases for device and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the check boxes next to the databases you want to empty Emply 80 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Then click Next 3 In order to prevent accidental data deletion you will be asked to confirm that you want to permanently delete all media data for the device in question If you are sure click Yes 4 The database will be emptied A bar displays how the emptying job progresses AAA AAA When the emptying job is complete you will be informed whether the job was successful or whether it failed If the job failed you will be able view a status message indicating what caused the failure Empty dalabasa for device Camera E Example Indication of successful emptying job Al Empty database for device Camera 1 Example Indication of failed emptying job with link to status message 5 Click Finish e Move Database for Device If several storage areas exist on the recording server on which the selected camera microphone or speaker belongs you are able to move the database to another s
187. d number of hops a data packet should be able to travel before it is discarded or returned A hop is a point between two network devices typically a router Default value is 128 e Enabling Multicasting for Individual Cameras Even when you have specified multicasting settings for the selected recording server multicasting will not work until you enable it for required cameras Select the required recording server in the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane select the required camera in the overview pane then select Enable live multicast on the Client tab in the properties pane Repeat for all required cameras under the recording server in question On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 213 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Multi streaming About Multi streaming Viewing of live video and playing back of recorded video does not necessarily require the Same settings in order to achieve the best result Example e For viewing live video your organization may prefer MPEG4 at a high frame rate e For playing back recorded video your organization may prefer MJPEG at a lower frame rate because this will help preserve disk space Some cameras therefore support multi streaming with which you can establish two independent streams a stream for live viewing and another stream for playback purposes Note Only some cameras support multi streaming Even when cameras support multi streaming individual multi streaming capabilities may vary considerably bet
188. d when viewing web pages When using NetEVS make sure that the following ports are open for data traffic on your network e Port 20 and 21 inbound and outbound Used when recording servers listen for FTP information some devices use FTP for sending event messages FTP File Transfer Protocol is a standard for exchanging files across networks e Port 25 inbound and outbound Used when recording servers listen for SMTP information Also some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages and or for sending images to the surveillance system server via e mail SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is a standard for sending e mail messages between servers e Port 80 inbound and outbound While not directly used by NetEVS port 80 is typically used by the IIS Internet Information Services Default Web Site for running the NetEVS Management Server service e Port 1024 and above outbound only except ports listed in the following Used for HTTP traffic between cameras and servers e Port 5432 inbound and outbound Used when recording servers listen for alert socket TCP information some devices use TCP for sending event messages e Port 7563 inbound and outbound Used for handling PTZ camera control commands and for communication with access clients On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 5 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Note Port 8844 inbound and outbound Used for communication between failover servers Port 9993 inbo
189. database since the moving process may take time and the database may become even larger if the database must store new recordings during that time As a rule of thumb sufficient free space means at least the size of the database allowing for the fact that it may grow plus 500 MB If sufficient free space is not available at the new storage drive you risk data being deleted The wizard described in the following helps you determine database and storage area sizes OrTip A recording server s storage areas can be managed through the Database Configuration Wizard when the wizard is opened while working with a recording server see Recording Server Database Management To move the database of the selected camera microphone or speaker do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Move database for device and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the required storage area On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 369 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Device Name Used Storage Mame Free Path Include media data Camera 3 0 15 GB Local Default sej 33 00 GE C MediaD stabase Local Detauk OurOher5torage rea R Selecting required storage area note that the Include media data box is selected by default Make absolutely sure that the new storage area has enough free space to accommodate the database Compare the Used column which displays the current size of the database with the
190. deflection changes color from green to red when above the threshold indicating a positive motion detection OTip Your exact motion slider setting is indicated by a number from 0 10 000 in the right side of the slider This way you are able to compare the exact motion slider setting between cameras Image Processing Interval You are able to select how often motion detection analysis should be carried out on video from the camera From the Process image every ms list select the required interval every 100 milliseconds i e once every tenth of a second every 250 milliseconds every 500 milliseconds every 750 milliseconds or every 1000 milliseconds i e once every second Default is every 500 milliseconds The interval is applied regardless of the camera s frame rate settings On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 115 NetEVS 2 0 116 User Manual Optimized Detection You are able to optimize motion detection performance for the camera by analyzing only 25 of the image i e every fourth pixel in the image instead of all pixels in the image Using optimized detection will reduce the amount of processing power used to carry out the analysis but will also mean a less accurate motion detection To use optimized detection select the Optimized detection check box Ignoring Motion Detection in Parts of Images The Exclude Regions settings in the lower part of the Motion tab let you disable motion detection in specific areas
191. dest image feeds A slightly different configuration is also possible in which case new video feeds will always be displayed in the top left position while any previously received video feeds will be shifted one position forward and eventually be pushed out e Camera Information Depending on configuration the NetMatrix Monitor window is able to show camera information immediately above images e Image Aspect Ratios Depending on configuration images in the NetMatrix Monitor window can either be displayed with their original aspect ratio or be stretched to fill the available space e Toggling between Regular and Full Screen View To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or regular view double click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window e Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor 1 Open the NetMatrix Monitor window Right click anywhere inside the NetMatrix 408 Monitor window and select Config from the menu that appears On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Full Screen wf Als On Top Config ls Hide tirador 2 Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor Password Validation gl Erie Pasoveod om Cancel 3 Click OK This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window See Configuring the NetMatrix Monitor Application for details about your configuration options 4 Make the
192. devices within the specified IP address range require a non factory default user name and or password specify such user names and passwords one at a time by clicking the Add button Add Ramee to Scan x oP Baddest onga Stat F lideres 1070501 End IP Address 101050 3 se Lisa TUF por peers Penam carr De po rumba l e iutharna bea rome C aa Facto Dela Ta hal E ak Coca J _ Hee Example IP address range and additional user name and password defined When ready click OK to return to the wizard Note that you cannot scan extremely large IP address ranges typically ranges covering more than 32767 IP addresses If ranges are below this limit but still very large the wizard will warn you that the scanning may take considerable time When ready the wizard lists all the IP address ranges you want to scan 3 Click Next On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 145 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 4 The wizard searches for devices within the defined IP address ranges Depending on the size of the IP address ranges and whether they are on the local network or not this may take a while While searching the wizard generates a list of the cameras it detects Tip Detection may take a while especially if large IP ranges must be searched You can interrupt the search at any time by clicking the Stop Scan button Any cameras detected up to this point will be remembered by the wizard 5 When the wizard ha
193. dividual elements in the Management Client e Inthe Management Client s navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers In the overview pane expand the required recording server and select the required speaker 358 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note Check the Supported Devices page at www onssi com to verify that speakers are Supported for the devices and firmware used e Enabling Speakers When speakers are detected with the Hardware Detection Wizard they are by default disabled You can easily enable speakers when needed If a device has several Speakers you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 In the navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe overview pane expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the speaker is placed 3 Right click the required speaker and select Enabled Note On some devices a speaker can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a speaker does not work after enabling it in the Management Client you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to the speaker being disabled on the device itself e Specifying Speaker Properties You configure individual speakers by selecting the required speaker in the list then specifying the speaker s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane e Info Tab The Info tab le
194. dles user authentication user rights etc o Where Runs as a service and is typically installed on a dedicated server e The Recording Server o What Used for recording video and for communicating with cameras and other devices In large installations more than one recording server is often used on the surveillance system Failover servers can easily be set up to take over in case a recording server becomes temporarily unavailable o Where Recording servers as well as failover servers run as services and are typically installed on separate servers rather than on the Management Server itself e The Management Client o What Feature rich administration client NetEVS Manager for configuration and day to day management of the system o Where Typically installed on the surveillance system administrator s workstation or similar e The Download Manager e What Lets surveillance system administrators manage which NetEVS related components e g particular language versions of clients your organization s users will be able to access from a targeted web page generated by the Management Server e Where Automatically installed on the Management Server during NetEVS installation process On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 1 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Ocularis Client Lite o What A robust client enabling access to live and recorded video as well as other key surveillance system features such as export of recordings for use as evidence o
195. dows Components Wizard Windows Components Wizard Windows Components Tou Gan add of remove component of Maldon XP To add of remove a component click the checkbox A shaded box mesra thal oniy part of the component vell be mised To nee hats included n a component cick Dara Companii ee ra Berria DOME y BS niaire Explorer 0o MHR WD nbere Intoreahon Servces PIS 135 MB Bo Misnagerent ar Monitor Ton 20MB RE san Then nn ma Y Dibon Includes Web ad FTP papper along with puppor lol FioriPags Bertken Agin Sarai Pages and dag oa aa dak ge prad EE 4 H Space mobe on dik M7 HE Back blest Cancel Delak In the wizard s Components list select Internet Information Services IIS Click the Details button and verify that all IIS subcomponents are selected When ready click OK to return to the Windows Components Wizard In the Windows Components Wizard click Next and follow the wizard Tip It is a good idea to have your Windows installation CD ready it may be required during the process On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 11 NetEVS 2 0 12 User Manual When IIS is installed you will be returned to the NetEVS Management Server Installation window for the next step of the installation Step 2 NetEVS Management Server Database The Management Server requires access to a relational database Note Before completing this step click the View Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express End user
196. due to the fact that recording servers may be located all around the world each recording server thus uses the token to validate the client s token against the local time in the recording server s own time zone The validity of a token expires after a while It is therefore important that time on your Management Server and all of your organization s recording servers is synchronized minute and second wise hours may of course be different in different locations around the world If time on the servers is not synchronized you may experience that a recording server is ahead of the Management server s time When a recording server is ahead of the Management server s time it may result in a client s token expiring on the recording server earlier than intended by the Management Server Under unfortunate circumstances you might even experience that a recording server claims that a client s token has already expired when it receives it effectively preventing the client from viewing recordings from the recording server How to synchronize time on your organization s servers depends on your network configuration internet access use of domain controllers etc Often servers on a domain are already time synchronized against the domain controller If so you should be fine as long as all required servers belong to the domain in question If your servers are not already time synchronized it will be necessary to synchronize the servers time against a t
197. e To remove video device drivers typically prior to installing a later version of the drivers use the following procedure on the recording server computer on which the video device drivers are installed e Open Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window e Inthe Add or Remove Programs window select the Video Device Driver Vx x entry where x x indicates the relevant version number and click the Remove button e You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the video device drivers Click OK to remove them 430 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Copyright Trademarks etc Copyright 2009 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Trademarks Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners Disclaimer Copyright C 2009 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc Ocularis NetEVS NetDVMS NetDVR ProSight NetGuard Ocularis Client Lite NetSwitcher NetMatrix NetCentral NetTransact NetPDA and NetCell are trademarks of On Net Surveillance Systems Inc All other trademarks are property of their respective owners OnSSI reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 431
198. e patrolling profile e g when using the patrolling profile in a rule 4 Click OK e Deleting an Existing Patrolling Profile 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Click the De ete button 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the selected patrolling profile Verify that you have selected the correct patrolling profile then click Yes e Specifying Manual PTZ Session Timeout Patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted manually by Ocularis Client Lite users with the necessary user rights You are able to specify how much time should pass before regular patrolling is resumed after a manual interruption 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Too s gt Options This will open the Options window 2 On the Options window s General tab select the required amount of time in the PTZ manual session timeout list default is 15 seconds 106 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note The setting will apply for all PTZ cameras on your NetEVS system PTZ on Video Encoders If you are going to use a PTZ camera on a video encoder you must first enable PTZ on the required video encoder channel Note Not all video encoders support the use of PTZ cameras Even video encoders which Support the use of PTZ cameras may require configuration such as installation of additional drivers typically through accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s
199. e Type of event represented by the logged incident OrTip For more information about event types see also the list of events in the events overview Navigating the System Log If the System Log contains more than one page of information you are able to navigate between the log s pages by clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the log pane a la ll 1 Soo ee lets you move one step towards the log page containing the most recent log entries indicates which page you are currently viewing e g page 1 of 171 By clicking the button you are able specify a page number and go straight to that page lets you move one step towards the log page containing the oldest log entries Searching the System Log To search the System Log use the Search criteria box in the top part of the log pane 1 Specify your search criteria by selecting the required logging level source etc from the lists OrTip You can combine selections or make no selection in certain lists as required The more search criteria you combine the less search results you will typically get 2 Click the Refresh button to make the log page reflect your search criteria On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Tip To clear your search criteria and return to viewing all of the log s content click the Clear button On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 175 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Audit Log The Audit Lo
200. e ALI t A preview image viewed with three different grid sizes The area marked in blue is a selected exclude region Show Regions When the Show regions check box is selected default exclude regions will be highlighted in blue in the preview image Hiding exclude regions may provide a less obscured view of the preview image However under normal circumstances it is highly recommended that you keep the Show regions box selected otherwise exclude regions may exist without you or your colleagues being aware of it The blue exclude area indications will only appear in the preview image on the Motion tab not in any other preview images in NetEVS Manager or Ocularis Client Lite Tip If using device groups see Managing Cameras you can configure motion detection for all cameras in a device group in one go Note however that some motion detection settings must be configured individually for each camera This is the case with exclude 118 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 regions areas in which not to use motion detection as these are very likely to vary from camera to camera Device Groups Using Device Groups You are able to group different types of devices cameras microphones speakers inputs outputs on your NetEVS system by using device groups The use of device groups has several benefits e Device groups help you maintain an intuitive overview of devices on your system e You are able to
201. e Add Remove View Group window s list select the view group you want to rename then click the Edit button 3 Change the view group s name as required then click OK 4 Click the Add Remove View Group window s Close button Already connected access client users must log out and log in again before the name change will be visible e Removing a View Group Even though a view group is by default created each time you add a role view groups do not have to correspond to roles You are therefore able to remove each of 388 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 your system s view groups if required no matter whether the view groups were created automatically when adding a role or whether you added them manually 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Too s gt View Groups This will open the Add Remove View Group window 2 In the Add Remove View Group window s list select the view group you want to delete then click the Remove button 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected view group If you are sure click Yes 4 Click the Add Remove View Group window s Close button Already connected access client users must log out and log in again before the view group will disappear from their client e View Groups from an Access Client User s Perspective For more information about views from an access client user s perspective see the separate Ocularis Client Lite documentat
202. e Events tab do the following 1 In the Events tab s Configured Events list select the no longer required event OrTip If there are several instances of the same event use the properties list in the right side of the tab to verify that you have selected the correct event 2 Click the Delete button Note The selected event will be deleted without further warning 3 Click the Save button in the Management Client s toolbar A Fisheye Fisheye Tab Camera Properties Note Use of the fisheye technology requires a dedicated fisheye camera Fisheye is a technology that allows viewing of 360 degree panoramic images through an advanced lens The Fisheye Tab lets you configure the fisheye functionality of a camera 110 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Configuration If the camera is mounted on a ceiling you can adjust the behavior of the navigation buttons to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling mount check box You can configure the camera s fisheye functionality by adjusting the fisheye view field indicated by a green ellipse in the preview image so it encloses the actual image area of the fisheye lens Press the Auto Calculate button to do this automatically Set the fisheye view field manually by adjusting the ellipse s X radius Y radius X center and Y center with the arrow buttons Preview In the preview section of the Fisheye tab you can set a particular position in the fisheye rend
203. e NetEVS system One device channel license enables you to run one camera or one dedicated input output box You can use and define an unlimited number of recording servers microphones Speakers inputs and outputs You can always get more licenses as your surveillance system grows See Getting Additional Licenses for more information e Replacing Cameras You can replace a camera licensed in the NetEVS system with a new camera and have the new camera activated and licensed instead 164 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 The total number of purchased device channels corresponds to the total number of cameras that are able to run on the surveillance system simultaneously If you remove a camera from a recording server you also free a license If you replace a camera with a similar camera manufacturer brand and model and give the new camera the same IP address as the old one you will maintain full access to all the camera s databases In this case you simply move the network cable from the old camera to the new one without changing any settings in the Management Client and then activate the license If replacing a camera with a different model you must use the Management Client to remove the old camera from the recording server in question When removing a camera this way you will delete the camera s media database and you will not be able to access any archived databases for the camera Viewing Your Li
204. e Password field and confirm the password in the Confirm password field Note The password must contain one or more characters and or digits g Click OK For the failover solution to work the user account you specify must have access to your NetEVS system with administrator rights If the computer acting as failover server is a member of a domain make sure you specify a user account which belongs to the domain in question If using network drives always specify a user account which has access to the network drives in question 8 On the last step of the wizard click Finish The failover server is now installed The failover server has no user interface as such it is accessed and managed through the Management Client 26 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 If required repeat the process on other computers to be used as failover servers Orip When the failover server software is installed you are able to check the state of the failover server s services See Failover Server Service Administration and Recording Server Service Administration for more information Troubleshooting Installation Troubleshooting The following issues may occasionally occur during or upon installation of the NetEVS Management Server or recording servers For each issue one or more solutions are available e Issue Automatic IIS Installation for Management Server Fails If installing the Management Server software on a se
205. e Password fields specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor The password must match the password that has been specified for your NetMatrix recipient on the Surveillance system server consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt Orip Memorize the password you will need it if you want to change your NetMatrix Monitor s configuration at a later stage 3 Specify the port number on which your NetMatrix Monitor will listen for commands e g about connecting to a camera By default port 12345 is used The port number must match the port number that has been specified for your NetMatrix recipient on the surveillance system server consult your On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 403 NetEVS 2 0 404 User Manual Surveillance system administrator if in doubt Specify which hosts other computers are allowed to send commands to your NetMatrix Monitor If commands from any host should be accepted simply select Allow All Hosts If only commands from particular hosts should be accepted leave the Allow All Hosts box cleared and do the following to add each required host a Specify the IP address of the host in the field below the large Allowed Hosts box in the right side of the window Tip To jump to the next IP address segment in the field press SPACE on your keyboard b Click the Add button to add the host to the list of Allowed Hosts C Repeat for each required host Orip
206. e Surveillance database and select Tasks gt Restore gt Database No Surveillance database Surveillance is the default name of the database containing the system configuration If you can find the database but it is not called Surveillance it could be because you gave the database another name during the Management Server installation In the following example we will assume that the database uses the default name On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 feel Dl oe Pas cede dora Seabed ARO Enter database name Surveillance MT E Lio ta Cra 1 Example During Management Server installation it is possible to change the database name from the default name Surveillance to another name 4 The Restore Database dialog s General page do the following e Under Source for restore Select From device and click the button to the right of the field 5 In the Specify Backup dialog make sure that File is selected in the Backup media list Then click the Add button Specify Backup E Spe Fe backup peda snd iby locsborn bor pour pastores opersbor Backup meda Fie Backup keseri me asi He 6 In the Locate Backup File dialog locate and select your backup file Surveillance bak Then click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 419 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual borro Ey Microsoft SOL Serv a Ca y Cee pe
207. e able to change this if required e FTP server port Lets you specify the port number to be used when the recording server listens for FTP information some devices use FTP for sending event messages Default is port 21 although you are able to change this if required e Viewing Status Messages 1 Right click the notification area s recording server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Show Status Messages start Recording Server Service Show Stabus Messages k Change Settings About Exit Recording Server Manager The Recording Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages T Recording Server Status Message ES Tena Messe e 1112006131200 Succe parted rule peocerpa IRIZA TE TAO Sool ridad vab rra IAZA 1215 Gupca pated ppelres 1112206111154 Sucoemiuk dated dia pencas IRIZA SSS Seely dated Set Seach mods 1112206121153 Gueen parted atu module TRIA 1211 Sete appbed mew piian 1112006131153 Swocershaly parted patroding consoles 1112006131159 Succenbdy fished kente module IFIP SSS Sirera Gongs madi dtabae rocas ue 1112006 113 Sucenik configured rue proces APD 130105 Sucede compila Conigquigien hon pora 1112006131157 Suocershuly connected lo server 121206 131155 Surco ride mule pronta 131220051311 za Surcos miiced kra Feed aa gt Example only e Viewing Version Information Knowing the exact version of your Recording Server service is often a
208. e activate your licenses before the initial period ends since all recording servers and cameras for which no licenses have been activated will otherwise stop sending data to the surveillance system Dluse the Download Manager to make additional components available to users if required See Using the Download Manager What is the Download Manager An application which lets surveillance system administrators manage which system related components e g particular language versions of clients surveillance system users will be able to access from a targeted web page generated by the Management Server Tip The default configuration of the Download Manager ensures that end users have access to Ocularis Client Lite in language versions matching the language of your NetEVS system Basically you only have to use the Download On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 65 NetEVS 2 0 66 User Manual Manager if you want to make additional language versions plugins or similar available to your organization s users On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Alerts Managing Alerts Alerts are short messages customized to suit your organization s needs Examples of alerts Panic Button Pressed Fire Exit 23 Open Employee Clocking In etc Once you have added one or more alerts in the Management Client you can use rules to trigger the alerts Example of a rule When there is motion on Staff entrance camera start recording
209. e added to the alerts list in the overview pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 67 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Alerts WE E Py Abetts Fire Exit Door Opened th Panic Button Pressed You are now able to use the alert in rules e Editing Alerts Due to the simple nature of alerts your editing options are limited to renaming the alert 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select Alerts This will show a list of your existing alerts in the overview pane 2 In the overview pane right click the required alert and select Rename Alert Type Orip Alternatively you may simply press F2 on your keyboard 3 You are now able to overwrite the name of the alert Alerts A E Alerts Panic Button Pressed Jy Fite Exit Door Opened e Deleting Alerts Note Keep in mind that deleting an alert will affect any rules in which the alert is used Note When you delete an alert any log entries about the alert will be kept in the Management Client s Alert Log but the alert will no longer be visible when browsing recordings in Ocularis Client Lite 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select Alerts This will show a list of your existing alerts in the overview pane 2 In the overview pane right click the unwanted alert and select Delete Alert Type OTip Alternatively you may simply press DELETE on your keyboard 3 You will be asked to confirm t
210. e in your organization Failover Occurs when a failover server takes over from a recording Started server A failover server is a spare recording server which can take over in case a regular recording server becomes unavailable Failover Occurs when a recording server becomes available again and Stopped is able to take over from a failover server kl A number of events custom made to suit your system may also be selectable Such user defined events can be used for e Making it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in Ocularis Client Lite e Countless other purposes For example you may create user defined events which will occur if a particular type of data is received from a device For information about how to define user defined events in the Management Client see Managing User defined Events Actions Stop Actions Overview When creating rules in the Rule Wizard see About Rules and Managing Rules you are able to select between a number of different actions First Select actions bo perform e Start recording Set live frame rate on lt dewices gt Sel recording frame rate on lt devices Example Selecting actions Some of these actions will require a subsequent stop action Example If you select the action Start recording recording will start and potentially continue indefinitely Therefore the action Start recording has a compulsory stop action called Stop recording The R
211. e left side of the window select Roles then the Roles Summary 6 Now select Add Roles to start a wizard 7 In the wizard click Next select Web Server IIS and follow the wizard s steps 8 When you reach the wizard s Select Role Services step you will see that some role services are selected by default However you should select some additional role services e Under Security select Basic Authentication and Windows authentication e Under Management Tools select ITS 6 Management Console expand it and select IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility IIS 6 WMI Compatibility IIS 6 Scripting Tools and IIS 6 Management Console When ready the relevant part of the Role services tree should look like this al Securty a i aoe 4 Basic Authentication 4 4 Windows Authentication _ Digest Authentication _ Client Certificate Mapping Authentication 115 Client Certificate Mapping Authentication C URL Authorization V Request Filtering IP and Domain Restrictions El Performance v Static Content Compression Dynamic Content Compression Management Tools 115 Management Console _ 115 Management Scripts and Tools _ Management Service 4 115 6 Management Compatibilty v 115 6 Metabase Compatibility 4 115 6 WMI Compatibility Y 115 6 Scripting Tools 115 6 Management Console ETA Fidel Se ew he 9 Complete the wizard by following the remaining steps e
212. e path to the database used for the microphone e Used Space Non editable field displaying the current size of the database for the microphone Database Wizard The Database Configuration section features a Database Wizard button Clicking the Database Wizard button will start the Database Configuration Wizard with which you are able to quickly and conveniently empty or move the database for the microphone On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 205 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Archiving Archiving Tab You are able to view and manage the archiving settings of a selected microphone on the Archiving tab Note Being able to manage a microphone s archiving settings requires that one or more archives have been defined on the recording server to which the microphone belongs See About Archiving for more information Note Another tab called Archiving will be displayed if you view the properties of a recording server this is where you create and manage the recording server s archives For more information see Archiving tab Recording Server Properties What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a microphone s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the microphone s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice See About Archiving for more information
213. e recording server e Change existing archives e Remove archives e Default Archive For each recording server you are able to create one or more archives For recording servers with more than one archive the default archive is simply the archive directory to which archiving will take place if use of another of the recording server s archive directories has not deliberately been specified for certain cameras Only one archive directory can be the recording server s default archive e If you create more than one archive for a recording server you must thus select which of the archives should be the recording server s default archive You do this through the Archive Wizard e If you only create one archive for a recording server the archive will automatically be the recording server s default archive On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 69 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 70 Enabling and Configuring Archiving for Individual Devices Once archiving has been configured for a recording server you can enable archiving for individual cameras microphones or speakers You are also able to select which of a recording server s archives should be used for the individual device 1 In the navigation pane expand Devices and select either Cameras Microphones or Speakers as required 2 In the overview pane select the required device 3 In the properties pane select the Archiving tab Viewing Archived Recordings You view archived record
214. e separate computers rather than on the Management Server itself See Recording Server Installation for further information e The Management Client which is used for configuration and day to day management of the system The Management Client is typically installed on the system administrator s workstation or similar See Management Client Installation for further information Finally you are able to install client software for access to the NetEVS system e Ocularis Client Lite is a feature rich client used for access to live and recorded video and other features from the surveillance system The Ocularis Client Lite software must be installed on users computers See Ocularis Client Lite Introduction for more information Optionally you can install e The NetMatrix Monitor for viewing of distributed video from the NetEVS system See Installing the NetMatrix Monitor Note however that Ocularis Client Lite has advanced features for viewing of distributed video Tip Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the cameras connected to a recording server You get the drivers automatically during the initial installation of your NetEVS system However new versions of the drivers are released from time to time see Video Device Drivers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 9 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Management Server Installation OIf upgrading from a previous version of NetEVS make sure you read the
215. e stored in two different ways e Network SQL Server If you are storing your NetEVS system s configuration in a database on an existing SQL 2005 Server on your network you can simply point to the database s location on that SQL Server when installing the Management Server software on your new Management Server In that case you can skip much of the information in the following e SQL Server Express Edition If you are storing your NetEVS system s configuration in a SQL Server Express Edition database on the Management Server itself it is important that you back up the existing Management Server s system configuration database before the move By backing up the database and subsequently restoring it on the new server you will not have to reconfigure your cameras rules time profiles alerts etc after the move Some of the prerequisites information in the following and all of the information about backing up and restoring your system configuration is only relevant for users of SQL Server Express Edition e What Happens while the Management Server Is Unavailable While the Management Server is unavailable the following will apply e Recording servers will still be able to record Any currently working recording servers will have received a copy of their configuration from the Management Server so they will be able to work and store recordings on their own while the Management Server is down Scheduled and motion triggered recording w
216. e to a specific preset position and remain at the preset position for a specific period of time after which it will resume patrolling In this example we assume that patrolling has already been set up for the PTZ camera and that the external input unit is a door sensor connected to an input port on a device on the NetEVS system When the door sensor is activated the PTZ camera will pause patrolling move to a preset position covering the door area remain at the preset position for 15 seconds then resume patrolling Prerequisites This rule is based on an input being activated and on a patrolling PTZ camera moving to a specific preset position Therefore an external input unit must be available i e connected to the input port of a device on the NetEVS system Furthermore the preset position to which the PTZ camera should move when the rule is applied must have been defined Before creating a rule like this always verify the following e An external input unit is successfully connected to an input port on a device and the states of the input unit activated deactivated work as required 350 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e The camera in question is a PTZ camera with the required preset positions and patrolling defined When a PTZ camera patrols according to a patrolling profile it moves between a number of preset positions Thus before you are able to define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera the
217. ebuffer size box Clicking the Prebuffer size box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one second The number of seconds you specify in the Prebuffer size box must be sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Using Prebuffering in Rules The use of prebuffering enables you to create rules specifying that recording should begin prior to the event or time triggering the rule Maximum Storage Limits The Record tab s Maximum storage limits specify how long recordings are kept in the database for Grip With archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the database For the microphone s database you are able to specify a maximum time limit e g one day as well as a maximum database size limit e g two gigabytes Whichever of the two limits is reached first will apply e Specifying a Maximum Storage Time Limit To specify a maximum time limit select or type the required values in the Time period boxes Days Hours and Minutes Clicking the Time period boxes up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one day hour minute respectively e Specifying a Maximum Storage Size Limit By default the maximum size of a microphone s database is 5 GB To specify a different maximum database size limit select or type the required value in gigabytes in the Size box Tip The value in the S
218. ecify which actions to perform In this example we want to two things to happen patrolling should pause and the PTZ camera should move to a specific preset position We therefore select the actions Pause patrolling on lt devices gt and Move device to lt preset gt position First Select actions to pertorm Start recording on devices E Start feed on devices Set ive frame rate on devices gt Set recording frame rate on lt devices gt C Start patrolling on device using lt profile e Pause patrolling on lt devices gt e Move devices bo lt preset gt position Hove to default preset on lt devices gt Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window In this example Based on our selections Pause patrolling on lt devices gt and Move camera to lt preset gt position the wizard automatically suggests an extension to the existing rule description l t Edit the rule description click an underlined tem erform an action on Input Activated from Back Door Sensor Ause patroling on de vi i as i and Move device to position proset immediately 9 Click the underlined items in the extension of the rule description in order to specify its exact content devices Clicking the devices link lets you select the devices on which patrolling Should be paused Only PTZ cameras will be selectable In this e
219. ecomes unavailable a failover server from the primary failover group will take over If you have also selected a secondary failover group a failover server from the secondary group will take over in case all failover servers in the primary failover group are busy This way you only risk not having a failover solution in the rare case when all failover servers in the primary as well as in the secondary failover group are busy How to Select Required Failover Groups 1 Simply select the required failover group from the Primary failover group list 2 If you also want a secondary failover group for the recording server repeat the process in the Secondary failover group list Note You cannot select the same failover group for use as both primary and secondary failover group e Failover Service Communication Port By default TCP port 11000 is used for communication between recording servers and failover servers Such communication is primarily about the configuration of the recording server from which the failover server should take over If required you can change the port number Note that if you change the port number you must restart the Recording Server service on the recording server in question Multicast Tab You specify multicasting settings for a recording server on the Multicast tab To access the Multicast tab expand Recording Servers in the Management Client s navigation pane select the required recording server then se
220. ecording Server GUID Camera GUID plus date and time of most recent recording Example On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 269 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 270 OurArchive b82e691f 67cf 4177 a0b9 e69077d4d75a 469c37e4 28ad 487b bcb7 e5fd7e5a609a 2007 04 30 14 30 20 In the example the latest recording contained in the sub directory is from twenty seconds past half past two in the afternoon on April 30th 2007 Even further sub directories are automatically added The amount and nature of these sub directories depend on the nature of the actual recordings For example several different such sub directories will be added if the recordings are technically divided into sequences something which is often the case if motion detection has been used to trigger recordings In case you want to back up your archives knowing the basics of the sub directory structure enables you to target your backups Examples e If you wish to back up the content of an entire archive back up the required archive directory and all of its content for example everything under sOUTArChrve e If you wish to only back up the recordings from a particular camera from a particular period of time back up the contents of the relevant sub directories only for example everything under OurArchive b82e691f 67cf 4177 a0b9 e69077d4d75a 469c37e4 28a0d 438 b DbCb e5itd esao09a 2007 04 30 14 30 20 Archiving and Virus Scanning If you are using virus
221. ecording servers on your NetEVS system To access the Hardware Detection Wizard expand the Servers folder in the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane and select the Recording Server node then in the overview pane right click the required recording server and select Hardware Detection Wizard Hardware Detection Wizard Welcome to the Hardware Detection Wizard On O n S SI This wizard helps you detect and set up IP devices on the network N et E V S Automatic Hardware Detection is recommended if you are new to this software it will guide you i through the steps involved in setting up your IP devices a 4 bd Hardware dection O Automatic Hardware Detection R d Assisted Hardware Detection hai o To continue click Next Hardware Detection Wizard opening page The wizard offers you two ways of detecting and adding hardware devices With automatic hardware detection NetEVS automatically scans for available hardware within one or more specified IP address ranges With assisted hardware detection you manually specify the IP address of each required device Both options offer the possibility of automatically detecting the correct hardware drivers Tip If you are new to NetEVS use automatic hardware detection it will guide you through each of the steps involved in detecting and adding your IP devices e Automatic Hardware Detection To use automatic hardware detection do the following 1 On the first step of
222. ect the Predefined Account Local System a Select This predefined account b Select Local System c Click OK e How to Select a Particular User Account a Select This account b Click the Browse button This will open the Select User window c In the Select User window verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If not click the Locations button to browse for the required domain 14 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 d In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user name Grip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the name you have entered is recognized e Click OK f Specify the password for the user account in the Password field and confirm the password in the Confirm password field Note The password fields must not be empty the password for the account must contain one or more characters and or digits g Click OK tip When the Management Server software is installed you are able to check the state of the Management Server by looking at the Management Server icon in the Management Server computer s notification area See Management Server Service Administration for more information What s next Upon installation of the Management Server software the Management Server s built in web page automatically opens in a browser The web page lets you install the two ke
223. ect to your Management Server By authorizing recording servers before they can be used surveillance system administrators have full control over which recording servers are able to send information to their Management Server 1 Expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s navigation pane and select the Recording Servers node 2 Right click the required recording server in the overview pane 3 From the menu that appears select Authorize Recording Server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 235 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 236 ide Remove Recording Server pp q Authorize Recording Server ls Refresh FS After a short moment the recording server will be authorized and ready for further configuration Viewing Editing a Recording Server s Properties When a recording server is authorized you are able to view edit the recording server s properties including its database storage area settings When you select the required recording server in the Management Client s overview pane the recording server s properties are displayed in the properties pane Expand the required recording server to see which devices are connected to the recording server While the Management Client loads information about the recording server the text expanding is displayed next to that recording server Recording Server Recording Servers My Recording Serv
224. ed Outer Position If you move a pane to a docked outer position it fills the area with a horizontal or vertical split that goes from top to bottom or left to right Do the following 1 Drag the pane to one of the outer layout elements OTip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 159 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Pai Dragging a pane to the right outer layout element Pe C Pra iu a O E d okr y Result The pane is docked to the right e Moving a Pane to a Docked Inner Position If you drag the pane to one of the inner layout elements the pane will be positioned along one side of one of the other panes 1 Drag the pane to one of the inner layout elements tip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position Tipare r EA sa i Coes y Dragging a pane to the right inner layout element of the overview pane 160 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 a Sara Mo Result The pane is docked to the right of the overview pane e Moving a Pane to a Shared Position You can move a pane into another pane s position so two or more panes share the same position Do the following 1 Drag the pane to the center layout element of the pane which posit
225. ed by other users of the computer When ready click Next and follow the wizard s remaining steps to activate your licenses When your licenses have been activated you will see a confirmation 3 Click Finish to end the activation e Activate Licenses Offline 166 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Basics right click License Information and select Activate License Offline gt Export License For Activation to export a file with your currently added recording servers and cameras 2 Specify a file name and a location for the license request Irq file 3 Send the license request file by e mail to your NetEVS vendor Your NetEVS vendor will verify the validity of your license request file Your license request file will then be activated and an updated license file will be sent back to you by e mail How long will this process take You will typically receive the updated license file in less than 24 hours However during busy periods or during weekends or public holidays the process may take 48 hours or more Consult your NetEVS vendor if in doubt 4 When you have received the updated license file lic save it at a location accessible from the Management Client 5 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Basics right click License Information select Activate License Offline gt Import Activated License and select the lic file to im
226. edule i e how often archiving should take place Scheduling is defined for each of a recording server s archives and thus depends on the selected archive e Retention Retention time for database in hours and archive in days and GB as specified when defining archives through the Archive Wizard e Using Archive Wizard to Select Archive for Speaker When archiving is enabled for a speaker the speaker s recordings will by default be archived in the default archive of the recording server to which the speaker belongs If more than one archive has been created on the recording server you can use the Archive Wizard to archiving location for the speaker 1 Click the Archiving tab s Archive Wizard button to open the Database Archiving Configuration Wizard normally just referred to as the Archive 376 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual 5 NetEVS 2 0 Wizard When dealing with a speaker the wizard only offers one option Se ect archive for device Click Next to continue In the Archive Name column select the required archive You cannot select more than one archive for a speaker However if you later want to use another archive for the speaker you can simply run the wizard again and select another archive When ready click Next The speaker s archiving settings will be changed to reflect your selection A progress bar will indicate how the change progresses When ready the wizard will display a conf
227. either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of the Rule Wizard the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop feed You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Note that using the compulsory stop action Stop feed to stop the feed from a device means that video will no longer be transferred from the device to NetEVS in which case live viewing and recording of video will no longer be possible However a device on which the feed has been stopped will still be able to communicate with the recording server and the feed can be started again automatically through a rule as opposed to when the device has been manually disabled in the Management Client Sets a particular frame rate to be used when displaying live video from the selected cameras instead of the cameras default frame rate Tip The default live frame rate of a camera is specified on the Settings tab When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to specify which frame rate to set and on which devices Note Always verify that the frame rate number of frames per second you specify is available on the cameras in question Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of the Rule Wizard the w
228. eld and confirm the password in the Confirm password field Note The password must contain one or more characters and or digits 7 Click OK 9 On the last step of the wizard click Finish The recording server is now installed The recording server has no user interface as such it is accessed and managed through the Management Client If required repeat the process on other computers to be used as recording servers Tip When the recording server software is installed you are able to check the state of the recording server by looking at the recording server icon in the recording server computer s notification area See Recording Server Service Administration for more information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 19 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Management Client Installation Note Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software CD before installing any part of NetEVS The Management Client NetEVS Manager is used for configuration and day to day management of the NetEVS system The Management Client is typically installed on the system administrator s workstation or similar 20 1 On the computer on which you will install the Management Client shut down any software running If upgrading it is highly recommended that you remove any previous versions of the Management Client before upgrading With an Internet Explorer browser connect to the NetEVS Management Server at the following addres
229. elect NetMatrix Monitor e Click the Remove button and follow the removal instructions Non Required Components Removal from Management Server Upon installation your Management Server by default contains installation files for a number of components The installation files lets you install the components on the Management Server and make them available to your organization s users through the Download Manager You can remove installation files for non required features from the Management Server This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features for example non relevant language versions 1 Open the Installers folder located in the Management Server software installation folder typically at C Program Files OnSSI NetEVS Server Installers 2 You may depending on the type of component need to select the required language sub folder Then you delete the unwanted installation exe file 428 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Recording Server Removal To remove an NetEVS recording server use the following procedure on the computer on which the recording server is installed Note If you are not an NetEVS system administrator do not attempt to remove a recording server What happens to the recording server s recordings During the removal process you will be asked whether you want to keep the recording server s recordings 1
230. electable events are listed in groups according to whether they are related to plugins dependent on hardware configuration built into NetEVS itself etc In this example we want the event to be detected motion Motion detection events are technically related to NetEVS s motion detection plugin so we go to the Plug ins group select the event Motion Start and click OK Select an Event ES Events A Damos BA Progen t Motion Started F Motion Stopped Hardware Configuiable T Input Activated tE Input Changed E input Desci ted T Motion End event Y Motion Started aver ll Biin k Lairet alan Eira T a 1 Fu a Cea Agr Devices recording server management server link When you have selected the required event clicking the devices recording server management server link opens the Select Group Members window which lets you specify the devices on which device the event should occur in order for the rule to apply In this example the event should occur on Camera 1 in order for the rule to apply In the Select Group Members window we therefore drag Camera 1 to the Selected list and click OK By doing this we have specified the exact content of the first part of the wizard s rule description which now looks like this Newt Edt the mle descnption click an underlined ten Perform an action on Motion Sart from Camera T 5 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 2 of the w
231. ems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Role Settings Name Karen Smith ACME ks 3 Joe Testername A4CMESt Specifying the Rights of a Role To specify which rights should be granted to a role do the following 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and right click Roles Then select the required role in the overview pane Mame A Administrators Bang So Sa a R Building B Securty Stall a PP ee ee ee eee 2 In the properties pane specify required rights for the role on the relevant tabs The tabs are described in the following e Device Rights The Device tab lets you specify which features users groups with the selected role should be able to use for each device e g a camera or device group The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half you select the device or device group for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half you then specify which of the selected device s or device group s features users groups with the selected role should have the right to access Remember to repeat for each required device device group On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 285 NetEVS 2 0 286 User Manual Fole Selling Wi Select devica of device group fot which bo sel security Bb Lametas p Camera 1 p Camera 2 p Camera 3 H Camera 4 a Building E Cameras y Al Cameras Microphones 510 Building A Cameras gt Ga All Microphones 2 Microp
232. ency Daily 1 week s on O Weekly T Monday E Tuesday E Wednesday 7 Thursday Monthly Friday E Saturday Y Sunday Daily frequency O Occurs once at 00 00 Occurs every 1 Starting at 00 00 Ending at Summary Description Occurs every week on Sunday at 00 00 Help Grip The effect of your selections are summed up in the lower part of the wizard use the summary to verify that your selections reflect your intentions OTip If required you can always adjust the archive s settings including its scheduling once the archive has been created When ready click Next 5 Your new archive will be created A progress bar will indicate how creation progresses When the archive is created the wizard will display a confirmation Aclion 5 Labus bariy Fi Creste archive Good Archive Success In case the archive could not be created the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem Bocclicw Sbai Hiertas x Creste archive Bad Archies Fal Messages When ready click Finish our newly created archive will be listed on the Archiving tab for the recording server Grip On the Archiving tab you will also be able to see useful information about each archive created on the recording server for example when the next archiving is scheduled to take place e Changing Existing Archives Note Although you can change a number of settings you cannot change the path of an ex
233. ense lic file and the system will verify both before you will be able to continue If you do not have your SLC or license file contact your surveillance system vendor e Have your new NetEVS version ready e The Management Server stores your NetEVS system s configuration in a database The system configuration database can be stored in two different ways 1 In a SQL Server Express Edition database on the Management Server itself or 2 in a database on an existing SQL 2005 Server on your network If using 2 Administrator rights on the SQL Server are required whenever you need to create move or upgrade the Management Server s system configuration database on the SQL Server Once you are done creating moving or updating being database owner of the Management Server s system configuration database on the SQL Server will suffice e Upgrading the Management Server The Management Server has several components In the following we will walk through the process of removing the old components except the Database Server and installing the new ones 34 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 On the Management Server stop the Management Server service by right clicking the Management Server icon in the computer s notification area also known as the system tray then selecting Stop Management Server Service 2 Open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs
234. ent Client right away If you want this select Start the application now on the wizard s last step When ready click Finish On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 21 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing OnSS NetEWS 2 0 Manager on your computer Start the application now Finish Cancel Gtip For an introduction to NetEVS Manager see Management Client Overview 22 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Failover Server Installation Note Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software DVD before installing any part of NetEVS A failover server is a spare recording server which can take over in case a regular recording server becomes unavailable A failover server is therefore always installed on a separate computer See more information in Managing Failover Servers Important prerequisite During the installation process you will be asked to specify a user account under which the Failover Server service will run For the failover solution to work the user account you specify must have access to your NetEVS system with administrator rights How to Check for Admin Rights To verify whether the user account has administrator access to your NetEVS system do the following a In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Security and select Roles In the overview pane s roles list select the Administrators role b
235. ents tab will only be available if the selected microphone supports hardware configurable events Even when a microphone supports hardware configurable events it is always your decision whether you want to use such events on your NetEVS system Therefore you simply add each hardware configurable event you want to be able to use on each microphone e Adding a Hardware Configurable Event 1 Click the Add New button This will open the Se ect Driver Event window 2 Inthe Select Driver Event window select the required hardware configurable event Note You can only select one hardware configurable event at a time 208 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 3 Click OK The selected event will be added to the Events tab s list of configured events 4 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar an e Specifying Hardware Configurable Event Properties For each hardware configurable event you have added you are able to specify properties The number of properties you are able to specify depends on the microphone in question In order to work as intended some or all of the properties must be specified identically on the microphone device as well as on NetEVS One property you will always see is e Enabled Determines whether use of the hardware configurable event is enabled Select True to enable select Fa se to disable e Using Several Instances of a Hardware Configurable Event You are
236. er 3 A small dialog opens The dialog will show the exact version of your Management Server service On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Recording Server Service Recording Server Service Administration When the NetEVS Recording Server software is installed you are able to check the state of the Recording Server service by looking at the Recording Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the recording server in question The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Recording Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is also Known as the system tray it is located at the far right of the recording server s Windows taskbar EN a Ey 10 33 AM at OOO Example Recording Server service icon in notification area e Recording Server Service State Icons The following icons represent the states of the Recording Server service Hie Recording Server service is running To stop a running Recording Server service right click the icon and select Stop Recording Server Service Recording Server service is stopped To start the Recording Server service right click the icon and select Start Recording Server Service E g Recording Server service is starting Appears when the Recording Server service is in the process of starting Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Recording server is running Recording Se
237. er expanding Adding Hardware Cameras etc to a Recording Server You add IP hardware such as cameras video encoders etc to recording servers on your NetEVS system through the Hardware Detection Wizard The wizard helps you scan your network for relevant hardware See Hardware Detection Wizard for more information Managing Hardware on a Recording Server You have several options for managing IP hardware such as cameras video encoders etc on recording servers on your NetEVS system See Managing IP Hardware Recording Server Icons and what they Signify The following icons are used in the Management Client to indicate the state of individual recording servers H Recording server is running EN Recording server is communicating p Recording server requires attention This icon will typically appear On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 because the recording server service has been stopped OTip You can verify whether the recording server is stopped by looking at the recording server icon in the notification area of the computer running the recording server Right clicking the recording server icon in the notification area opens a menu with which you can start stop the recording server service view recording server status messages etc See Recording Server Service Administration for more information Recording server must be authorized Appears when the recording server is loaded for t
238. er Running Management Client e CPU Intel Core2 Duo minimum 2 0 GHz e RAM Minimum 1 GB e Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended e Graphics Adapter AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024x768 1280x1024 recommended 16 bit colors e Hard Disk Space Minimum 100 MB free e Operating System 32 or 64 bit support for Microsoft Windows 2008 Server Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Enterprise Windows Vista Ultimate Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 e Software Microsoft NET 3 0 Framework and DirectX 9 0 or newer e Computer Running Ocularis Client Lite e CPU Intel Core2 Quad minimum 2 8 GHz e RAM Minimum 2 GB but 4 GB is recommended e Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended e Graphics Adapter 256 MB RAM Direct 3D supported such as NVIDIA GeForce 8400M GS or NVIDIA Quadro NVS 140M e Hard Disk Space Minimum 100 MB free e Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit 64 bit is not supported e Software Microsoft NET 3 0 Framework and DirectX 9 0 or newer e Computer Running NetMatrix Monitor e CPU Intel Pentium 4 minimum 2 4 GHz e RAM Minimum 512 MB 1 GB recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista e Network Ethernet 100 Mbit or higher recommended e Graphics Adapter AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024 x 768 16 bit colors e Hard Disk Space Minimum 50 MB free e Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit or 64 b
239. er defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance system only authorized users will be able to do it When user defined events are used this way you may not always want them to be available for manual triggering in Ocularis Client Lite You can use roles to define which user defined events should be visible in Ocularis Client Lite see Specifying the Rights of a Role for more information Whichever way you choose to use user defined events each user defined event must first be added through the Management Client Adding a New User defined Event 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select User defined Events 2 In the overview pane right click Events and select Add New User defined Event 3 Type a name for the new user defined event and click OK The newly added user defined event will now appear in the list in the overview pane User rights permitting see roles the user defined event can now be manually triggered from Ocularis Client Lite Already connected Ocularis Client Lite users must log out and log in again before the user defined event will be visible Remember to create one or more rules specifying what should take place when the custom event occurs Editing the Name of an Existing User defined Event 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select User defined Events 2 In the overview pane select the required user defined event
240. er ending rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Read more about rules creation and management including how to use the Rule Wizard under Managing Rules Tip To view step by step examples of how to create typically required rules see How to Create Typical Rules e Default Start Feed Rule NetEVS comes with a number of default rules one of them is the Default Start Feed Rule The rule ensures that video feeds from all connected cameras are automatically fed to the NetEVS system IMPORTANT While the default rule enables access to connected cameras video feeds immediately upon installing the system it does not guarantee that video will be recorded as cameras recording settings must be specified separately IMPORTANT Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required The fact that the default rule is present does therefore not in itself guarantee that video feeds will automatically be fed to the NetEVS system as the default rule may subsequently have been deactivated or modified e Default Start Audio Feed Rule NetEVS comes with a number of default rules one of them is the Default Start Audio Feed Rule The rule ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and Speakers are automatically fed to the NetEVS system IMPORTANT Like other rules the default rule can be deactivated and or modified as required The fact that the default rule is present does the
241. er on the Mail Server tab For more information see Outgoing SMTP Mail Server Settings AVI Compression 1 Go to the NetEVS Manager s menu bar and select Too s gt Options 2 In the Options window specify compression settings the AVI Generation tab For more information see AVI Compression Settings e Adding New Notification Profiles 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts right click Notification Profiles and select Add New Notification Profile This will open the Add New Notification Profile wizard 2 On the wizard s first step specify the following e Name Compulsory Type a descriptive name for the notification profile The name will later appear whenever you select the notification profile during the process of creating a rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 219 NetEVS 2 0 220 Your description beset wal appear here User Manual Description Optional Type a description of the notification profile The description will among other places appear when you pause your mouse pointer over the notification profile in the overview pane s Notification Profiles list JE Notification Profiles aa Noma Proa When ready click Next 3 On the wizard s second step verify that Email is selected then click Next 4 On the wizard s third step specify the following Add Hew HMotification Profile x E ad Dangi AA A Subject Panel ere d
242. ered view as the camera s home position Navigate to the required position using the navigation buttons then click the Set as Home Position button The navigation buttons let you move the camera as follows Moves the fisheye rendered view up and to the left Moves the fisheye rendered view up Moves the fisheye rendered view up and to the right le ss 9 a Moves the fisheye rendered view to the left e Lal Moves the fisheye rendered view to its default position Moves the fisheye rendered view to the right Moves the fisheye rendered view down and to the left m y On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 111 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Moves the fisheye rendered view down Moves the fisheye rendered view down and to the right Zooms in one zoom level per click UP LP Le e Zooms out one zoom level per click Client Client Tab Camera Properties The Client tab lets you specify information which will affect access clients use of the selected camera To access the Client tab select the required camera in the overview pane then select the C ient tab in the properties pane These settings will affect Ocularis Client Lite Proposes i Cheni setir Erable bre multicast Default macnoaphore Microphon 1 Chew Dasdi speaker Speaker 1 mE Chaat tcl E ae bo GB Into PB Seinge A Steams Record F Archiving Y Events fe Cier Motion e Client Settings e Enable live multicast NetEV
243. ers enable supported devices cameras video encoders etc to communicate with the surveillance system Video Device Drivers must be installed on each recording server Video Device Drivers Installer 3 9 Device Pack Management Client Installer The NetEVS Management Client is the system s administration application used for setting up hardware recording servers security etc Management Client Installer 2 0b English Recording Server Installer The NetEVS Recording Server has features for recording of video and audio feeds and for communication with cameras and other devices in the surveillance system Recording Server Installer 2 0b English 3 The web page is available in a number of different languages In this example we assume that you view the web page in English and that you want to install English versions of the NetEVS components On the web page find the Recording Server Installer section and then click the English link under the required recording server version often only one version will be available Note Depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear after you click the link If such security warnings appear accept security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button text depends on your browser version This will open the NetEVS Recording Server Setup wizard which will guide you through the installation Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for OnSSI
244. erver according to the borrowed user rights See Managing Roles and Defining Roles with Access to NetDVMS Servers for more information Managing NetDVMS Servers NetDVMS severs added in the NetEVS Management Client have many similarities to NetEVS recording servers They record video feeds and communicate with cameras and other devices NetDVMS servers added in the NetEVS Management Client will be listed in the Add Remove NetDVMS Servers dialog which you can open by selecting NetDVMS Servers from the Tools menu Note NetDVMS s Recording Server service must be running in order for NetEVS to receive data from the NetDVMS installation See the NetDVMS documentation for more information e Adding NetDVMS Servers To add an existing NetDVMS installation to your NetEVS system do the following 1 From the NetEVS Management Client s Too s menu select NetDVMS Servers 2 In the Add Remove NetDVMS Servers dialog click the Add button 390 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 3 Enter the IP address or the host name of the required NetDVMS server in the NetDVMS server IP Host name field 4 Enter the port number used by the NetDVMS server s Image Server in the Port number field Tip The default port number is 80 if in doubt you can find the port number in the Image Server Administrator window on the NetDVMS server 5 Now enter information about the administrator of the NetDVMS server You can do this in
245. erver in the overview pane right click the no longer required hardware unit 2 From the menu that appears select Delete IP Hardware 260 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Ce Delete IP Hardware Rename IP Hardware FE Enabled ae Refresh F5 OTip As an alternative to using the menu simply press DELETE on your keyboard You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the hardware unit If you are sure click the Yes button The hardware unit will be removed from the recording server s listings in the Management Client If you ever need to add the hardware unit to a recording server again select the required recording server and use the Hardware Detection Wizard e Deleting All Hardware on a Recording Server To delete all hardware on a recording server do the following IMPORTANT When deleting hardware units all recordings from the hardware units in question will be deleted permanently E In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand the Servers folder select the Recording Servers node then in the overview pane right click the required recording server and select Delete All Hardware In order to prevent accidental deletion of hardware you will be asked to confirm that you wish to delete all hardware on the selected recording server 2 Verify that you have selected the correct recording server then click Yes e Enabling Disabling Individual Devices Came
246. es Frem Het localice Pcoot Ender the obici names bo paad exarnplesh panasema Ga ance e When users added this way log in to NetEVS the user must not specify any server name PC name or IP address as part of their user names Example of a correctly specified user name USEROO1 Example of an incorrectly specified user name PCOO1 USEROO1 The users should of course still specify their passwords etc Rules About Rules Rules are a central element in NetEVS The behavior of a NetEVS surveillance system is to a very large extent determined by rules Rules determine highly important settings such as when cameras should record when PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras should patrol when notifications should be sent etc Perform an action on Motion Start from Lamera 2 start recording 3 seconds before on the device on which event occurred Perform stop action on Motion End from Camera 2 stop recording immediately Example A rule specifying that a particular camera should begin recording when it detects motion e What You Can Do with Rules In short rules specify actions which should be carried out under particular conditions Example When motion is detected condition a camera should begin recording action The following are examples of what you can do with rules On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 303 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 304 e Start and stop recording e Set non default live frame rate e Set non default recording fr
247. es list either select the device and click the Add button double click the device or simply drag the device from one list to the other OrTip When devices are grouped into so called device groups you can quickly move all devices in a group simply by moving the group folder For example moving the A Cameras folder would quickly move all cameras in that group When the required devices are listed in the Selected devices list click OK You have now specified the exact content of the first part of the rule description Next Edit the mle description chick an underlined tem Perform an action on Motion Start from Blue Sector Black Door Ple sector Enirante Example only your selections may be different On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 311 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Perform an action in a time interval If you select a time based rule no more information is required on the wizard s first step 4 Click the wizard s Next button to go to the wizard s second step On the wizard s second step you are able to define further conditions for the rule 5 Select one or more conditions for example Day of week is lt days gt 312 First Select conditions to apply Within selected time in lt bme profiles _ Outside selected time in ime profbe gt within the lime period lt starltme gt lo lt endtime liay of week is lt days gt Example only your selections may be different Depending on your sele
248. es pane For details of how to define preset positions on the Presets tab see Preset Positions Once you have defined the required preset positions patrolling profiles for the PTZ camera are defined on the neighboring Patrolling tab For details of how to define patrolling profiles on the Patrolling tab see Patrolling Creating the First Rule Patrolling During Daytime 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts then right click Rules and select Add New Rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 345 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual AE wo E des E add New Rule ja CTRL N E gt I af Validate All Rules ge Refresh FS Tip Instead of right clicking to select Add New Rule you may simply press CTRL N on your keyboard 2 The Rule Wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field In this example the rule will cover a specific camera and how it should patrol during daytime We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name Mame PTZ Camera Daytime Patrolin Grip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of the Rule Wizard select the required rule type In this example we want to base the rule on a time period Therefore we select Perform an action in a time interval
249. ests the stop criterion Perform stop action when time interval ends First Select stop ciena O Petom shop action when lime interval end Note that the stop criterion No actions performed on rule end is not available a stop criterion must be defined for this type of rule We still need to define exactly which kind of stop action should take place when the time period ends On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 343 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 12 Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 13 In this step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions In this example Based on the start action start patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action Stop patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is stopped immediately when the time period ends Next Edt the rule descnphon cick an underlined item Pertorm an action in a time interval within the time period 13 00 to 18 00 and day of week is Saturday Start patrolling on Retal Ares PTZ using Retail Ares Saturday Afternoon Perform an action when time interval ends stop patrolling immediately This is just what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g sixty seconds 14 Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If yo
250. etection a Tagger rra Mess deze beet dd stem internation ch bk bo wiper vaikas do bard biie Ascodra Server name Hardere canse Cienc naine Els raros Trager bres Time biw emak DS Seod sas irede images O iride 4041 Help Beck fin Comcel Recipients Type the e mail addresses to which the notification profile s e mail notifications should be sent If typing more than one e mail address separate addresses with a semicolon Example aa aaaa aa bb bbbb bb cc cccc cc Subject Type the text you want to appear as the subject of the e mail notifications Tip You can insert system variables such as Device name in the subject field To insert variables simply click the required variable links in the box below the Message text field On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Message text Type the text you want to appear in the body of the e mail notifications In addition to the message text the body of each e mail notification will automatically contain this information o What triggered the e mail notification o The source of any attached still images or AVI video clips Tip You can insert system variables such as Device name in the message text field To insert variables simply click the required variable links in the box below the field e Time btw e mail Specify required minimum time in seconds to pass between the sending of each e mail notification Examples o If spe
251. etects motion in video received from cameras Note This type of event requires that NetEVS s motion detection is enabled for the cameras to which the event will be linked Exactly what constitutes motion depends on the motion detection settings specified for individual cameras in NetEVS Note In addition to NetEVS s motion detection some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such camera detected motion detection can also be used in NetEVS rules Such events are called Hardware Configurable as they do not work until configured on the camera hardware itself See Events dependent on hardware configuration in the following Motion Occurs when motion is no longer detected in received video On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 125 NetEVS 2 0 Stopped Audio Falling Audio Passing Audio Rising Images Received Input Activated 126 User Manual See also the notes in the description of the Motion Started event above Occurs when the audio signal on an audio enabled device is falling For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the device in question Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an audio unit connected The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when the state of an audio enabled device is changed regardless o
252. ets You Target BACKUPS ccceeeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeees 71 Viewing Backed UD ArChIVeS ida 71 AUO caca ia 75 ADOU CAU rico 75 A SS A a E 76 AVI COMpPression SCUUINGS srta a A 76 Cameras nr ico das 78 Adding Cameras nit AA 78 Managing Cameras urinarios 78 Database Manage MEN CIA A A 80 A e ae 83 SCENI St e ataco 84 Sea S eirean a a acai hed ceeds od Gina 87 RECOGNI G nit iia 89 HOW Does Pr b ffering Wok 91 Enabling and Disabling PrebufferinQ ccoccccccnccccccccnnnnnnnncnn nc 92 SPecifyind Prepuner SZE iaa il lab 92 Usina PreDUTerING IN RUGS isos as 92 PU CVG A O ga eae aes 94 RC edge ee aaa een 96 EVEN Ss iaa sl 107 PISO VE ARA Aa 110 COMMOUPaUO Maid ic nico 111 PREVIEW estirada aciisn 111 RS STG es See ee ene eae aia a Race eect Mua A E ui eens cere e ml pels O cis ca 112 MOOD OCCCUOM ic alien chia A A N 113 DENNING EXGlUGe REGIONS ars AANA 116 A A 117 DEVICE GrOUDS renerien A E 119 USINO Device GroUP S ai ri adria ied 119 EVEN o ea oia an lo o deidad 124 ADOUCIEY CIE Sica ciclones 124 User defined EVentsS circa aa 124 Hardware Configurable EVEN idas 124 EV CHES OVNI Wii adela 124 User defined EVENTS rar SA AAA 131 PallOV EF SEVES al AL A Ara A ET 133 ABOUT Falover Serve Sipra ia 133 Managing Fallo ver Server 135 Overview of Failover Servers in NetEVS ManagQ8rTF ccccccccccccnnccnnnnncnanc carr 136 Table Of Contents Failover Servers Are Grouped s ssssssssssssresesesssssreserososnnsssnsnenenenenenesen
253. ets you activate and update you license by exporting a license request file and afterwards importing an updated license file See Activating Licenses for more information e Recording Servers The Action menu features five commands concerning recording servers e Hardware Detection Wizard helps you detect IP hardware devices such aS cameras on your network and add them to your NetEVS system See Hardware Detection Wizard for more information e Delete All Hardware lets you quickly delete all hardware on a selected recording server See Managing Recording Servers for more information e Rename Recording Server lets you change the name of a selected recording server See Managing Recording Servers for more information e Remove Recording Server lets you remove a selected recording server from the Management Client The configuration of the cameras connected to the removed recording server will be removed as well See Managing Recording Servers for more information e Authorize Recording Server lets you authorize newly added recording servers prior to first use See Managing Recording Servers for more information e Cameras Microphones Speakers Inputs amp Outputs On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 57 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual The Action menu features five commands for use when working with devices e Add New Device Group lets you define a new group of devices for group based management e Edit Device Group Members
254. ettings tab is determined entirely by the drivers for the cameras in question and is thus likely to vary depending on the types of cameras selected The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change values when you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between O and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table 84 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Ah General Enghira 5 En Colonel 50 i 50 Fists ies 150510024 Fiais i E JPEG zirnamod Flares pe second 30 Setting O ito Record G Archiving Motion Settings tab Red arrow indicates allowed range in this example the value used to specify compression must be a number between 0 and 100 Content of Settings tab varies depending on selected cameras Tip Some cameras may support more than one type of stream for example MPEG4 and MJPEG In that case you can use multi streaming to establish two independent streams from the camera to the recording server a stream for live viewing and another stream for playback purposes with different resolution encoding and frame rate OrTip If you change a camera s settings you can quickly verify the effect of your change if
255. etwork N et E V S Automatic Hardware Detection is recommended if you are new to this software it will guide you through the steps involved in setting up your IP devices E d og Hardware dection O Automatic Hardware Detection R d Assisted Hardware Detection b To continue click Next Hardware Detection Wizard opening page The wizard offers you two ways of detecting and adding hardware devices With automatic hardware detection NetEVS automatically scans for available hardware within one or more specified IP address ranges With assisted hardware detection you manually specify the IP address of each required device Both options offer the possibility of automatically detecting the correct hardware drivers Tip If you are new to NetEVS use automatic hardware detection it will guide you through each of the steps involved in detecting and adding your IP devices On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 253 Net 254 EVS 2 0 User Manual e Automatic Hardware Detection To use automatic hardware detection do the following 1 On the first step of the Hardware Detection Wizard select Automatic Hardware Detection and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard the wizard will suggest one or more IP address ranges on which to detect devices The number of suggested ranges will depend on the number of network interface cards on the recording server By default NetEVS will scan the IP address range s
256. event will now appear in the Events tab s Configured Events list To the right of the list settings for the selected input event are displayed in a table The table s first column lists available settings the second column lists the value of each setting Note The settings on the Events tab is determined entirely by the devices in question and is thus likely to vary depending on the input selected The content of the table may vary but you will typically see the following property e Enabled Select between True enabled or Fa se disabled You are typically able to change values Do the following to change a property 1 Select the row with the property you want to change 2 Click the button to the right of the properties column 3 Change the value of the property 4 In the NetEVS Manager s toolbar click the Save button When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the grey information box below the settings table On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Viewing the Current State of an Input The change of an input s state is regarded as an event by NetEVS Events can be used in rules and hereby trigger actions when the state of an input is changed See Defining Input Related Rules for more information about how to include an input event i
257. ever the microphone is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar forn Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the microphone A description is not compulsory The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the microphone s name in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar e Hardware name Name of the hardware with which the microphone is connected The field is non editable However the hardware name can be changed by clicking the Go To button next to the field Clicking the Go To button will take you to the hardware information where the name is editable e Unit number Non editable field displaying the unit on which the microphone is attached on the hardware On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 201 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Settings Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit basic settings for a selected microphone or for all microphones within a selected
258. evices in one go takes too long time Note Content of the Settings tab may vary depending on the types of microphones selected The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change values when you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between O and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table e Specifying Common Settings for All Microphones in a Device Group If using device groups see Managing Microphones you are able to quickly specify common settings for all microphones within a given device group 190 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 In the microphone list in the Management Client s overview pane click the required device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s microphones will be listed Depending on the amount and type of microphones in the device group the list may only contain a few settings If the device group contains more than 400 microphones the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing You are now able to verify or change the common settings 2 If required you are able to specify settings for the device group s individual microphone types
259. eview image from the camera use the navigation buttons and or sliders to move the camera to the required preset position While you do this you are able to verify the position of the camera through the preview image On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 97 NetEVS 2 0 98 User Manual OTip Use of the navigation buttons and sliders is described below this list Specify a name or number for the preset position in the Name field Otip If typing a name use a descriptive name the name of the preset position may later be used in situations where you will not have access to a preview image from the preset position e g when using the preset in a rule Optionally type a description of the preset position in the Description field Click OK This will close the Add New Preset window and add the preset position to the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera How to Use the Navigation Buttons The navigation buttons let you move the camera as follows Moves the camera up and to the left Moves the camera up Moves the camera up and to the right Moves the camera to the left Moves the camera to its default position Moves the camera to the right Moves the camera down and to the left Moves the camera down Moves the camera down and to the right Zoom in one zoom level per click 19 le Le F y 5 le ls e EE Zoom out one zoom level per click How to Use the Axes Navigation Sliders The navigatio
260. f frames per second we click the frames per second link specify a frame rate of 25 and click OK Frame Rate E Select hara rahe 2500 FE DE Cancel The rule description now indicates that the frame rate will be set to 25 frames per second 10 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 4 of the wizard 11 On step 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would set the frame rate for the camera to 25 FPS indefinitely upon motion detection Based on the elements in our rule description the wizard therefore automatically suggests the stop criterion Perform stop action on lt event gt First Select stop entena 5 Pesform stop action on event C Pestorm stop action after a lt time gt On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 337 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Note that the stop criterion No actions performed on rule end is not available a stop criterion must be defined for this type of rule In the rule description the wizard furthermore automatically suggests that the stop action is performed when motion is no longer detected on Camera 1 Next Edt the rule descapton click an underkred item Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set lime frame rate on the device on which event occurred to 25 frames per second Pe
261. f which state the device is changed to Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an audio unit connected The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when the audio signal on an audio enabled device is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the device in question Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an audio unit connected The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when pre alarm images are received from a camera Pre alarm images are available for selected cameras only such cameras are capable of sending of one or more single still images from immediately before an event took place to the surveillance system via SMTP e mail Note This type of event requires that at least one camera on your system supports pre alarm images The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Grip Consider using prebuffering defined on the Record tab as an alternative to pre alarm images Occurs when an external input unit connected to an input port on a device is activated On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual Input Changed Input Deactivated Motion Started HW Motion Stopped HW Tampering Temperature NetEVS 2 0 Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your
262. faces or via CGI script commands Also check the Supported Devices page at www onssi com to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the devices and firmware used e Enabling Output When outputs are detected with the Hardware Detection Wizard they are by default disabled You can easily activate outputs when needed If a device has several outputs you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 In the navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers 226 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 2 In the overview pane select the relevant recording server and find the device on which the output is placed 3 Right click the required output and select Enabled e Specifying Output Properties Each output has several properties which can be found on the output s Settings and Info tabs You can access these tabs in two ways e Inthe navigation pane expand Devices and select Outputs then in the overview pane expand the required outputs folder and select the required output Or e In the overview pane select a device group to change the settings for all outputs in this group or expand a device group and select the required output The properties of the selected output or the common properties for all outputs in a selected device group will be displayed on the following tabs e Info Tab The Info tab lets you view and edit basic information about an out
263. faster e Hard Disk Space Minimum 100 GB free depends on number of servers cameras rules and logging settings e Operating System 32 or 64 bit support for Microsoft Windows 2008 Server Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Enterprise Windows Vista Ultimate Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 Limited by Windows operating system to 10 concurrent incomplete outbound TCP connection attempts e Software Microsoft NET 3 0 Framework and Internet Information Services IIS 5 1 or newer e Computer Running Recording Server or Failover Server e CPU Dual Core Intel Xeon minimum 2 0 GHz Quad Core recommended e RAM Minimum 1 GB 2 GB or more recommended e Network Ethernet 1 Gbit recommended e Graphics Adapter Onboard GFX AGP or PCI Express minimum 1024x768 16 bit colors e Hard Disk Type E IDE PATA SATA SCSI SAS 7200 RPM or faster e Hard Disk Space Minimum 100 GB free depends on number of cameras and recording settings e Operating System 32 or 64 bit support for Microsoft Windows 2008 Server Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Enterprise Windows Vista Ultimate Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 Limited by Windows operating system to 10 concurrent incomplete outbound TCP connection attempts Running as a 32 bit service application e Software Microsoft NET 3 0 Framework or newer On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 3 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Comput
264. fered audio is added ee This is what is actually recorded Enabling and Disabling Prebuffering Prebuffering is by default enabled with a prebuffer size of 3 seconds To enable disable prebuffering select clear the Enable prebuffering check box When enabling remember to specify a prebuffer size On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 373 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 374 Specifying Prebuffer Size Select or type the required prebuffer size in seconds in the Prebuffer size box Clicking the Prebuffer size box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one second The number of seconds you specify in the Prebuffer size box must be sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements Using Prebuffering in Rules The use of prebuffering enables you to create rules specifying that recording should begin prior to the event or time triggering the rule Maximum Storage Limits The Record tab s Maximum storage limits specify how long recordings are kept in the database for OTip With archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the camera s database For the speaker s database you are able to specify a maximum time limit e g one day as well as a maximum database size limit e g two gigabytes Whichever of the two limits is reached first will apply e Specifying a Maximum Storage Time Limit To specify a maximum time limit select or type the required values in the Time per
265. field may mean that recordings are removed from the archive before the specified number of days is reached Tip If you want to specify indefinitely select a value of O zero e Archive Retention GB Select the maximum number of gigabytes of recording data to store in the archive IMPORTANT Note that this is one of two maximum size settings for the archive The Archive Retention days setting specified in the neighboring field may mean that recordings are removed from the archive before the specified number of gigabytes is reached 278 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 IMPORTANT An archive always requires 50 megabytes of free space the actual maximum size of your archive will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 50 megabytes When ready click Next 5 Now you are able to change the archiving schedule When ready click Next 6 Your changes will be implemented A progress bar will indicate how implementation progresses When the archive is changed the wizard will display a confirmation In case the archive could not be changed the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem When ready click Finish e Removing Archives Note You are only able to remove archives if at least two archives exist If only a single archive exists it cannot be removed as it will automatically be the recording server s default archive 1 On the first step of the A
266. flexible they can be based on one or more single periods of time on one or more recurring periods of time or a combination of single and recurring times Many users will be familiar with the concepts of single and recurring time periods from calendar applications such as the one in Microsoft Outlook Time profiles always apply in local time This means that if your system has recording servers placed in different time zones any actions e g recording on cameras associated with time profiles will be carried out in each recording server s local time Example If you have a time profile covering the period 14 30 to 15 30 any associated actions on a recording server placed in New York will be carried out when the local time is 14 30 to 15 30 in New York while the same actions on a recording server placed in Los Angeles will be carried out some hours later when the local time is 14 30 to 15 30 in Los Angeles You create and manage time profiles in the Management Client by expand the navigation pane s Rules and Alerts folder then selecting Time Profiles A Time Profiles list will appear in the overview pane Time Profiles y 4 Time profes 0 Weekdays Closed A Weekdays Working Hours 4 Weekends Example only e Specifying a Time Profile 1 In the Time Profiles list right click Time Profiles and select Add New Time Profile Time Profiles La Time Profiles AH ews Tima Prof CTRL N Refresh FS Tip Inste
267. fter a short while change to Failover Server service is enabled and started Ta Failover Server is disabled or running offline Typically appears if e the failover server is not enabled through the Management Client see Managing Failover Servers e the Failover Server service is running but the Management Server service is not e the failover server s information about the Management Server address is incorrect see Changing the Management Server Address in the following for more information e the user account under which the Failover Server service runs has no access to your NetEVS system How to troubleshoot this During installation of the failover server you specified a user account under which the Failover Server service should run For the failover server to work it is important that the user account in question has access to your NetEVS system with administrator rights To verify whether the user account has access to your NetEVS 140 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 system do the following 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and select Roles 2 In the overview pane s roles list select the Administrators role 3 In the properties pane s role settings list verify that the required user is listed If the user is not listed add the required user to the Administrators role by clicking the Add button below the role settings list For more information see
268. g Several Instances in the following for more information e Using Several Instances of a Hardware Configurable Event You are able to add a hardware configurable event for example Motion Started HW more than once The reason for this is that you are able to specify different properties for each instance of the event see also Specifying Hardware Configurable Event Properties Example The camera in question has been configured with two motion windows called A1 and A2 You have added two instances of the Motion Started HW event In the properties of one instance you have specified use of motion window A1 in the properties of the other instance you have specified use of motion window A2 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 109 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual When you use the hardware configurable event in a rule you are able to specify that the event should be based on motion detected in a specific motion window in order for the rule to be triggered First Select conditions to apply ed time in lt time profile ected tine in lt tine profile he lime pe od lt slartline gt to cendiir week is days gt Event is from lt motion window Example Specifying specific motion window as part of a rule s conditions e Deleting a Hardware Configurable Event Note Keep in mind however that deleting a hardware configurable event will affect any rules in which the event is used To delete a hardware configurable event on th
269. g records remote user activity 176 Viewing the Audit Log To view the Audit Log expand the Server Logs item in the Management Client s navigation pane then select Audit Log Audit Log Content Each row in the Audit Log represents a log entry Each row contains the following information e Level Displays an icon indicating the level of the log entry indicates info indicates error Mindicates warning e UTC Time Timestamp in coordinated universal time UTC an international high precision time standard e Local Time Timestamp in the local time of the NetEVS server e Description Description of the logged incident e Audit Type Type of logged incident e Granted Information about whether the remote user action was allowed granted or not e ID Identification number of the logged incident e User User name of the remote user causing the logged incident e Location IP address or host name of the computer from which the remote user caused the logged incident e Source Type Type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred Since remote user access is handled by the NetEVS Management Server source type will typically be Server e Source Name Name of the Management Server on which the logged incident occurred Navigating the Audit Log If the Audit Log contains more than one page of information you are able to navigate between the log s pages by clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the
270. g required storage area note that the Include media data box is selected by default Make absolutely sure that the new storage area has enough free space to accommodate the database Compare the Used column which displays the current size of the database with the Free column which displays the current amount of free space in the destination storage area See also the IMPORTANT note in the previous Then make sure the required database is selected in the Include media data column if check box is not selected only the database structure not its content will be moved and click Next 3 The database will be moved A bar displays how the beginning of the moving job progresses You will be informed whether the job has begun successfully or whether it has failed If the job failed you will be able to view a status message indicating what caused the failure Move database for device Lamers 5 Example Indication of successful beginning of a moving job del Mowe database for device Camera S Fa Example Indication of failed moving job with link to status message Note that the status Success only indicates that the moving job has begun successfully not that the job is complete Moving of large databases may take considerable time 3Tip You can follow the further progress of the moving job by looking at the Database Configuration information on the Record tab for the device in question 4 Click Finish
271. g server when the recording server is installed on the system Recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual camera databases in the recording server s default storage area unless you specifically define that another storage area should be used for storing the databases of particular cameras To access the Storage tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Storage tab in the properties pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 245 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual The Storage tab lists storage areas defined for the selected recording server It furthermore lets you access the Database Configuration Wizard with which you are able create change or remove storage areas Diraja a Cee D abii A a ar e Storage Tab s Columns Information on the Storage tab is presented in the following columns e Name Name of the storage area e Location The path to the directory in which the storage area is located e Disk Free Space Free space left on the disk used for storage area i e not free space left in the storage area itself e Default Selected check box indicates which storage area is the recording server s default storage area i e the storage area in which database content is automatically stored unless you specifically define other storage areas for particular cameras Note that only one storage area can be the default area Archiving Tab You are able to view
272. g tab select the required speaker in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane Properties FEJ Daab bra ciar f Enable sechiang Euchre narra Chur theaducheve Aecheve path Le Our theta Terhi Diii maip dap every 10 e ia 00 00 and 255 Footer DB 1 hours Aacha 1 dave 1 GE Diagn Tina Era Time 16 01 00 11 10 00 1601007 11S Criadero he 1601 2000 114 0000 16 01 2007 11 09 53 Celha 1 20 10 50 00 16 01 2000 10 59 53 16 M 4010443 1601 00 10 43 3 Ge Setting Gp info Aecod E ducking A Eventi 2 Motion On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Database Archiving Configuration The Database archiving information section in the upper part of the tab contains the following e Enable archiving Only available if one or more archives have been created on the recording server Selecting box lets you enable archiving for the speaker in question If you do not use the Archive Wizard to specify otherwise archiving of recordings from the speaker will take place in the recording server s default archive e Archive name Name of the archive selected for the recording server e Archive path Path to the archive directory e Schedule Archiving schedule i e how often archiving should take place Scheduling is defined for each of a recording server s archives and thus depends on the selected archive e Retention Retention time for database in hours and
273. gh group memberships When that is the case you cannot remove the individual user from the role 1 Inthe Management Client s navigation pane expand Security then select Ro es This will list current roles in the overview pane 2 Inthe overview pane select the role from which you want to remove the user then select the Users or Groups tab in the properties pane 3 On the Users or Groups tab select the user you want to remove then click the Remove button in the lower part of the tab Tip You can select more than one user if required 4 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected user s If you are sure click Yes On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 299 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Groups Assigning Groups to a Role de 300 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and select Roles Then select the required role in the overview pane Mame q Administrators Fe ui Seon Sa i St cu loa ra Cani In the properties pane select the Users amp Groups tab li Users amp Groups O Device af PTZ di Speech E Application Y Use On the Users amp Groups tab click the Add button This will open the Select Users and Groups dialog ZA a Select the objeci bape Woes on Groups Eror thi location Erta the cbgect names ho prina mampi In the Select Users or Groups window verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If n
274. go takes too long time You are now able to verify or change the common settings 2 If required you are able to specify settings for the device group s individual microphone types as well From the menu above the settings list select the required type of microphone to verify or change the settings of the selected type of microphone 3 If you have made changes to the settings save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar 202 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Recording Record Tab The Record tab lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected microphone Microphones recording and storage settings are completely independent of cameras and Speakers Note Recordings from a microphone will only be saved in the microphone s database when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met Enabling and Disabling Recording Recording is by default enabled To enable disable recording for the selected microphone select clear the Record tab s Enable recording check box Note Recording must be enabled for the microphone before you are able to record i e Save audio from the microphone A rule specifying that a microphone should record under particular circumstances will not work if recording is disabled for the microphone in question Recording Settings Prebuffering is essentially the ability to save audio in the microphone s databa
275. group Verify that you are deleting the correct device group then click Yes Note Remember that you have only deleted the device group itself If you wish to delete IP hardware such as a camera from your NetEVS system do so ona recording server level see Managing Hardware On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 123 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Events About Events Events are a central element in NetEVS Events are primarily used for triggering actions you configure this through rules Example You create a rule which specifies that in the event of detected motion the surveillance system should take the action of starting recording of video from a particular camera For a list of the events you are able to use in rules see the Events Overview User defined Events If the event you require is not on the list you can create your own user defined events Such user defined events can be useful if you want to integrate other systems with your surveillance system Example With user defined events you can use data received from a third party access control system as events in NetEVS the events can subsequently trigger actions This way you can for example begin recording video from relevant cameras when somebody enters a building User defined events can also simply be used for making it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in Ocularis Client Lite Hardware Configurable Events Some ha
276. hat you want to delete the selected alert In you are sure click the Yes button 68 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Archiving About Archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default database to another location This Way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice Archiving is configured on a per recording server basis Once you have configured the archiving settings for a recording server where to store archives how often to transfer recordings to the archives etc you can enable archiving for individual cameras When archiving is enabled for a camera the contents of the camera s database will automatically be moved to an archive at regular intervals Depending on your requirements you are able to configure one or more archives for each of your recording servers Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself or at another location which can be reached by NetEVS for example on a network drive e Configuring and Managing Archiving for a Recording Server You configure and manage a recording server s archiving settings through the Archive Wizard available from the recording server s Archiving Tab The wizard takes you through the steps required in order to e Create new archives for th
277. he description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the camera s name in the overview pane 15 H L A TAAL E ee Receptio Sy Stairs La Lamera covering reception area On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 83 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar y a e Hardware name Name of the hardware with which the camera is connected The field is non editable However the hardware name can be changed by clicking the Go To button next to the field Clicking the Go To button will take you to the hardware information where the name is editable e Unit number Non editable field displaying the unit on which the camera is attached on the hardware For single device hardware the unit number will typically be 1 For multi device hardware such as video servers with several channels the unit number will typically indicate the channel on which the camera is attached e g 3 Settings Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit key settings such as default frame rate resolution compression on screen date time text display etc for a selected camera or for all cameras within a selected device group However if you select a device group with 400 or more cameras the Settings tab will not be available for editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Note The content of the S
278. he Administrative Tools window double click Services 4 In the Services window double click the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP item 5 Inthe Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Properties window click Stop and then set Startup type to either Manual or Disabled OTip When set to Manual the SMTP Service can be started manually from the Services window or from a command prompt using the command net start SMTPSVC 6 When ready click OK e Solution 2 Remove SMTP Service 30 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note that removing the SMTP Service may affect other applications using the SMTP service 6 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 7 In the Control Panel double click Add or Remove Programs 8 In the left side of the Add or Remove Programs window click Add Remove Windows Components 9 In the Windows Components Wizard select the Internet Information Services IIS item and click the Details button 10 In the Internet Information Services IIS window clear the SMTP Service check box 11 Click OK Next and Finish NetDVMS Verification and Solutions To verify whether NetDVMS is installed do the following 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Add or Remove Programs 3 In the Add or Remove Programs window verify whether NetDVMS appears in the list If it does NetDVMS is installed If NetDVMS is insta
279. he Archive Wizard again and repeat steps 1 2 e What to Do if the Archive is the Default Archive If the archive you are trying to remove is the recording server s default archive it will be indicated by a check mark in the Defau t column If there is only one archive on the recording server the archive will automatically be the recording server s default archive and you will not be able to remove it If there are other archives on the recording server you can specify that another archive should be the recording server s default archive a Click the Back button to go to the first step of the wizard b On the wizard s first step select Change existing archive on recording server and click Next c On the wizard s second step select the archive you want to make the recording server s default archive and click Next d On the wizard s third step select the Defau t box next to the archive you want to make the recording server s default archive then click Next e Verify that retention times are as required the click Next f Verify that scheduling is as required the click Next g When the archives have been updated click Finish h Start the Archive Wizard again and continue removing the no longer required archive 280 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 When ready click Next 3 Since removing the archive will also remove all of its content you will be asked to confirm that you want t
280. he NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Tools gt View Groups This will open the Add Remove View Group window On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 387 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Add Remove View Group E Wiere giin bet Hra Ad Arnes Security Salt Bulding A Security Sta Edi Buddies E Security Shall Parr dues Security SEs Peer Chee Example only 2 In the Add Remove View Group window s list click the Add button 3 Type the name of the new view group then click OK 4 Click the Add Remove View Group window s Close button Note that no roles will have the right to use the newly added view group until you have specified such rights see ViewGroup Rights in Specifying the Rights of a Role for more information Also note that even when you have specified which roles should be able to use the newly added view group already connected access client users with the relevant roles must log out and log in again before they will be able to see the view group e Renaming a View Group Even though a view group is by default created each time you add a role view groups do not have to correspond to roles You are therefore able to rename each of your system s view groups if required no matter whether the view groups were created automatically when adding a role or whether you added them manually 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select Too s gt View Groups This will open the Add Remove View Group window 2 In th
281. he first time When first using a recording server you must authorize it 1 Right click the required recording server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Authorize Recording Server After a short moment the recording server will be authorized and ready for further configuration Ongoing database repair Appears when databases have become corrupted and the recording server is repairing them The repair process may take considerable time if the databases are large IMPORTANT During the database repair it is not possible to record video from cameras connected to the recording server in question Live video viewing will still be possible How can databases become corrupted Databases typically become corrupted if the recording server is shut down abruptly for example due to a power failure or similar See Protecting Databases from Corruption for useful information about how to avoid corrupt databases e Renaming a Recording Server 1 Expand the Servers folder in the Management Client s navigation pane and select the Recording Servers node Right click the required recording server listed in the overview pane From the menu that appears select Rename Recording Server Orip As an alternative to using the menu press the F2 key on your keyboard You are now able to overwrite the name of the recording server in the overview pane e Removing a Recording Server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 237 NetEVS 2 0
282. he pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s o False Users groups with the selected role will not be able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s o True Users groups with the selected role will be able to use the pan tilt and zoom features of the selected PTZ camera s e PTZ Priority When several users on a Surveillance system wish to control the same PTZ camera at the same time conflicts may occur This setting lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected PTZ camera s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from Very low to Very high Example You specify that the role Security Manager should have very high priority when using a PTZ camera whereas the role Security Assistant should have low priority when using the PTZ camera Now if a user with the role Security Manager and a user with the role Security Assistant want to control the PTZ camera at the same time the user with the role Security Manager will win the ability to control the camera On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note Users of Ocularis Client Lite are able to stop resume a patrolling PTZ camera s patrolling through a context menu in the Ocularis Client Lite view This PTZ feature is not regulated by PTZ priority e Allow activation of PTZ presets Determines whether users groups with the selected role are able to move the selected PTZ camera
283. he panes Do the following 1 Place your mouse pointer over a border 2 When the pointer becomes a double headed arrow drag the border in the required direction The size of the content inside the panes stays the same regardless of the size of the panes with one exception the larger the preview pane is the larger preview images and state information will appear e Moving Panes You can move a pane to a different position either as a floating pane or to a docked position by clicking on a pane s title bar and dragging it with the mouse The position and whether the pane becomes a floating pane or docked depend on where you release the mouse button See the topics below for more information The Management Client offers some layout elements that help you control the new position of the pane The layout elements are available when you drag a pane a Outer lay elements illustrated with green Inner layout elements illustrated with blue Center layout element illustrated with red For more information about how you use the layout elements when moving panes see the topics below 158 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Floating Panes TO move a pane to a floating pane drag the pane to its new position without using one of the layout elements P E Dragging a pane to a position without using a layout element Piper LEE i ki b o y H man Result A floating pane e Moving a Pane to a Dock
284. hen by clicking the number you will be able to see exactly which cameras are using a given archive When ready click Next 274 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 3 On the third step of the wizard specify the following e Database Retention hours Select the number of hours for which recordings should remain in cameras databases before they can be archived This is useful if you do not want your most recent recordings to be archived straight away even though archiving may be scheduled to take place before the specified number of hours Who determines the schedule You do On the wizard s next step you are going to specify the intervals with which the archiving process will be started Example If you specify 24 hours recordings must be at least a day old before they will be archived If archiving is scheduled to take place before the 24 hours have passed only recordings older than 24 hours will be archived Keep in mind however that the archive s scheduling may mean that recordings will be older than the specified number of hours before they are archived This may especially be the case if you specify an archiving schedule with long time spans between archiving e Archive Retention days Select the maximum number of days of recordings to store in the archive Example If you specify 20 days this will mean that recordings from a total of 20 days will be stored in the archive not necessarily
285. hgurshor fF Enable shin Fuchs narra Curl ies cre dschere path Edu eu chere Terrei Dipit resta dag every 10 e ia 00 00 and 23055 a h DB 1 hig Sacha 1 da 1 GE ninini Sdk Pah Begin Tra Era Tene mitn T n e an 1601 2007 111000 1601007 11953 Caluire 1601 2007 110000 1601 2007 Tosa TAa 16 01 2007 10 50 00 16 01 2007 10 59 53 CO Oia hence VEDA 1044 339 1601 0007 104383 e Ge Settings Gp info Recod E Archiving Y Everts Motion e Database Archiving Configuration The Database archiving information section in the upper part of the tab contains the following Enable archiving Only available if one or more archives have been created on the recording server Selecting box lets you enable archiving for the microphone in question If you do not use the Archive Wizard to specify otherwise archiving of recordings from the microphone will take place in the recording server s default archive Archive name Name of the archive selected for the recording server Archive path Path to the archive directory Schedule Archiving schedule i e how often archiving should take place Scheduling is defined for each of a recording server s archives and thus depends on the selected archive Retention Retention time for database in hours and archive in days and GB as specified when defining archives through the Archive Wizard e Using Archive Wizard to Select Archive for Microphone When archiving is
286. his type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to specify which state to set and on which devices Note This type of action requires that the devices to which the action will be linked each have at least one external output unit connected to an output port No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Sends a notification using a particular notification profile When selecting this type of action the Ru e Wizard will prompt you to select a notification profile and which devices to include images from Only one notification profile can be selected it is not possible to select several notification profiles tip Even though you are only able to select a single notification profile Keep in mind however that a single notification profile may contain several recipients Note This type of action requires that at least one notification profile has been set up Images will only be included if e mail notification is used and the Include images option has been enabled for the notification profile in question No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Generates an entry in the rule log When selecting this type of acti
287. hone 1 hal Role i able to palami the follwing onthe selected demos or device group Camera Lina View bee ded video s Rec OOE Visible Browse ideo Export video as AVI JPEG Export video in database oornat Gat sequence Simartaeanch ES Users amp Groups Device Ga PTZ 4 Speech EJ Ap lt gt Device tab with role rights for a selected device in this case a camera Note that you can also select a device group and specify role rights for the entire device group in one go e Camera Related Rights When specifying role rights for cameras the following rights are availab le Visible Determines whether the selected camera s will be visible in access clients View live Determines whether live viewing of video from the selected camera s will be possible in access clients Browse video Determines whether browsing of recorded video from the selected camera s will be possible in access clients Export video as AVI JPEG Determines whether the AVI and JPEG export feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in access clients Export video in database format Determines whether the database export feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in Ocularis Client Lite Get sequences Determines whether the Sequences feature can be used when browsing recorded video from the selected camera s in access clients
288. i e How to Edit Already Added Streams On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 215 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 1 On the Streams tab select the stream you want to edit 2 Make the required changes 3 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar How to Remove a Previously Added Stream 1 On the Streams tab select the unwanted stream 2 Click the De ete button 3 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar NAT Managing Public Addresses You define a recording server s public IP address on the Network tab To access the Network tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Network tab in the properties pane 216 Why Use a Public Address When an access client such as Ocularis Client Lite connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Access clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers When access clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers See also Managing Local IP Address Ranges When access clients connect from the internet the surveillance s
289. ically detected when you add the devices to your NetEVS system through the Management Client s Hardware Detection Wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use Read more about input management in Managing Inputs Managing Inputs You have two entry points for managing inputs e Inthe NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Devices and select Inputs Then in the overview pane expand the All Inputs folder This provides you with an excellent overview of your system s inputs and you can group inputs in device groups for easy management However enabling disabling of individual inputs can only be handled under recording servers see the following The text expanding will be displayed next to the inputs folder in this example the A Inputs folder while the Management Client expands the folder Devices pa All Inputs expanding Expanding the inputs folders in this example the A Inputs folder may take a few seconds because the Management Client does not load information about the inputs until the folder in question is expanded thus enabling faster navigation between the individual elements in the Management Client e Inthe NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Servers and select the Recording Server node then expand the required recording server in the overview pane and select the required input 150 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note Before you specify use
290. ices listed in overview pane e Assisted Hardware Detection 146 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 To use assisted hardware detection do the following 1 On the first step of the Hardware Detection Wizard select Assisted Hardware Detection and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard the wizard will ask you to enter information about the required hardware For each required device specify IP address port number if other than the default port 80 user name password and hardware driver Tip If you do not specify a user name and password the factory default user name and password for the device will automatically be added when you make your selection in the Hardware Driver column Remember to select the Include check box for each required device Grip Provided you have specified a valid user name and password hardware drivers can often be automatically detected Simply click the Auto Detect button If the driver is detected a check mark will appear in the second column If the driver cannot be detected a question mark 2 will appear in which case you should manually select the required driver Example For first device a driver could automatically be detected for second device a driver could not be auto matically detected and must be selected manually Tip For a preview image from a camera device in the list click the browser button to access the camera s default web page Yo
291. ied number of rows you will be able view the remaining rows on subsequent log pages Default preview framerate Lets you select which frame rate to use for the thumbnail camera images displayed in the preview pane Default is 1 frame per second Refreshing the Management Client layout by pressing F5 on your keyboard or selecting Action gt Refresh from the menu bar is required for a change to take effect Note that a high frame rate i e a high image quality in combination with a large number of thumbnail images in the preview pane may slow the system down You are able to limit the number of thumbnail images with the Max number of previews setting Max number of previews Lets you select the maximum number of thumbnail images displayed in the preview pane Default is 64 thumbnail images Refreshing the Management Client layout by pressing F5 on your keyboard or selecting Action gt Refresh from the menu bar is required for a change to take effect Note that a large number of thumbnail images in combination with a high frame rate i e a high image quality may slow the system down You are able to limit the frame rate used for the thumbnail images with the Default preview framerate setting Motion detection on when adding camera devices Lets you select whether motion detection should be enabled while cameras are being added to a recording server through the Hardware Detection Wizard Select check box to enable moti
292. ients Grid Features Show Grid When the Show grid check box is selected default the preview image will feature a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections The grid may help you when selecting exclude regions in the preview image The density of the grid is determined by the value selected in the Grid size list Showing the grid is not a requirement for selecting exclude regions even without the grid you are able to select exclude regions as described above Hiding the grid may provide a less obscured view of the preview image Grid Size The value selected in the Grid size list determines the density of the grid regardless whether the grid is shown or not Select between the values 8x8 i e a grid dividing the image into eight sections along the X axis and eight sections along the Y axis 16x16 or 32x32 With a grid of 8x8 the image will be divided into relatively few sections for you to select for exclude regions Each section will be relatively large you will not be able to define very detailed exclude regions With a grid size of 32x32 the image will be divided into relatively many sections for you to select for exclude regions Each section will be relatively small enabling you to define more detailed exclude regions Examples of 8x8 16x16 and 32x32 grids respectively On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 117 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual I 1 a l l yu eon Se
293. ifferent PTZ Patrolling Profiles for Day Night Ensures the following During daytime a PTZ camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile During nights the PTZ camera will patrol according to another patrolling profile This requires two near identical rules one for each patrolling profile When you have created the first rule you can easily make a copy of it and quickly create the second rule based on the copy Both rules are covered in this example e Pause PTZ Patrolling and Go to PTZ Preset on Input Ensures the following When a specific external input is activated a PTZ camera will pause its patrolling move to a specific preset position and remain at the preset position for a specific period of time after which it will resume patrolling Examples Basic Rules Use Higher Live Frame Rate on Motion Note The rule described in the following is an example only If wishing to base a real life rule on the example be prepared to substitute the example s device names and parameters with device names and parameters relevant to your system This rule ensures the following e When motion is detected on a specific camera NetEVS will use a different live frame rate than the camera s default live frame rate and return to using the default live frame rate when motion is no longer detected On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 333 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual In this example the camera has a default live frame rate of 10 frames
294. ification profiles To specify compression settings for AVI file generation do the following 1 Go to NetEVS Manager s menu bar and select Too s gt Options 2 In the Options window select the AVI Generation tab LST Options Es Geral Serra Logs Had Soma AV Genera Duron Event o Cancers palm Comper Condigure ieeja vies 5 10 atot Lompen gay so gt L Fe Narra ere Dala rate Help DE Cancel 3 Specify the following e Compressor Select the required codec compression decompression technology OTip If in doubt about which codec to select try using Indeo 5 10 if available This codec generally provides a good compromise between quality and file size Orip For some but not all codecs you are able to configure the codec by clicking the Configure button Configuration options are entirely codec specific Tip For some but not all codecs you are able to view detailed 76 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 information about version number etc by clicking the About button e Compression quality Not available for all codecs Use the slider to select the required degree of compression 0 100 to be performed by the codec O means no compression generally resulting in high image quality and large file size 100 means maximum compression generally resulting in low image quality and small file size If the slider is not
295. ify that your SMTP mail server settings are correct Speakers About Speakers On many devices you are able to attach external loudspeakers some devices even have built in speakers Devices speakers are automatically detected when you add the devices to your NetEVS system through the Management Client s Hardware Detection Wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use Speakers do not require separate licenses you can use as many speakers as required on your system You can use speakers completely independently of cameras On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 357 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Who is able to talk through speakers Users of Ocularis Client Lite can provided speakers are available and the users have the rights to use them click a button to talk through speakers Roles determine users right to talk through speakers You cannot talk through speakers from the Management Client What happens if two users want to speak at the same time Roles determine users right to talk through speakers As part of the roles definition you are able to specify a speaker priority from very high to very low If two users want to speak at the same time the user whose role has the highest priority will win the ability to speak If two users with the same role want to speak at the same time the first come first served principle applies Tip NetEVS comes with a default rule which ensures that audio feeds from all connecte
296. igurable events they are managed elsewhere See About Inputs and About Outputs for more information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 107 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Pipete F Configured E vent es Mahon Stated Hw E Genera babor Siong EPA Erind Tage Leticia Fii True Motion a inches i Prebedier hit Get deol 5 Freher Second 5 Enabled Ge Settings info Recod ls Persi ES Patoling ff fecha Everts Even when a camera supports hardware configurable events it is always your decision whether you want to use such events on your NetEVS system Therefore you simply add each hardware configurable event you want to be able to use on each camera e Adding a Hardware Configurable Event 1 Click the Add New button This will open the Se ect Driver Event window 2 In the Select Driver Event window select the required hardware configurable event AAN Event _ H Hoon Started TE Hobi Sieppi Habs Note You can only select one hardware configurable event at a time 3 Click OK The selected event will be added to the Events tab s list of configured events 4 Click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar Secas e Specifying Hardware Configurable Event Properties 108 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 For each hardware configurable event you have added you are able to specify properties The number of properties you are able to specify depends on the camer
297. iia d Ed 1 mlm bl ect e TEH es pl PAE i n bee You furthermore have the option of selecting whether the NetMatrix Monitor should be available just for you or for anyone using the computer If in doubt select Anyone When ready click Next Follow the next few simple steps in the installation wizard until you are asked to select the setup type that best suits your needs On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 fined hiria iiia d td ee Pa E a mf ara rd a oo o al DO w dir bhe bra n el y pe e If you want a shortcut to the NetMatrix Monitor placed on your desktop automatically keep Add shortcut to desktop selected e If you want the NetMatrix Monitor to run automatically each time the computer loads Windows keep Add NetMatrix Monitor to Startup group selected When ready click Next twice 6 Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation Configuring the NetMatrix Monitor The way you access the configuration window for the NetMatrix Monitor application differs depending on whether you configure the NetMatrix Monitor for the first time or you want to make changes to the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor e First Time Configuration To configure the NetMatrix Monitor application for the first time do the following 1 Double click the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window 2 In the Password and Retyp
298. ill add your new rule to the list of rules i PTZ Camera Daptime Patroling PTZ Camera Nighttime Patrolling SMTP Mail Server Outgoing SMTP Mail Server Settings You are able to specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server you are going to use with your NetEVS system Specifying these settings is a prerequisite for using rule triggered notification profiles to send out e mail notifications on events etc 1 Go to the NetEVS Manager s menu bar and select Too s gt Options 2 In the Options window select the Mail Server tab 356 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 j Options Es Geral Soma Logs HM Sewa Avi Denean Duron Event Had server tiras Senda era adidas Dugong mal SHTP serve name p _ Server bamer loge Hap CHE l Cancel 3 Specify the following e Sender e mail address Type the e mail address you want to appear as the sender of e mail notifications for all notification profiles Example sender organization org e Outgoing mail SMTP server name Type the name of the SMTP mail server which will be used for sending e mail notifications for all notification profiles Example mailserver organization org Furthermore if the SMTP mail server requires login select Server requires login and type the required user name and password 4 When ready click OK Tip When you add new notification profiles you will be able to send test e mails and thus ver
299. ill therefore work and event triggered recording will also work unless based on events related to the Management Server e Recording servers will store log data locally They will automatically send log data to the Management Server when the Management Server becomes available again e Access clients will not be able to log in Client access is authorized through the Management Server Without the Management Server clients will not be able to log in On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 413 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Already logged in access clients can remain logged in for up to an hour When clients log in they are authorized by the Management Server Technically the Management Server gives each client a token which allows the clients to communicate with recording servers for up to one hour Should the clients need to communicate with recording servers for longer than one hour the Management Server automatically renews the tokens When the Management Server is down however tokens cannot be renewed and the clients will lose their connections to recording servers when their tokens expire If you can get the new Management Server up and running within a hour there is a good chance that many of your users will not be affected No ability to configure the system Without the Management Server you will not be able to change system configuration through the Management Client We definitely recommend that you inform your users about the p
300. ime server preferably the same time server Note There should be no more than a 5 minutes difference between the time on the Management Server and on computers running the Management Client The following articles from Microsoft describe what to do in different situations e How to configure an authoritative time server in Windows Server 2003 e How to synchronize the time with the Windows Time service in Windows XP e Registry entries for the W32Time service If the above links do not work for you try searching www microsoft com for time server time service synchronize servers or similar On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 7 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 8 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Installation Installation Overview Or upgrading from a previous version of NetEVS make sure you read the upgrade information Your NetEVS installation process begins with the installation of the Management Server software e The Management Server is the center of your NetEVS installation It is typically installed on a dedicated server See Management Server Installation for further information Once the Management Server is installed you are able to install key components required by the Management Server e The Recording Server which is used for recording video feeds and for communicating with cameras and other devices The recording server is typically installed on one or mor
301. in hours and archive in days and GB as specified when defining archives through the Archive Wizard e Using Archive Wizard to Select Archive for Microphone When archiving is enabled for a microphone the microphone s recordings will by default be archived in the default archive of the recording server to which the microphone belongs If more than one archive has been created on the recording server you can use the Archive Wizard to archiving location for the microphone 1 Click the Archiving tab s Archive Wizard button to open the Database Archiving Configuration Wizard normally just referred to as the Archive Wizard When dealing with a microphone the wizard only offers one option Se ect archive for device Click Next to continue In the Archive Name column select the required archive You cannot select more than one archive for a microphone However if you later want to use another archive for the microphone you can simply run the wizard again and select another archive When ready click Next The microphone s archiving settings will be changed to reflect your selection A progress bar will indicate how the change progresses When ready the wizard will display a confirmation In case the selected archive could not be used the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem When ready click Finish On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 207 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e List of
302. in order to trigger actions Thus when a user defined event occurs a rule can trigger that one or more actions should take place on the NetEVS system Example When user defined event 37 occurs PTZ camera 224 should stop patrolling and go to preset position 18 Through roles you define which of your users should be able to trigger the user defined events see Specifying the Rights of a Role for more information 384 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 User defined events can be used in two ways simultaneously if required For Providing the Ability to Manually Trigger Events in Ocularis Client Lite In this case user defined events simply make it possible for end users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in Ocularis Client Lite Thus when a user defined event occurs because it is manually triggered by an Ocularis Client Lite user a rule can trigger that one or more actions should take place on the NetEVS system For Providing the Ability to Trigger Events through API In this case user defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance system Using user defined events this way requires that a separate API Application Program Interface a set of building blocks for creating or customizing software applications is used when triggering the user defined event Authentication through Active Directory is required for using user define events this way This ensures that even though the us
303. individual cameras in NetEVS Note In addition to NetEVS s motion detection some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such camera detected motion detection can also be used in NetEVS rules Such events are called Hardware Configurable as they do not work until configured on the camera hardware itself See Events dependent on hardware configuration in the following Occurs when motion is no longer detected in received video See also the notes in the description of the Motion Started event above Occurs when the audio signal on an audio enabled device is falling For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the device in question Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an audio unit connected The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when the state of an audio enabled device is changed regardless of which state the device is changed to Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an audio unit connected The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when the audio signal on an audio enabled device is rising For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising signal respectively refer to documentation for the device in question Note This type of event
304. indow s OK button You will be returned to the overview pane s Time Profiles list e Deleting a Time Profile On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 381 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 1 In the overview pane s Time Profiles list right click the required time profile and select Delete Time Profile Time Profiles cls z E Time Profiles Time profile 001 S Tine orofie 0031 Add New Time Profile CTRL N Edt Time Profile Fe Tip Instead of right clicking to select Delete Time Profile you may simply select the required time profile and press the DELETE key on your keyboard 2 You will be asked to confirm that you wish to delete the time profile If you are sure that you wish to delete the time profile click the Yes button 3 The time profile will be removed from the overview pane s Time Profiles list Trusted Servers Managing Trusted Servers Occasionally you have servers which should be able to communicate with NetEVS even though they are not directly part of the NetEVS surveillance system A typical example is a NetTransact server with which you want to use video from the NetEVS system NetTransact is a transaction management system typically used for loss prevention through video evidence combined with time linked POS or ATM transaction data You can specify such servers as trusted servers in the Management Client e Accessing Trusted Servers Configuration 1 In the NetEVS Manager s menu bar select
305. ing Server service to start What Happens when a Recording Server Becomes Available Again When a recording server becomes available again it will automatically take over from the failover server and recordings stored by the failover server will automatically be merged into the regular recording server s databases How long the merging process takes will depend on the amount of recordings to merge on network capacity etc Note During the merging process it will not be possible to browse recordings from the period during which the failover server took over d What if the failover server must take over from another recording server during the merging process In that case it will postpone the merging process with recording server A and take over from recording server B When recording server B becomes available again the failover server will take up the merging process with recording server A after which it will begin merging with recording server B Will We Lose Recordings A failover solution does not provide complete redundancy It is however a very reliable way of minimizing downtime Starting a failover server takes five seconds plus the time it takes for the failover server s Recording Server service to start During this period it will not be possible to store recordings neither will it be possible to view live video from affected cameras On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 When the regu
306. ing server this is where you create and manage the recording server s archives For more information see Archiving tab Recording Server Properties What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice See About Archiving for more information To access the Archiving tab select the required camera in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane Progperties FE Osses archera conhgurster Te Enable aching fechese names Dirdlithebych re dschere path Le Our hiur Tertii Dipp reste dap every 10 e ian 00 00 and 23055 Raipia DB 1 hours Aacha 1 da 1 GE Bec hese Wizard Path Diagn Tina Era Time T Duties VES 11 10 00 1601 2007 111953 Criadero he 16 01 2000 110000 16012007 1104539 Celtia 16 01 2007 10 50 00 16 01 2007 10 59 59 CO etch 16M 0 10443 1601007 14323 Ls Gh Settings Gh ro Aed E ducking q Everts A Motor 94 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Database Archiving Configuration Information The Database archiving information section in the upper part of the tab contains the following e Enable archiving Only available if one or more
307. ing database Pointing to the new location of the SQL Server select to use an existing database This will update the SQL connection string used by the Management Server and it will again be possible to access the database On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 33 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Upgrading Upgrading from a Previous Version OrThis information is only relevant if you are upgrading a previous installation of NetEVS The process of upgrading NetEVS involves removing all of its components except the Database Server The Database Server is one of the Management Server s components it contains the entire system configuration recording server configurations camera configurations rules etc As long as you do not remove the Database Server you will not need to reconfigure your surveillance system configuration in any way although you may of course want to configure some of the new features in the new version e Prerequisites e Have your Software License Code SLC ready The SLC will change when the software version number changes so you are likely to have received a new SLC when purchasing the new version e Have your temporary license lic file ready The license file will change when your SLC changes so you are likely to have received a new license file when purchasing the new version When you install the Management Server the wizard will ask you to specify your SLC Software License Code as well as the location of your lic
308. ing role rights for input devices the following rights are available e Visible Determines whether information about the selected input s will be visible to users of Ocularis Client Lite as well as users of NetCentral an add on product for providing complete overview of surveillance system status and alarms Output Related Rights When specifying role rights for output devices the following rights are available e Visible Determines whether the selected output s will be visible in Ocularis Client Lite If visible the output will be selectable from a list within Ocularis Client Lite e Activate output Determines whether the selected output s can be activated from Ocularis Client Lite Note Outputs are selected and activated within Ocularis Client Lite s Live mode Both rights thus require that the role has been granted the right to view Ocularis Client Lite in Live mode this right is granted as part of the application security rights Why are some check boxes filled with squares Square filled check boxes can only appear if you are specifying role rights for a device group in On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 which case they indicate that the right in question currently applies for some but not all devices within the device group Live E View five Recorded video E Browse video E Export video as JPEG E Export video a Al Square filled check boxes indicate that settings cu
309. ing rules The wizard takes you through all required steps You specify the use of a notification profile during the step on which you specify the rule s actions First Select actions bo perom Start recording _ Set live frame rate on lt devices gt Sel recoding frame rate on lt devices gt Start patoling on lt device pectic profil y on lt devices gt to lt prezel gt position e culput to lt state gt fo nolificabion bo lt prohle gt When selecting the action Send notification to lt profile gt you get the option of selecting the required notification profile You also get the option of selecting which cameras any recordings to be included in the notification profile s e mail notifications should come from send notification to profile Images from recording device Example only in the Rule Wizard you click the links to make your selections On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Keep in mind that recordings cannot be included in the notification profile s e mail notifications unless something is actually being recorded If still images or AVI video clips are required in the notification profile s e mail notifications you should therefore verify that the rule you are creating or another existing rule specifies that recording should take place The following example is from a rule which includes both a Start recording action and a Send notification to action Meat COR
310. ing servers e A Recording Server service which enables the failover server to act as a recording server while the regular recording server is unavailable This service is only started when required i e when the failover server should take over from the regular recording server Starting this service typically takes a couple of seconds but may take longer depending on local security settings etc A failover server must be able to communicate with all cameras of the recording server s from which it should be able to take over e Installing Failover Servers For information about installing failover servers see Failover Server Installation e Configuring Failover Servers in the Management Client On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 133 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 134 For information about configuring failover servers in the Management Client see Managing Failover Servers Once failover servers are configured you can assign them to recording servers on the Failover Tab How Does a Failover Server Know when to Take Over Failover servers poll i e regularly check the state of relevant recording servers every 0 5 seconds If a recording server does not reply within five seconds after it was polled the recording server is considered to be unavailable and the failover server will take over How Long Does it Take for a Failover Server to Take Over It will take five seconds plus the time it takes for the failover server s Record
311. ings in Ocularis Client Lite As long as the archived recordings are stored locally or on accessible network drives you can use Ocularis Client Lite s many features kinetic timeline browser search evidence export etc when browsing archived recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a cameras regular databases The fact that you are viewing archived recordings will be completely transparent Note Remember that individual user rights may prevent particular users from viewing recordings from particular cameras just as is the case when browsing recordings from cameras regular databases Backing Up Archived Recordings Many organizations want to back up their recordings using tape drives or similar Exactly how you do this is highly individual depending on the backup media used in your organization However the following is worth noting Back Up Archives Rather than Camera Databases Always create backups based on the content of archives not based on individual camera databases Creating backups based on the content of individual camera databases may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving times Tip You are able to view each recording server s archiving schedule as well as the time of the next scheduled archiving in each of a recording server s archives on the Archiving Tab On Net Surveillance Systems
312. installation admin where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server This will open the Management Server s web page If not accessing the web page on the Management Server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the Management Server 3 On the web page click the required video device drivers link On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 395 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Note Depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear after you click the link If such security warnings appear accept security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact button text depends on your browser version 4 Select required language and click OK This will open the Video Device Driver Setup Wizard which will guide you through the installation 5 On the wizard s first step click the Next button 6 On the wizard s second step an installation path is automatically suggested Simply click Next to continue 7 On the wizard s third step select Device drivers for NetEVS systems from the menu and click Next 8 The wizard is now ready to install the video device drivers Click the Install button to complete the installation of the video device drivers 9 When ready start the Recording Server service again e Removing Video Device Drivers For information about how
313. iod boxes Days Hours and Minutes Clicking the Time period boxes up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one day hour minute respectively e Specifying a Maximum Storage Size Limit By default the maximum size of a speaker s database is 5 GB To specify a different maximum database size limit select or type the required value in gigabytes in the Size box Orip The value in the Size box is shown with two decimals By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit This way you are able to specify a very specific maximum database size for example of 4 13 gigabytes IMPORTANT In order to prevent operating system failures due to insufficient disk space the oldest records in the database will automatically be deleted for all cameras microphones and speakers recording on the disk in question when less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk containing the database regardless of any time or size limits specified for the databases This will help ensure that at least 500 MB of disk space will be available for operating system use and by using archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the databases On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Database Configuration The Record tab s Database configuration section displays information about the database used for the speaker e Database Configu
314. ion and therefore is forced to discard some of the images Otip This rare event can be used for triggering actions that will help you avoid the problem e g for lowering the recording frame rate Occurs when feed overflow see description of the Feed Overflow Started event ends Occurs when a user of Ocularis Client Lite requests a live stream from a device Note The event occurs upon the request even if the client user s request subsequently turns out to be unsuccessful for example because the client user does not have the rights required for viewing the requested live feed or because the feed is for some reason stopped Occurs when an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is activated On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual Output Changed Output Deactivated Live Client Feed Terminated PTZ Manual Session Started PTZ Manual Session Stopped Recording Started Recording Stopped Settings Changed Settings NetEVS 2 0 Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when the state of an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is changed regardless of which state the external input unit is changed to Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when an exte
315. ion each data packet is sent from a single sender to a Single recipient a process known as unicasting With multicasting however it is possible to send a single data packet to multiple recipients within a group Multicasting can thus help save bandwidth Look at the following illustration of a very Simple network e When using unicasting black lines in example the source must transmit one data stream for each recipient e When using multicasting red lines in example however only a single data stream is required on each network segment Even on a very simple network like the one in our example multicasting uses up to three times less bandwidth than unicasting Multicasting is therefore an interesting option for streaming live video from recording servers to Ocularis Client Lite since video streams will not be duplicated on each network segment With multicasting you work with a clearly defined group of recipients based on options such as IP address ranges the ability to enable disable multicast for individual cameras the ability to define largest acceptable data packet size MTU the maximum number of routers a data packet must be forwarded between TTL etc Thus multicasting should not be confused with the much more primitive method broadcasting which would simply send data to everyone connected to the network even if the data is perhaps not relevant for everyone On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2
316. ion you want to share E MOFA On The center layout element Ortip Before you release the mouse the pane s new position is indicated by a gray area 2 Release the mouse to dock the pane at its current position OTip To view the content of the panes click the tabs on the bottom of the shared position Cara ORA Dragging a pane to the inner center layout element of another pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 161 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Result The pane shares the same position as the other pane e Splitting Shared Positions If you do not want that a pane shares a position with another pane do the following 1 Click the tab of the relevant pane and drag it to a new position The pane s new position can be a docked position or a floating pane 2 Release the mouse to place the pane at its current position e Using Auto Hide You can auto hide panes An auto hidden pane is available as a tab to the right or left of the previous position of the pane When you place your mouse pointer over the tab the content of the pane slides out As soon the cursor is positioned outside the pane it slides back To auto hide a pane click the Auto Hide pushpin in the title bar of the pane you want to auto hide The overview pane is hidden and available through a tab to the left Do the following to show and open an auto hidden pane again 1 Place your mouse pointer over the tab of the auto hidden pane to show the pa
317. ion available on the NetEVS software CD or from www onssi com On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 389 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual NetDVMS Servers Integrating NetDVMS Servers If your organization has NetDVMS installations you can integrate NetDVMS servers into your NetEVS solution You do this by adding the NetDVMS servers through the NetEVS Management Client Note Integration only works with NetDVMS servers running NetDVMS version 6 0 or later Integration is not possible if your NetEVS system uses IPv6 When added such NetDVMS servers will then send data and video to the NetEVS surveillance system You can compare added NetDVMS servers with recording servers among other things because video from the NetDVMS servers will be available for viewing in access clients However you cannot define cameras user rights scheduling or other settings for the NetDVMS installation or see previews of the cameras in NetEVS All necessary NetDVMS settings must be made in NetDVMS s Administrator application or other relevant NetDVMS applications See the NetDVMS documentation for more information For access client users it will be completely transparent whether feeds come from an NetDVMS server or from an NetEVS recording server The users have access to cameras depending on their roles defined in the NetEVS Management Client If a role has borrowed user rights from an added NetDVMS server users with that role have access to data from the NetDVMS s
318. ion i 115 Setup Select a web site on the IIS forthe NetEVS Server Description State Address Default Web Site Started localhost Details The web site is started and can be used for the installation Select one of the listed web sites and make sure the selected web site is started before clicking Next OTip You may find that only a single IIS web site the Default Web Site is On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 13 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual listed In that case simply make sure that the web site is started then click Next Towards the end of the wizard you will be asked to select a user account under which the Management Server service will run Service Loe On Setup Serma hidd log on as 5 The predefined moari G Tha encoun Paipai Cant n piri Acca deipio The Serre serace wal be started us thes moart le computer is mentes of a domain de socouri rust ether be Local Suben on a dobar bai iia You will be able to select either a particular user account in which case the service will use the specified user account to log in to the computer acting as Management Server or Local System in which case the service will run whenever the computer acting as Management Server is running OrTip If the computer acting as Management Server is a member of a domain you should either select Local System or make sure that you specify a user account which belongs to the domain in question e How to Sel
319. ipient and click OK Click the devices link in the initial rule description and select from which cameras you would like to send video to the NetMatrix recipient then click OK to confirm your selection Click Finish if the rule is complete or define if required additional actions and or a stop action See Managing Rules for more information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 187 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Microphones About Microphones On many devices you are able to attach external microphones some devices even have built in microphones Devices microphones are automatically detected when you add the devices to your NetEVS system through the Management Client s Hardware Detection Wizard regardless of which of the wizard s detection options you use Microphones do not require separate licenses you can use aS many microphones as required on your system You can use microphones completely independently of cameras Who is able to listen to audio recorded by microphones Users of Ocularis Client Lite can provided microphones are available and the users have the rights to use them listen to audio from microphones Roles determine users right to listen to microphones You cannot listen to microphones from the Management Client Tip NetEVS comes with a default rule which ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and speakers are automatically fed to the NetEVS system Like other rules the default rule can
320. ired rules see How to Create Typical Rules Events Overview When creating an event based rule in the Rule Wizard see About Rules and Managing Rules you are able to select between a number of different events Select an Event Ed a Everts nf A 9 Denet A Plugins Y Maton Started T Motion Stopped A Ha Lori able Fp cade Input Changed E epu Descireated T Hoton End event T Moson Stated event Guten 1 Communicators Ena Ti Conmeen Sarid T Canmi ston Slapped T Feed Overiow Started Feed Cverfiow Stopped me Select an Event dialog from the Rule Wizard In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they are e Related to plugins aX Plugin e Dependent on hardware configuration 2 Hard Contguable e Built into NetEVS itself But e Related to recording servers Recording Servers e User defined events Y User defined Each type of event is described in the following CST Description i Motion Started Occurs when NetEVS detects motion in video received from cameras Note This type of event requires that NetEVS s motion On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 319 NetEVS 2 0 Motion Stopped Audio Falling Audio Passing Audio Rising Images Received 320 User Manual detection is enabled for the cameras to which the event will be linked Exactly what constitutes motion depends on the motion detection settings specified for
321. irmation In case the selected archive could not be used the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem When ready click Finish e List of Performed Archivings for Speaker Each time archiving is performed for a speaker according to the scheduling defined for the selected archive the archived recordings are stored in separate subdirectories under the selected archive location Technically each performed archiving is thus stored individually although this fact will be completely transparent when browsing the archived recordings in access clients such as Ocularis Client Lite The fact that archived recordings are stored individually means that you are able to view a list of each performed archiving with exact timestamps information about the recordings included in each performed archiving Path Path to the archive directory Begin time Date and time of the oldest recording included in the performed archiving End time Date and time of the most recent recording included in the performed archiving On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 377 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Time Profiles Managing Time Profiles Time profiles are periods of time defined in the Management Client Time profiles can be used when creating rules in the Management Client for example you can create a rule which specifies that a certain action should take place within a certain time profile Time profiles are highly
322. is considered to be full when there is less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk In order to prevent operating system failures due to insufficient disk space the oldest records in the database will automatically be deleted for all cameras recording on the disk in question when less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk containing the database regardless of any time or size limits specified for the database This will help ensure that at least 500 MB of disk space will be available for operating system use Occurs if a database becomes corrupted in which case NetEVS will automatically attempt two different database repair methods a fast repair and a thorough repair Occurs when a storage area for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable see Database Storage Area Unavailable in the following On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 You can for example use the event to start recording if it has been stopped by a Database Storage Area Unavailable event see the following Database Occurs when a storage area for a recording server becomes Storage Area unavailable for example if the connection to a storage area Unavailable located on a network drive is lost When this is the case it will not be possible to store recordings You can use the event to for example stop recording and trigger a notification profile so an e mail notification is automatically sent to relevant peopl
323. is Client Lite Renaming a Role Note Renaming a role will not change the name of a view group based upon the role For information about renaming view groups see Managing View Groups 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and right click Roles 2 Right click required role in the overview pane and select Rename Role Tip Alternatively you may simply press F2 on your keyboard 3 In the dialog that opens change the name of the role Tip You are also able to change the description of the role if required 4 When ready click OK Deleting a Role Before deleting a role Keep in mind however that you are able to delete a role even when users and or groups have been assigned to the role It is therefore often a good idea to verify if any users groups are assigned to the role before deleting it e Verifying if Any Users Groups Are Assigned to a Role 294 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and right click Roles 2 Select the required role in the overview pane then select the Users and Groups tab in the properties pane Any users and or groups assigned to the role will be listed on the Users and Groups tab e How to Delete a Role Note Deleting a role will not delete a view group based upon the role For information about deleting view groups see Managing View Groups 1 In the NetEVS Manager s
324. is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server If not accessing the web page on the Management Server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the Management Server The default configuration provides end users with access to downloading Ocularis Client Lite The application will by default be available in a language version matching the language version of your NetEVS installation This content is displayed when the web page is accessed by entering the URL http Management Server address port installation where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server The Download Manager s configuration is represented in a tree structure The fact that only standard components are initially available and only in the same language version as the surveillance system itself helps reduce installation time and save space on the server There is simply no need to have a component or language version available on the server if nobody is going to use it You can however easily make more components and or languages available as required See Making New Components Available for more information Likewise you can hide or remove unwanted components and or languages see Hiding and Removing Compone
325. isplaying information about a recording server e Info Tab s Fields The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the recording server The name will be used whenever the recording server is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar danis Tip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the recording server The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the recording server s name in the overview pane A description is not compulsory 244 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar y a e Host name Non editable field displaying the recording server s host name e Web server URL Non editable field displaying the URL of the recording server s web server The web server is used for example for handling PTZ camera control commands and for handling browse and live requests from Ocularis Client Lite The URL will include the port number
326. isting archive If you want to re locate an archive you must first remove the archive from the recording server then create the archive from scratch at the required new location On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 277 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 1 On the first step of the Archive Wizard select Change existing archive on recording server and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the archive you want to change Make your selection by selecting the check box next to the name of the required archive You can only select a single archive at a time When ready click Next 3 Now you are able to change the following e Archive Name You are able to overwrite the archive name with a new name e Default You are able to select that the archive should be the recording server s default archive e the archive to which archiving will take place if no other archive has deliberately been specified for certain cameras Only one archive can be the default archive When ready click Next 4 Now you are able to change the following e Database Retention hours The number of hours for which recordings should remain in cameras databases before they can be archived e Archive Retention days Select the maximum number of days for which recordings should be stored in the archive IMPORTANT Note that this is one of two maximum size settings for the archive The Archive Retention GB setting specified in the neighboring
327. it and Windows Server 2003 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Enterprise 32 bit or 64 bit and Windows Vista Ultimate 32 bit or 64 bit Running as a 32 bit service application e Software DirectX 9 0 or newer 4 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Active Directory Optional NetEVS users are normally added from Active Directory although users can also be added without Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems it identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them If you wish to add users through the Active Directory service a server with Active Directory installed acting as domain controller must be available on your network Important Port Numbers NetEVS uses particular ports when communicating with other computers cameras etc What is a port A port is a logical endpoint for data traffic Networks use different ports for different types of data traffic Therefore it is sometimes but not always necessary to specify which port to use for particular data communication Most ports are used automatically based on the types of data included in the communication On TCP IP networks port numbers range from O to 65536 but only ports O to 1024 are reserved for particular purposes For example port 80 is used for HTTP traffic which is use
328. it is The rule description now indicates which camera will pause patrolling which preset position it will move to and how soon Mest Edk the rule descopbon cick an undelmed item Perform an action on input Activated from Back Door Sensor Pause patrolling on FLZ Camera and Mowe camera immediately lo position PT On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 10 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 4 of the wizard 11 On step 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would make the camera pause patrolling then move to the preset position and remain there indefinitely Based on the elements in our rule description we therefore must select a stop criterion Since our rule is triggered by an event the wizard automatically suggests that we base our stop action on an event as well In the rule description the wizard even suggests that the stop action is performed when input is deactivated on the back door sensor However we want something different so we select Perform stop action after a lt time gt First Select stop crena Pesform stop action on lt event 8 Petom stop action after a lt tinve gt In the rule description the wizard now prompts us to specify the required time Ac COR
329. ith Full Screen the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in full screen mode i e completely maximized without any title bar etc On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 405 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual o With Window the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in regular mode i e aS a scalable window with a title bar etc o With Hidden the NetMatrix Monitor window will load in hidden mode in which you will not see the window until there is video to display You will however still be able to access the window by clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen QOSH Da 10 3 Example only your notification area may have different content Depending on your On Connect settings see the following a hidden NetMatrix Monitor window can automatically be restored to previous size when a connect command is received e On Connect Lets you determine how the NetMatrix Monitor window should react when a connect command is received o Show Alert If selected this setting will show a small alert box in the bottom right corner of your screen when a connect command is received The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds o Show Window If selected this setting will automatically restore a NetMatrix Monitor window in hidden mode to previous size when a connect command is received e On Disconnect Lets you determine how the NetM
330. itor Window Depending on configuration the NetMatrix Monitor window may appear on your screen automatically If the NetMatrix Monitor application is not running you can start it by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop You may also find that the NetMatrix Monitor application is running but in hidden mode When the NetMatrix Monitor application runs in hidden mode you will not see the NetMatrix Monitor window until there are images to display You will however still be able to access the window by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen QOSH DI 10 Example only your notification area may have different content 1x1 and 2x2 View Depending on configuration your NetMatrix Monitor window will display either a 1x1 ora 2x2 view On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 407 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual With 1x1 the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying video feeds from a single camera at a time With 2x2 the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of showing video feeds from up to four cameras at a time If using 2x2 the video feeds will be inserted in top left to bottom right order according to a first in first out principle Video feeds will remain in the position in which they were loaded when all four positions are used any new video feeds will replace the ol
331. ix Recipients ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 MIGVODMONGS arnes 188 ADOUE MICOPNAON OS aa 188 Managing MICKFODNONES tus iicodS 188 How Does PrepuUrrerinG WORK arar 192 Enabling and Disabling PrebUuffering cccccecccssccsseneeeeeetsecuuesnntteesessagaugs 192 Specifying PrepuUrlerSiZe ccc sfawvrivdwiiwere edinatdewei pide Ea a sees otae ees 192 Using Prebuffering in RUNES iii 193 Database Management 198 aE OA RN 201 NetEVS 2 0 NetEVS 2 0 Table of Contents SENOS odian cuado iaa danos 202 RECO IN AA E ha eens 203 HOW Does Prebuffenng Work 203 Enabling and Disabling PreDuffering ccccceccccsccnseneeeeeettecsanenntteessssagaugs 204 SPECI YING PFEDUIEl SILO isis cepa ias 204 Using Prebuffering m RUIES isis a cebo 204 AFC DAA 206 EVGINICS its 208 MUI CIS TA AAA 210 ADOUE MUIMCASHING sirosis AAN T A 210 Managing MUItCIS SUNO ana ANTA AAAA 211 MUIESte AM Ie 214 ADOUE MUI SST a Mid a 214 Managing Multsstreamind serias id eeaeeaies 214 NAT risa 216 Managing PUDIICAGOTESSES imanir ani is 216 Managing Local IP Address Ranges ccssssecceeeceecccnsneeeeeettecuunsnetteessssaauaes 217 Notification Promes EMail ao la o 219 Managing Notification Pro MIS siii oa 219 Outgoing SMTP Mal Servera aia 219 AVIV COMPRESSION iran a ia 219 A O 223 Opos DIJO sra ARAS SA AER 223 QUIDU Comicos cti coincidir toba 225 ADOUMOULDULS urraca danita nada diicids 225 Mana Cling OULDUUS aida tae e e de it as El 226 Defining
332. izard 6 On step 2 of the wizard specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply In this example we simply want the rule to apply whenever motion is detected on Camera 1 regardless of time When creating event based rules it is possible to bypass the time conditions we therefore want to skip step 2 entirely 336 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 7 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 3 of the wizard 8 On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform gt In this example we want to set a specific live frame rate We therefore select the action Set live frame rate on lt devices gt First Select achons to perom L Stan recoding v Set live fame rate on lt devices gt Ca a a a ee aay 9 Based on the selection of actions the wizard automatically extends the rule description in the lower part of the wizard window In this example Based on our selection Set live frame rate on lt devices gt the wizard automatically suggests a rule description in which the frame rate should be set on the device on which event occurred The wizard furthermore prompts us to specify the required number of frames per second Next Edt the mle desenpiion click an underined fem Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set live frame rate on the device on which event occurrec to frames per second To specify the required number o
333. izard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 327 NetEVS 2 0 Set recording frame rate on lt devices gt Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt 328 User Manual Restore default live frame rate Without this stop action the default frame rate would potentially never be restored You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Sets a particular frame rate to be used when saving recorded video from the selected cameras in the database instead of the cameras default recording frame rate When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to specify which recording frame rate to set and on which cameras Note Specifying recording frame rate is only possible for MJPEG a video codec technology for compressing and decompressing data with which each frame is separately compressed into a JPEG image This type of action also requires that recording has been enabled on the cameras to which the action will be linked You enable recording for a camera on the Record tab The maximum frame rate you will be able to specify will depend on the camera types in question and on their selected image resolution Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent s
334. ize box is shown with two decimals By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit This way you are able to specify a very specific maximum database size for example of 4 13 gigabytes IMPORTANT In order to prevent operating system failures due to insufficient disk space the oldest records in the database will automatically be deleted for all cameras microphones and speakers recording on the disk in question when less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk containing the database regardless of any time or size limits specified for the databases This will help ensure that at least 500 MB of disk space will be available for operating system use and by using archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the databases Database Configuration On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 193 NetEVS 2 0 194 User Manual The Record tab s Database configuration section displays information about the database used for the microphone e Database Configuration Section s Fields The Database Configuration section contains the following fields e Database Name Non editable field displaying the name of the database used for the microphone e Database Path Non editable field displaying the path to the database used for the microphone e Used Space Non editable field displaying the current size of the database for the microphone e
335. ize of the database allowing for the fact that it may grow plus 500 MB If sufficient free space is not available at the new storage drive you risk data being deleted The wizard described in the following helps you determine database and storage area sizes OTip A recording server s storage areas can be managed through the Database Configuration Wizard when the wizard is opened while working with a recording server see Recording Server Database Management To move the database of the selected camera microphone or speaker do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Move database for device and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the required storage area Device Name Used Storage Mame Free Path Include media data Camera 3 0 15 GB Local Default 33 00 GB C MeciaD stabase Local Defauk OurOiher5torage sea A Selecting required storage area note that the Include media data box is selected by default Make absolutely sure that the new storage area has enough free space to accommodate the database Compare the Used column which displays the current size of the database with the Free column which displays the current amount of free space in the destination storage area See also the IMPORTANT note in the previous Then make sure the required database is selected in the Include media data column if check box is not selected only the database
336. l Session Started PTZ Manual Session Stopped NetEVS 2 0 Occurs when a user of Ocularis Client Lite requests a live stream from a device Note The event occurs upon the request even if the client user s request subsequently turns out to be unsuccessful for example because the client user does not have the rights required for viewing the requested live feed or because the feed is for some reason stopped Occurs when an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is activated Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when the state of an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is changed regardless of which state the external input unit is changed to Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when an external output unit connected to an output port on a device is deactivated Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when a user of Ocularis Client Lite no longer requests a live stream from a device Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is started on a camera Note This type of event requires
337. lace on a per rule basis each rule is validated in isolation It is currently not possible to validate rules against each other for example in order to see whether one rule conflicts with another rule not even if using the Validate All Rules feature Furthermore it is not possible to validate whether configuration of prerequisites outside the rule itself may prevent the rule from working For example a rule specifying that recording should take place when motion is detected by a particular camera will validate OK if the elements in the rule itself are correct even though motion detection which is enabled on a camera level not through rules has not been enabled for the camera in question To validate all rules in one go do the following in the Management Client 1 In the overview pane right click the rule you wish to validate and select Validate All Rules My First Rule EL AddNew Rule CTRL N ee Edit Rule Ek Delete Rule DELETE Copy FRUE EJ validate Rule 7 validate Al Rules Refresh FS ar 2 A simple dialog will inform you whether the rule validated or not If one or more rules did not validate the dialog will list the names of affected rules es All rules validated JL 318 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Rules that did not validate My First rule Tip To view step by step descriptions of how to create typically requ
338. lance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 For the camera s database you are able to specify a maximum time limit e g one day as well as a maximum database size limit e g two gigabytes Whichever of the two limits is reached first will apply e Specifying a Maximum Storage Time Limit To specify a maximum time limit select or type the required values in the Time period boxes Days Hours and Minutes Clicking the Time period boxes up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one day hour minute respectively e Specifying a Maximum Storage Size Limit By default the maximum size of a camera s database is 5 GB To specify a different maximum database size limit select or type the required value in gigabytes in the Size box Orip The value in the Size box is shown with two decimals By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit This way you are able to specify a very specific maximum database size for example of 4 13 gigabytes IMPORTANT In order to prevent operating system failures due to insufficient disk space the oldest records in the database will automatically be deleted for all cameras microphones and speakers recording on the disk in question when less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk containing the database regardless of any time or size limits specified for the databases This will help ensure that at least
339. lar circumstances will not work if recording is disabled for the camera in question Recording Settings The Record tab s Recording settings specify the required recording frame rate for the camera as well as any prebuffering settings Recording Frame Rate Note Specifying recording frame rate is only possible for MJPEG a video codec technology for compressing and decompressing data with which each frame is separately compressed into a JPEG image Select or type the required recording frame rate in FPS Frames Per Second in the Recording frame rate box Clicking the Recording frame rate box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one FPS On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 OrTip If you click inside the Recording frame rate box two decimals will be added to the value By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit This way you are able to specify a very specific recording frame rate average over time for example of 20 15 FPS Recording frame rate MIPEG 20 75 Ale FPS Specifying a specific recording frame rate Prebuffering Prebuffering is essentially the ability to save video in the camera s database before the initial boundaries of a recording Use of prebuffering can be highly advantageous It allows you to save video from before the events or times used to start recordings If for exam
340. lar recording server becomes available again the Failover Server service will make sure that the recording server is ready to store recordings again Only then is the responsibility for storing recordings handed back to the regular recording server Thus loss of recordings at this stage of the process is negligible e Is there a Failover Solution for Failover Servers Setting up one failover server as backup for another failover server is not necessary This is because you do not allocate particular failover servers to take over from a regular recording server rather you allocate failover groups A failover group must contain at least one failover server but you can add as many failover servers as required to a failover group Provided a failover group contains more than one failover server there will be more than one failover server capable of taking over from the regular recording server For more information about configuring failover groups see Managing Failover Servers For more information about selecting the failover groups you require for a recording server see the description of the Management Client s Failover Tab e Will Archiving Work while a Failover Server Has Taken Over Any archiving will work even when a failover server has taken over from a regular recording server provided the archiving destination is on a network location which is accessible by the failover server If the archiving destination is at an inaccessib
341. ld displaying the unit on which the output can be found on the hardware For hardware capable of having more than one output unit attached the unit number will typically indicate the number of the output port to which the output is attached For hardware with for example four output ports the numbers will typically range from 0 to 3 Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit key output settings such as active output state output trigger time etc for a selected output or for all outputs within a selected device group However if the device group contains 400 cameras or more the Settings tab will not be available for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Note The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the drivers for the cameras in question and is thus likely to vary depending on the output selected Note Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time for example max five seconds Refer to the documentation for the device in question for exact information The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change values Do the following to change a property 1 Select the row with the property you want to change 2 Click the button to the right of the properties column 3
342. le 3 In the list select the required transition On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 C Initial Transition ete Canned Foods Section 0 Canned Foods Section gt Dairy Products Section o Gai E il i 5 E sE ll TF ES a Frozen Pdsds Secton CU Frozen Foods Section gt 4 Specify the estimated transition time in number of seconds in the Expected time secs field Expected time secs i fe 5 Use the Speed slider to specify the required transition speed When the slider is in its rightmost position the camera will move with its default speed The more you move the slider to the left the slower the camera will move during the selected transition Orip A number indicating the exact speed is displayed near the top right corner of the slider When required the number from 0 0001 very slow to 1 0000 default speed allows you to define exactly the same custom speed across transitions 6 In the Plugins to disable list specify any plugins you want to disable during the selected transition By default the plugin used for motion detection on the camera MotionDetectionPlugin is disabled in order to avoid irrelevant motion being detected during transition To add a plugin to the list click the Add button and select the required plugin This requires that one or more other plugins are available and that they can be disabled To remove a plugin from the list for example if you d
343. le itself are correct even though motion detection which is enabled on a camera level not through rules has not been enabled for the camera in question To validate an individual rule do the following in the Management Client 1 In the overview pane right click the rule you wish to validate and select Validate Rule Rules cs E Aulas My First Rule 7 MEE A Oy tl AAA od a el EX Add New Rule CTRL N Ee Edit Rule RR Delete Rule DELETE Ta Copy Rule Refresh FS C 2 A simple dialog will inform you whether the rule validated or not Rule validated i y Rule did not validate On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 317 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Validating All Rules In One Go You are able to validate the content of all rules in one go why would I need to validate the content of rules When you create a rule the Rules Wizard ensures that all of the rule s elements make sense However when a rule has existed for some time one or more of the rule s elements may have been affected by other configuration and the rule may no longer work For example if a rule is triggered by a particular time profile the rule will not work if the time profile in question has subsequently been deleted Such unintended effects of configuration may be hard to keep an overview of rule validation helps you keep track of which rules have been affected IMPORTANT Validation takes p
344. le location such as on the unavailable recording server itself or on an unavailable network drive archiving will not work as long as the destination is unavailable e Fatlover Related Events NetEVS features two failover related events Failover Started and Failover Stopped which you can use when creating rules The two events are further described in the Events Overview Managing Failover Servers A failover server is a spare recording server which can take over in case a regular recording server becomes unavailable A failover server is therefore always installed on a separate computer e Adding and Grouping Failover Servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 135 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 136 Failover servers are installed through an installation wizard just like regular recording servers see Failover Server Installation for more information Overview of Failover Servers in NetEVS Manager Once failover servers are installed they become visible in the Management Client NetEVS Manager In the navigation pane select Servers then Failover Servers and view a list of installed failover servers in the overview pane Tip If a failover server does not become visible in the Management Client verify that the failover server has been configured with the correct IP address hostname of the Management Server Also verify that the user account under which the Failover Server service runs has access to your NetEVS system with administr
345. lect the Multicast tab in the properties pane Multicasting is only possible for live streams not for recorded video audio Note The successful implementation of multicasting also requires that your network equipment switches etc has been set up to relay multicast data packets to the required group of recipients only If not multicasting may not be different from broadcasting which can significantly slow down network communication See also About Multicasting On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 249 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Pi nga e Mukan re corhgurstor Eraba rra Bee NA tn address hom Geis nge i aged lo ney mias otra that aoe glarhed oni the esconding pene IP sckchess Sart 201 0 End 201 0 Fost Sant EXI End 7o00 Source IP address for all m tica crear 00100 Pal D000 Wise defaul miia IP Une dela interlace Osean cps HTU 1500 TIL 12 Y rio re Setting ig Storage ES Acheng t F ilire Migticart aT Haak e Enabling Multicasting On the Multicast tab select the Enable multicast check box If the entire IP address range for multicast see the following is already in use on one or more other recording servers you cannot enable multicasting on further recording servers without freeing up some multicasting IP addresses first e Address Range In this section you specify the range from which you want to assign addresses for multicast streams from the selected recording server Access clients will
346. led a Output ts disabled A disabled output cannot be activated automatically through a rule it must be enabled manually in the Management Client A disabled output will not be able to communicate with the recording server Output requires attention Status unknown Defining Output Related Rules To be able to automatically activate an output or trigger an event activated by an output you must after you have enabled an output include the output in a rule For example you may create a rule specifying that a siren should sound if motion is detected on a particular camera or you may create a rule specifying that a camera should start recording if a siren sounds For the following examples to be useful to you you should have a general knowledge about how to manage rules See also About Rules for an introduction to rules or How to Create Typical Rules for other step by step descriptions of how to create rules e Defining a Rule that Activates Deactivates an Output To define a rule that activates or deactivates an output do the following 230 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual 8 NetEVS 2 0 Start the Rule Wizard and in step 1 select a rule type and if necessary a condition in step 2 In Rule Wizard s step 3 Step 3 Actions select the Set device output to lt state gt action If you like the output to be activated deactivated immediately skip this step If you do not want to activate or deactivate the ou
347. let you specify and edit which devices are members of a device group e Delete Device Group lets you delete an existing device group e Rename Device Group lets you change the name of an existing device group e Go To Hardware lets you easily see the properties and a preview of the selected device See Managing Recording Servers for more information e Rules The Action menu features seven commands concerning rules e Add New Rule lets you create a new rule e Edit Rule lets you edit an existing rule e Delete Rule lets you delete a rule e Rename Rule lets you rename a rule e Copy Rule lets you copy a rule so you can re use the content of the rule e Validate Rule lets you validate the content of an individual rule e Validate All Rules lets you validate the content of all existing rules e Time Profiles The Action menu features four commands concerning time profiles e Add New Time Profile lets you create a new time profile e Edit Time Profile lets you edit an existing time profile e Delete Time Profile lets you delete a time profile e Rename Time Profile lets you rename an existing time profile 58 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Notification Profiles The Action menu features four commands concerning notification profiles e Add New Notification Profile lets you create a new notification profile for instance for sending out notification e mails if certain
348. lient Lite a view group is presented as an expandable folder from which users can select the view they want to see e The view group will by default only be available to users groups who have been assigned to the role in question You are able to change this see View Group Security Rights in Specifying the Rights of a Role e The view group will by default carry the role s name Example If you create a role with the name Building A Security Staff it will by default appear in access clients as a view group called Building A Security Staff You are able to change the name so the view group has another name than the role see Managing View Groups for more information e You are able to create additional view groups and to delete view groups which you do not want to use See Managing View Groups for more information e How to Add a Role 1 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and right click Roles 2 Select Add New Role This will open the Add New Role dialog 3 Inthe Add New Role dialog type a name and description of the new role Add Hew Rote EJ Hane Bud Senai Sial Dener Genai tai r Buddir y A on 224 High 4 Then click OK 4 The new role is added to the Roles list in the overview pane By default a new role does not have any users groups or rights associated with it On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 283 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual You are now able to assign users groups to the role a
349. lled select one of the following solutions e Solution 1 Remove NetDVMS 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Add or Remove Programs 3 In the Add or Remove Programs window select NetDVMS click the Change Remove button and then OK e Solution 2 Set NetDVMS services to manual startup This solution lets you start the recording server without having to stop the NetDVMS services every time 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Administrative Tools 3 Inthe Administrative Tools window double click Services On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 31 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 4 In the Services window repeat steps a c in the following for these items ImageImportService ImageServer LogCheckService Recording Server a Double click the item b In the lt item gt Properties window click Stop and then set Startup type to Manual c Click Close to close the window e Issue Windows Firewall Prevents Login to Management Server This is an issue only on Windows XP If Windows Firewall is on it may not be possible to log in to the Management Server To verify whether Windows Firewall is on or off 1 From Windows Start menu select Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Windows Firewall 3 On the Windows Firewall dialog s General tab verify whether Windows Firewall is On or Off If Windows Firewall i
350. log pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual E NetEVS 2 0 lets you move one step towards the log page containing the most recent log entries indicates which page you are currently viewing e g page 1 of 171 By clicking the button you are able specify a page number and go straight to that page lets you move one step towards the log page containing the oldest log entries e Searching the Audit Log To search the Audit Log use the Search criteria box in the top part of the log pane 1 Alert Log Specify your search criteria by selecting the required user name location etc from the lists hip You can combine selections or make no selection in certain lists as required The more search criteria you combine the less search results you will typically get Click the Refresh button to make the log page reflect your search criteria Tip To clear your search criteria and return to viewing all of the log s content click the Clear button The Alert Log records rule triggered alerts e Viewing the Alert Log To view the Alert Log expand the Management Server Logs item in the Management Client s navigation pane then select Alert Log e Alert Log Content Each row in the Alert Log represents a log entry Each row contains the following information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 177 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 178 e Level Displays an icon indicating the level of the log entry
351. lticasting settings for the selected recording server multicasting will not work until you enable it for required cameras Select the required recording server in the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane select the required camera in the overview pane then select Enable live multicast on the Client tab in the properties pane Repeat for all required cameras under the recording server in question On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 251 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Network Tab You define a recording server s public IP address on the Network tab To access the Network tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Network tab in the properties pane 252 Why Use a Public Address When an access client such as Ocularis Client Lite connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Access clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers e When access clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers See also Managing Local IP Address Ranges e When access clients connect from the internet the surveillance s
352. m e Specifying Which Devices to Include in a Device Group 1 In the overview pane s device list right click the required device group folder 2 Select Edit Device Group Members The Select Group Members window will appear 3 In the Select Group Members window select either e The Device Groups tab which lists devices based on existing device groups including the default A Cameras group iTip A device can be a member of more than one device group e The Recording Servers tab which lists devices based on which recording servers the devices belong on 4 Select the devices you wish to include and click the Add button This will copy the selected devices to the Selected box On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 121 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Select Group Members Production Area Cameras E Device Groups Recorder Selected Sd Faced Sere FE Cersa 1 on 505 09 HPD Camera 10 10 50 7 2 H Preconding Serves 1 Pap Canha Tors dogs 11M Corvera O 1O S074 a Camera 1 om deat 209 FA Carasa 10m Boag 2012 PL Loe 1001051 01 Tp Camera 1 on Asis 203 Fp Cares 1 on 0005 2330 Camera 10 105059 Comers 1 onir MA Carrera mi 6551 211 Tp Camera 1 onix 212 Camera 1 omar 233 Th Camera 1 on Asa P33 Tp Camera 1 om 6005 07 Carrer 1 de Boot Os Orip You may also double click a device to copy it from one box to the other or you may simply drag devices between the two boxes GTip To select several devices in
353. m and added recording servers and cameras through the Management Client the surveillance system runs on temporary licenses which need to be activated before a certain period ends This is the so called grace day period When the new surveillance system is working we recommend that you activate your licenses before you make the final adjustments The reason is that you must activate your licenses before the grace day period expires since all recording servers and cameras for which no licenses have been activated will not be able to send data to the surveillance system if the grace day period is expired e Where Can I See How Many Grace Days Are Left You can see how many grace days are left before you will have to activate your license if you expand Basics in NetEVS Manager s navigation pane and select License Information Here you can also see how many licenses you have purchased and used or if you need to get more licenses so all added cameras can deliver data to NetEVS When you add a new camera for which you have a license you are granted a new full grace day period for the camera in question from the date you added the camera Therefore the end date of the grace day period displayed on the License information page is for the first added but not activated camera e Which Devices Require a License You need licenses for the number device channel typically cameras but it could also be dedicated input out boxes you want to run on th
354. m Storage Size Limit By default the maximum size of a speaker s database is 5 GB To specify a different maximum database size limit select or type the required value in gigabytes in the Size box Orip The value in the Size box is shown with two decimals By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit This way you are able to specify a very specific maximum database size for example of 4 13 gigabytes IMPORTANT In order to prevent operating system failures due to insufficient disk space the oldest records in the database will automatically be deleted for all cameras microphones and speakers recording on the disk in question when less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk containing the database regardless of any time or size limits specified for the databases This will help ensure that at least 500 MB of disk space will be available for operating system use and by using archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the databases e Database Configuration The Record tab s Database configuration section displays information about the database used for the speaker e Database Configuration Section s Fields The Database Configuration section contains the following fields e Database Name Non editable field displaying the name of the database used for the speaker e Database Path Non editable field displaying the pa
355. mc a Y BL Disfabcr E ort Bye eos Back hr El cere Ce epee i Po de fe n oe A LA ede yea were oa cue hed Erie pp cir at balla El or Be EAN ee ae Paar HE If you wish to delete an existing rule do the following 1 In the overview pane right click the rule you wish to delete and select Delete Rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 315 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual a Vo E E Rules l z biy First Rule T Et Add New Rule lt CTRIL HN Edit Rule DELETE Validate Rule Validate All Fules Refresh F5 Orip Instead of right clicking to select Delete Rule you may simply press the DELETE key on your keyboard 2 You will be asked to confirm that you wish to delete the rule If you are sure that you wish to delete the rule click the Yes button 3 The rule will be removed from the overview pane s Rules list e Renaming a Rule There are two ways of renaming a rule With the Rules Wizard or in the Rule Information pane To rename a rule using the Rules Wizard do the following 1 In the overview pane right click the required rule and select Edit Rule This will open the selected rule in the Rules Wizard 2 In the wizard s Name field edit the name as required 3 Click the wizard s Finish button To rename a rule in the properties pane do the following 4 In the overview pane select the required rule Information about the rule will be displayed in the properties pane
356. me time server Note There should be no more than a 5 minutes difference between the time on the Management Server and on computers running the Management Client The following articles from Microsoft describe what to do in different situations e How to configure an authoritative time server in Windows Server 2003 e How to synchronize the time with the Windows Time service in Windows XP e Registry entries for the W32Time service If the above links do not work for you try searching www microsoft com for time server time service synchronize servers or similar Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Client Lite provides remote users with extremely feature rich access to the surveillance system Lab View Example of Ocularis Client Lite in this case displaying live video from 4 cameras Ocularis Client Lite must be installed locally on the remote user s computer e Installing Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Client Lite can be installed in two ways o Download and Install Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server o Install Ocularis Client Lite from the NetEVS software CD 398 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Removing Ocularis Client Lite See Removing Ocularis Client Lite Where can I find more information about Ocularis Client Lite Once installed Ocularis Client Lite has its own built in help system Alternatively refer to the Ocularis Client Lite User s Manual available on the NetEVS s
357. mely settings B and C No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Makes video from the selected cameras appear on a computer capable of displaying NetMatrix triggered video i e a computer on which either Ocularis Client Lite or the NetMatrix Monitor application is installed When you select this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select a NetMatrix recipient and one or more devices from which to display video on the selected NetMatrix recipient This type of action lets you select only a single NetMatrix recipient at a time If you want to make video from the selected devices appear on more than one NetMatrix recipient you should create a rule for each required NetMatrix recipient Tip By right clicking a rule in the Rules list you are able to copy and re use the content of rules This way you can avoid having to create near identical rules from scratch Note As part of the configuration on the NetMatrix recipients themselves users must specify the port number and password required for the NetMatrix communication Make sure that the users have access to this information The users must typically also define the IP addresses of allowed hosts e hosts from which commands regarding display of NetMatrix triggered video will be accepted In that case the users mu
358. mera 2 Click the Edit button This will open the Edit Preset window Example only features are camera dependent 3 The Edit Preset window displays a preview image from the preset position in question use the navigation buttons and or sliders to change the preset position as required 4 Change the name number and description of the preset position as required OTip If using a name make sure it is descriptive the name of the preset position may later be used in situations where you will not have access to a preview image from the preset position e g when using the preset in a rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 5 Click OK e Removing a Preset Position To remove a preset position defined in NetEVS presets imported from a device Should be removed on the device itself do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera 2 Click the Remove button 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected preset Verify that you are indeed removing the correct preset then click Yes 4 The preset is removed from the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera e Testing a Preset Position 1 Select the required preset position in the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the camera 2 Click the Test button 3 The Presets
359. mera databases may cause sharing violations or other malfunctions When scheduling a backup make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving times Tip You are able to view each recording server s archiving schedule as well as the time of the next scheduled archiving in each of a recording server s archives on the Archiving Tab Knowing Archive Structure Lets You Target Backups When recordings are archived they are stored in a certain sub directory structure within the archive During all regular use of your NetEVS system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Ocularis Client Lite regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not Knowing the sub directory structure is thus primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings See Archive Structure in the following for more information Viewing Backed Up Archives If you need to view your backed up recordings you cannot view them directly from the backup media Instead copy the backed up archiving directories into their original place in your NetEVS system s archiving directory structure This way you will able to use all of Ocularis Client Lite s features kinetic timeline browser search evidence export etc when browsing the recordings e Archive Structure When recordings are archi
360. motion detection Sensitivity 4 Motion 4 Process image every ms Y Keyframes only MPEG V Optimized detection E Use exclude regions 16x 16 Show grid Clear Show regions E Info 73 Settings Fj Streams Record E Archiving Presets EY Pal lt JL gt Camera properties Motion tab with red deflection on the motion indication bar Enabling and Disabling Motion Detection Motion detection is enabled by default To enable disable motion detection for a camera select clear the Motion tab s Enable motion detection check box Note When motion detection is disabled for a camera any motion detection related rules for the camera will not work Motion Detection Settings You are able to specify settings relating to the amount of change required in a camera s video in order for the change to be regarded as motion You are also able to specify intervals between motion detection analysis any areas of an image in which motion should be ignored etc e Sensitivity Slider The Sensitivity slider determines how much each pixel in the camera s images must change before it is regarded as motion Drag the slider to the left for a higher sensitivity level and to the right for a lower sensitivity level The higher the sensitivity level the less change will be allowed in each pixel before it is regarded as motion The ower the sensitivity level the more change in each pixel will be allowed before it is rega
361. n e 1P Baddest onga tact F ideas 10710411 End IP didas 101050 3 se Lisa TOF po rra Perla barr ori por rurber il e puhara User mama Paso Ad F i Delmi EI wi na E Go Ge Example IP address range and additional user name and password defined When ready click OK to return to the wizard e Adding an IP Address Range To add a new IP address range click the Add button This will open the Add IP Range to Scan dialog which lets you edit the IP address range by changing the beginning and end of the IP address range as required Tip The beginning and end IP address may be identical allowing you to only scan for a single device if required You are also able to specify which port number to scan default is port 80 If scanning for devices which support TCP HTTP most devices do keep the Use TCP port scanning box selected When NetEVS detects a device it will automatically access the device with the device s factory default user name and password If one or more devices within the specified IP address range require a non factory default user name and or password specify such user names and passwords one at a time by clicking the Add button On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 255 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Add Ramee to Scan i or DP Aiaj ara tact F ideas 107041 1 Era IP iasg 101051 3 se Lisa TOF po rra Para Larra a pon ai a y Etherian Liser mama Passan Add F cts Dalm ii
362. n you should therefore disable any virus scanning of recording servers databases of any archiving locations as well as on the Management Server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 425 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Removal Download Manager Removal The Download Manager which is installed on the Management Server is removed separately from the Management Server Software e In Windows s Start menu select Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs e Inthe Add or Remove Programs window s list of currently installed programs select OnSSI Download Manager e Click the Remove button Management Client Removal To remove the NetEVS Management Client software use the following procedure on the computer on which the Management Client is installed Note If you are not an NetEVS system administrator do not attempt to remove the management software 1 Open Windows Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs This will open the Add or Remove Programs window 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs window select the NetEVS Management Client entry and click the Change Remove button 3 A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready Management Server Removal Entirely removing your NetEVS Management Server includes removing the Management Server software itself as well as the Management Server database and NetEVS Windows components Removing the Management Server Software To remove your
363. n a number of different languages In this example we assume that you view the web page in English and that you want to install English versions of the NetEVS components On the web page find the Management Client Installer section and then click the English link under the required Management Client version often only one version On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 will be available Note Depending on your security settings one or more Windows security warnings may appear after you click the link If such security warnings appear click the Run button in the security warning dialogs This will open the NetEVS Management Client Setup wizard which will guide you through the installation Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for OnSSI NetEYS 2 0 Manager The InstallShield Wizard will install OnSS I NetEYS 2 0 Manager on your computer To continue click Next 4 On the first step of the wizard click Next 5 Verify specify user name and company name and select whether the Management Client should be installed for yourself only or for anyone using the computer Then click Next 6 Select required installation folder and then click Next Installation will begin wait while the required components are installed Setup Status OnSSI NetEVS 2 0 Manager Setup is performing the requested operations Publishing product information 7 Upon installation you can begin using the Managem
364. n a rule To view the current state of an input in the Management Client do the following 1 In the navigation pane expand Devices and select Inputs 2 In the overview pane expand the required inputs folder and select the required input OrTip You may select a group of inputs for example A Inputs to view the current status of all inputs in the group 3 Information about the current status of the selected input is presented in the preview pane When an input is deactivated it is shown by a gray indicator O had Leto Entirca hga When the input is activated the indicator lights up green Red Somo Entarca np e Using Device Groups for Convenient Input Management You are able to group the inputs in your inputs list by using device groups Device groups let you specify common properties for all inputs within a device group in one go For more information see Using Device Groups e Input List s Status Icons The following icons are used to indicate the status of each input in the input list On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 155 NetEVS 2 0 ep od op do of go User Manual Input is enabled An enabled input can communicate with the recording server and can be activated automatically through a rule Input is communicating Input is temporarily stopped Often shown when the input is communicating with NetEVS while the input is being disabled or enabled Input is disabled A disabled input cannot be
365. n a tree structure Many users will be familiar with this type of navigation from for example Windows Explorer To go straight to the help system s Contents tab click Contents button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar e Search Tab Lets you search for help topics containing particular terms of interest For example you can search for the term zoom and every help topic containing the term zoom will be listed in the search results Clicking a help topic title in the search results list will open the required topic To go straight to the help system s Search tab click the Search button in the Management Client s toolbar e Favorites Tab Lets you build a list of your favorite help topics Whenever you find a help topic of particular interest to you simply add the topic to your favorites list Then you can access the topic with a single click also if you close the help window and return to it later 148 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Links in Help Topics The actual content of each help topic is displayed in the right pane of the help window Help topic texts may contain various types of links notably so called expanding drop down links Clicking an expanding drop down link will display detailed information The detailed information will be displayed immediately below the link itself the content on the page simply expands Expanding drop down links thus help save space OrTip If you wish to quickly colla
366. n and select Stop Management Server Service Management Server service is stopped To start the Management Server service right click the icon and select Start Management Server Service Management Server service is starting Appears when the Management Server service is in the process of starting Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Management Server is running Ed Management Server service is stopping Appears when the Management Server service is in the process of stopping Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Management Server is stopped e Starting the Management Server Service 1 Right click the notification area s Management Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Start Management Server Service 38 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 O Show Stabus Messages About Exit Management Server Manager e Stopping the Management Server Service Note You cannot use the NetEVS Management Client NetEVS Manager while the Management Server service is stopped 1 Right click the notification area s Management Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select Stop Management Server Service Stop Management Server Service ls Show Stabus Messages About Exit Management Server Manager e Viewing Status Messages 1 Right click the notification area s Management Server service icon 2 From
367. n sliders let you to move the camera along each of its axes Click inside the sliders to move the sliders red handles to the required positions The slider for the X axis allowing you to pan left right is located immediately below the preview image On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 The slider for the Y axis allowing you to tilt the camera up down is located immediately to the left of the preview image The slider for the Z axis allowing you to zoom in and out is located immediately above the preview image The camera will zoom in when you move the slider towards Te e and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide f f i k I Example Add New Preset window s X axis slider e How to Use the Iris Slider Note Iris settings are only available for some cameras Iris settings control the amount of light in images The higher the iris setting the lighter images will appear Click inside the slider to move the slider s red handle to the required position e How to Use the Focus Slider Note Focus settings are only available for some cameras Click inside the slider to move the slider s red handle to the required position e Using Preset Positions from Device As an alternative to specifying preset positions in NetEVS preset positions may for some PTZ cameras also be defined on the camera device itself typically by accessing a device specific configuration web page Such device defined
368. n the afternoon on April 30th 2007 Even further sub directories are automatically added The amount and nature of these sub directories depend on the nature of the actual recordings For example several different such sub directories will be added if the recordings are technically divided into sequences something which is often the case if motion detection has been used to trigger recordings In case you want to back up your archives knowing the basics of the sub directory structure enables you to target your backups Examples e If wishing to back up the content of an entire archive back up the required archive directory and all of its content for example everything under ue eOUrAren 1 ve e If wishing to only back up the recordings from a particular camera from a particular period of time back up the contents of the relevant sub directories only for example everything under OurArchive b82e691f 67cf 4177 a0b9 e69077d4d75a 469c37e4 28ad 487b bcb7 e5fd7e5a609a 2007 04 30 14 30 20N Archiving and Virus Scanning If you are using virus scanning software on the computer on which the camera databases you want to archive are located or on a computer to which data is archived it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning all the data which is being archived This may affect system performance negatively Also virus scanning software may temporarily lock each file it scans
369. n the new Management Server using the same method During the restore process the Management Server service was stopped to prevent configuration changes being made until you were done Remember to start the Management Server Service again On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 421 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Database Protection Protecting Databases from Corruption If a recording server s databases become corrupted the recording server is in many cases able to repair the corrupt databases While the ability to repair corrupt databases is highly valuable it is of course even better to take steps to ensure that your databases do not become corrupted 422 Power Outages Use a UPS The single biggest reason for corrupt databases is the recording server being shut down abruptly without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly This may happen due to power outages due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server s power cable or similar The best way of protecting your recording servers from being shut down abruptly is to equip each of your recording servers with a UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply The UPS works as a battery driven secondary power source providing the necessary power for saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities UPSs vary in sophistication but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files for alerting system admi
370. navigation pane expand Security and right click Roles 2 Right click the unwanted role in the overview pane and select Delete Role Tip Alternatively you may simply press DELETE on your keyboard 3 You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the selected role If you are sure click Yes Viewing Effective Roles With the Effective Roles feature you are able to view all roles of a selected user or group This ability is especially convenient if you are using groups in fact it is the only way of viewing the roles of individual group members 1 Open the Effective Roles window There are three ways in which you can open the Effective Roles window e From the NetEVS Manager s menu bar by selecting Tools gt Effective Roles e From the overview pane when working with roles by right clicking anywhere inside the pane then selecting Effective Roles e From the navigation pane by expanding Security then right clicking Roles then selecting Effective Roles 2 In the Effective Roles window s Enter user field type the user name of the required user Tip By clicking the browse button to the right of the field you are able to browse for the user in question using Active Directory 3 If you typed the user name directly into the Enter user field click the Refresh button in the lower part of the window to display the roles of the user On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 295 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual If you
371. nay rabbit q ld Fi ride cto a RE Installation will begin wait while the required components are installed 7 When the required components are installed specify verify the following On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 17 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Name A name for the recording server If required you can later changed the name through the NetEVS Management Client NetEVS Management Server The IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the Management Server to which the recording server should be connected If required you can later change the Management Server IP address host name as part of the basic administration on the Recording Server service MediaDB The path to the recording server s media database The media database is the recording server s default storage area i e the default location in which recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual camera databases If required you can later change the path and or add paths to more storage area locations from the NetEVS Management Client When ready click Next 8 The wizard will ask you to select a user account under which the Recording Server service will run Service Loe Un Setup Senmice thou log on as C2 The predefined socouri G Tha secari Passed erie patina deco deco The Saree era val be started use Hi Sort e computa is Mana ofS Carian de socouri mua siha be Local Saben on 5 Ar ute accel You
372. nd to specify which of NetEVS s features they should be able to access See Assigning Users and Groups to a Role and Specifying the Rights of a Role for more information Assigning Users amp Groups to a Role di 284 In the Management Client s navigation pane expand Security and select Roles Then select the required role in the overview pane Name Pa Administrators e A A AS A RA As In the properties pane select the Users Groups tab 8 Users t Groups ee Device EP PTZ e Speech E Application Y Use On the Users amp Groups tab click the Add button This will open the Select Users and Groups dialog Select Users or Groups Jeg Select ther object type Erom Heck localice Erte the objecti names bo pect croia Cancel In the Se ect Users or Groups window verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If not click the Locations button to browse for the required domain In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user names initials or other types of identifier which Active Directory will be able to recognize QTip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the names initials etc you have typed are recognized by Active Directory Click OK The selected users groups are now added to the Users amp Groups tab s list of users who have been assigned the selected role On Net Surveillance Syst
373. ne 162 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 2 Click the Auto Hide pushpin in the title bar of the pane to dock the pane e Resetting to Default Layout If you have moved resized and auto hidden panes and now want to reset the entire layout of the panes in the Management Client to their default settings do the following 1 From the NetEVS Manager s View menu select Reset Application Layout 2 Restart the application e Toggling Preview Pane On and Off You can close the preview pane when working with recorders and devices by clicking the Close button in the right side of the preview pane s title bar To reopen the preview pane select Preview Window from the NetEVS Manager s View menu Orip If the preview pane displays images from many cameras at a high frame rate it may slow down performance To specify the number of preview images you want in your preview pane as well as their frame rate select Options gt General from the Tools menu OTip When the preview pane is closed it uses no resources and improves therefore the computer s performance On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 163 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Licensing About Licensing When you purchase NetEVS you also purchase a certain number of licenses for device channels Device channels are typically cameras but could also be dedicated input output boxes At first when you have installed the various NetEVS components configured the syste
374. ne A description is not compulsory To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar e Serial Number Serial number of the hardware as specified by the manufacturer The serial number is often but not always identical to the MAC address e Firmware version Firmware version as specified by the manufacturer e MAC address MAC address of the hardware A MAC Media Access Control address is a 12 character hexadecimal number uniquely identifying each device on a network e ProductID Product identifier e Hardware host name Host name or IP address of the hardware Orip By clicking the button next to the field you are able to connect to the hardware s own configuration page The page opens in a separate window Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit settings for the hardware selected under a recording server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 263 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual ge oe ae ee oe ee ee ee a ee ey p Camera 6 ap Input i e O ibprat 1 Ams 2100 Camera 10 1065 4 Selecting hardware under a recording server Note The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by hardware in question and may thus vary depending on the type of hardware selected For some types of hardware the settings tab may display no content at all The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available setting
375. ne le descopoon Cik an undalned bem Perfonm an action on input Acthvated from Back Door Sensor ase patrolling on PTS Cameras and Mowe camera immediately lo position PTZ Camera Back Door Perform action Gare Resume petrolino immediate We click the time link specify 15 seconds and click OK relativo Tine E Select bre pecs 15 r Based on the start action pause patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action resume patrolling It furthermore suggests that patrolling is resumed immediately after the 15 second pause On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 355 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Meat Edk the tule descopbon click an undelmed ibeni Perfonm an action on input Activated from Back Door Sensor Pause patrolling on PTS Camera and Mowe camera immediately to position PTZ Camera Back Door Perform action 15 seconds after Resume patroling immediate This is exactly what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g three seconds 14 Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Rule Wizard window Fl Camera Tip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 15 Click the wizard s Finish button This w
376. nformation about an input The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the input The name will be used whenever the input is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 151 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual OTip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the input A description is not compulsory The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when placing the mouse pointer over the input s name in the overview pane Reception rea op A Sector Back Door Input dp RAlatSector Entrance Input Input by the back door bo red sector To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar e Hardware name Name of the hardware to which the input unit is attached The field is non editable However the hardware name can be changed by clicking the Go To button next to the field Clicking the Go To button will take you to the hardware information where the name is editable e Unit number Non editable field displaying the
377. ng on further recording servers without freeing up some multicasting IP addresses first e Address Range In this section you specify the range from which you want to assign addresses for multicast streams from the selected recording server Access clients will connect to these addresses when viewing multicast video from the recording server in question For each multicast camera feed the IP address port combination IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 6000 must be unique You can thus either use one IP address and many ports or many IP addresses and fewer ports By default NetEVS suggests a single IP address and a range of 1000 ports but you can change this as required Example If you want multicast for 1000 cameras you would need either e one IP address and a range of 1000 different ports OR e arange of two IP addresses and a range of 500 different ports or any matching combination OR e arange of 1000 IP addresses and a single port You specify this information in the following fields e IP address In the Start field specify the first IP address in the required range Then specify the last IP address in the range in the End field 212 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 OrTIip If required a range may include only one IP address IPv4 example 232 0 1 0 232 0 1 0 Ortip IP addresses for multicasting must be within a special range set aside for dynamic host allocation by IANA the authority overseeing global
378. ng profile in the dialog opening and then click OK The rule description now reflects our selection l t Edit tre rule descapbon click an underdned item erform an action in a time interval within selected time in Daytime tert patroling on Parking Lot E cam 2 using My Patrolling Profile 10 Click the wizard s Next button to move to step 4 of the wizard 11 On step 4 of the wizard select stop criteria Stop criteria are important in many types of rules Without a stop criterion many actions could go on indefinitely once started In this example Without a stop criterion the rule in this example would make the PTZ camera start patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile but it would never stop Based on the elements in our rule description we therefore must select a stop criterion Since our rule is triggered when a time period starts the wizard automatically suggests that stop action is performed when the time period ends First Select stop ciena E Petom stop action when time interval ends The suggestion is also reflected in the rule description However we still need to specify exactly which stop action we want performed 12 Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 13 In this step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions In this example Based on the start action start patrolling in our rule description the wizard automatically
379. nistrators etc Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization s environment is an individual process When assessing your needs however do Keep in mind however the amount of runtime you will require the UPS to be able to provide if the power fails Saving open files and shutting down an operating system properly may take several minutes Windows Task Manager Be Careful when Ending Processes When working in Windows Task Manager be careful not to end any processes which affect the surveillance system If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the Windows Task Manager the process in question will not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is terminated This may in turn lead to corrupt camera databases Windows Task Manager will typically display a warning if you attempt to end a process Unless you are absolutely sure that ending the process will not affect the surveillance system make sure you click the No button when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process Hard Disk Failure Protect Your Drives Hard disk drives are mechanical devices and as such they are vulnerable to external factors The following are examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt camera databases On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Vibration make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are sta
380. nit e Password Password required to access and use the hardware unit e Type Non editable field indicating the hardware driver used for the hardware unit 3 When ready click OK e Enabling Disabling Hardware Added hardware is by default enabled Under the required recording server in the overview pane enabled disabled hardware units are indicated the following way ful Enabled Ei Disabled Disabling To disable added hardware for example for licensing or performance purposes do the following 1 Under the required recording server in the overview pane and right click the required hardware unit On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 259 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 2 In the menu that appears clear the Enabled selection Recording Sen Server 6H TE Server 1 Enabling To enable a previously disabled hardware unit simply select Enabled again e Renaming Hardware 1 Under the required recording server in the overview pane right click the required hardware unit 2 From the menu that appears select Rename IP Hardware a Server Y Foco Server 1 Orip As an alternative to using the menu simply press F2 on your keyboard 3 You are now able to overwrite the name of the hardware e Deleting Individual Hardware IMPORTANT When deleting a hardware unit all recordings from the hardware unit in question will be deleted permanently 1 Under the relevant recording s
381. nt Server If all involved servers both the NetEVS Management Server and the trusted servers are on your local network you can simply specify the LAN address If On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 383 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual one or more involved servers access the system through an internet connection you must also specify the WAN address Network Configuration ES pensa Sethings Sener address LAN Sener address WAN 3 When ready click OK e Editing Trusted Server Information 1 In the Add Remove Servers window s Server list select the required server then click the Edit button 2 In the Edit Server window make the required changes If using a hostname as the server address remember that the host in question must exist and be available on the network Also remember that server addresses must not contain slashes or begin with http or https NetEVS automatically adds http to the server address once you add the server 3 When ready click OK e Removing Trusted Servers 1 In the Add Remove Servers window s Server list select the no longer required server then click the Remove button 2 You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected server If you are sure click the Yes button User Defined Events Managing User defined Events User defined events are events which are custom made to suit your system Like other events user defined events can be used in rules
382. ntil configured on the hardware itself Occurs when an external input unit connected to an input port on a device is deactivated Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an input port The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when a camera detects motion in its video stream In addition to NetEVS s motion detection some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such camera detected motion detection can also be used in NetEVS rules Note The event will not work until configured on the camera hardware itself Exact use of camera based motion detection depends on the configuration of the cameras in question Occurs when a camera no longer detects motion in its video stream See also the description of the Motion Started event above On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 321 NetEVS 2 0 Tampering Temperature Video Lost Communication Error Communication Started Communication Stopped Feed Overflow Started Feed Overflow Stopped 322 User Manual Note The event will not work until configured on the camera hardware itself Exact use of camera based motion detection depends on the configuration of the cameras in question Occurs when a device detects that it is being tampered with Note The event will not work until configured on the hardware it
383. nts Examples of Components You Can Control Through the Download Manager Recording servers including failover servers failover servers are initially downloaded and installed as recording servers during the installation process you specify that you want a failover server Management Client Video device drivers for use on recording servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Ocularis Client Lite e Various plugins downloading such plugins can be relevant if your organization uses add on products such as video analytics or transaction management solutions with NetEVS e More options may be available in your organization Making New Components Available Making new components available to your organization s users involves two procedures First you install the required components on the Management Server You then use the Download Manager to fine tune which components should be available in the various language versions of the web page Installing New Components on Management Server If the Download Manager is open close it before installing new components on the Management Server Installation files for additional components are available on your Management Server by default in a folder called Installers The Installers folder is located in the Management Server software installation folder To install a component from the Installers folder you may depending on the type of component need to sele
384. nual How Does Prebuffering Work Prebuffering is possible since NetEVS continuously receives streams of audio from connected microphones unless the transfer of audio from microphones has in some way been disabled Storing audio from before the initial boundaries of a recording is therefore not a problem audio passes through NetEVS anyway When prebuffering is enabled for a microphone NetEVS continuously records audio from the microphone s stream and provisionally stores it in the database for a specified number of seconds before automatically deleting it unless the provisionally stored audio turns out to be required for a recording in which case it is automatically added to the recording The following example illustrates how prebuffered audio is added to a recording This is the stream received by NetEVS These are the initial boundaries of a recording as defined for example by start and stop events a However a rule specifies that recording should start five seconds prior to the start event so five seconds of prebuffered audio is added A This is what is actually recorded a Enabling and Disabling Prebuffering Prebuffering is by default enabled with a prebuffer size of 3 seconds To enable disable prebuffering select clear the Enable prebuffering check box When enabling remember to specify a prebuffer size Specifying Prebuffer Size Select or type the required prebuffer size in seconds in the Pr
385. o group the microphones in your microphone list by using device groups Device groups let you specify common properties for all microphones within a device group in one go For more information see Using Device Groups e Microphone List s Status Icons The following icons are used to indicate the status of each microphone A Microphone is enabled An enabled microphone can communicate with the recording server and can if required be started stopped automatically through a rule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 197 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual F Microphone is recording Microphone is communicating with NetEVS Microphone is temporarily stopped or has no feed Often shown when the microphone is communicating with NetEVS while the microphone is being disabled or enabled Also shown if the Default Start Audio Feed Rule is not active see Managing Rules Rs Microphone is disabled A disabled microphone cannot be started automatically through a rule and will not be able to communicate with the recording server A Microphone requires attention o Status unknown e Note that some icons may be combined as in this example where Microphone is enabled is combined with Microphone is recording since a recording microphone is also an enabled microphone Database Management Manage individual cameras microphones and speakers through the Database Configuration Wizard The wizard conveniently guides you through the processes of emptying o
386. o it better describes the new rule for example to PTZ Camera Nighttime Patrolling e On the time conditions selection step select that the rule should apply not within but outside the time profile First Select ditions to apply e Within seethed lime inaire profiles Outside se adllime in lt time profile E within th id lt startime gt lo lt endtme Fl Day ofleek is days On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 349 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual First Select comditions to apply Within selected lime in lt lime profiles e Outside selected time in time proble _ Within the time period lt startime gt to lt endime Day of week is cdays gt e Inthe rule description click the link in the sentence Start patrolling on and select a patrolling profile matching your nighttime requirements rather than your daytime requirements TI gt JC gt C Al Cameras 8 PTZ Comers B Captia y Naghitirne Ce 2 Click the wizard s Finish button Pause Patrolling and Go to Preset on Input Note The rule described in the following is an example only If wishing to base a real life rule on the example be prepared to substitute the example s device names and parameters with device names and parameters relevant to your system This rule ensures the following e When a specific external input is activated a PTZ camera will pause its patrolling mov
387. o not want motion detection to be disabled during the transition select the plugin and click the remove button 7 Repeat as required for other transitions e Specifying an End Position You are able to specify that the camera should move to a specific preset position when patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile ends 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Select the Go to specific preset on finish check box Go to specific preset on finish On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 105 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual This will open the Se ect Preset dialog 3 Inthe Select Preset dialog select the required end position and click OK OTip You can select any of the camera s preset positions as the end position you are not limited to the preset positions used in the patrolling profile 4 The selected end position is added to the list of preset positions for the selected patrolling profile When patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile ends the camera will go to the specified end position e Renaming an Existing Patrolling Profile 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Click the Rename button This will open the Rename Profile dialog 3 In the Rename Profile dialog type a new name for the patrolling profile hip Use a descriptive name the name of the patrolling profile may later be used in situations where you will not have access to details about th
388. o remove the archive If you are sure click Yes 4 The selected archive will be removed A progress bar will indicate how removal progresses When the archive has been removed the wizard will display a confirmation In case the archive could not be removed the wizard will display a link to detailed information about what caused the problem 5 When ready click Finish On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 281 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Roles Users amp Rights Roles About Roles Roles determine which of your NetEVS solution s features users and groups are able to use In other words roles determine rights You define roles first then you add users groups to the roles One role is predefined in NetEVS and cannot be deleted the Administrators role In addition to the Administrators role you are able to add as many roles as required in your organization To manage roles in NetEVS expand the Security folder in the Management Client s navigation pane and select Ro es For more information see e Administrators Role e Adding a Role e Assigning Users and Groups to a Role e Specifying the Rights of a Role e Renaming a Role e Deleting a Role e Viewing Effective Roles Note that roles may also determine access to views in access clients see Managing View Groups Administrators Role The Administrator s role is predefined and cannot be deleted Users and groups with the Administrators role have complete and unres
389. o select Add New Rule you may simply press CTRL N on your keyboard 2 The Rule Wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field In this example the rule will only cover a specific camera simply called PTZ Camera and how it should patrol on Saturday afternoons We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name Mame Retail rea FTZ Saturday A emmor OTip Always use a descriptive name for the rule Once you have several rules you will find that descriptive names are a great help when identifying individual rules 3 On Step 1 of the Rule Wizard select the required rule type In this example we want to base the rule on a time period Therefore we select Perform an action in a time interval First Select the rule type to generate Perform an action on lt event gt Perform an action in a time interval 4 Click the wizard s Next button to move to the wizard s next step 5 On the wizard s next step specify which time conditions should be met in order for the rule to apply 340 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 gt In this example we want the rule to apply between 13 00 and 17 00 on Saturdays so two time conditions are required one which specifies use of a start time and end time and one which specifies use on a particular day of the week We therefore select Within the time period lt start time gt to lt end time g
390. ob This ensures that archiving jobs do not overlap in time See also the answer to the previous question How long does it take to complete a scheduled archiving 74 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Audio About Audio NetEVS supports two way audio gt Ocularis Client Lite users can user rights permitting listen to live and recorded audio from microphones attached to devices and talk live to audiences through loudspeakers connected to devices If required users can listen and talk live simultaneously This way they can interact directly with their audiences Such two way interaction requires that the involved devices have microphones and speakers attached Users can of course also use one way audio in cases where only microphones or speakers are attached to devices In the Management Client NetEVS Manager you configure microphones speakers and users rights to use them separately See About Microphones and About Speakers for more information You cannot listen to microphones or talk through speakers from the Management Client always use Ocularis Client Lite for that On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 75 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual AVI Compression AVI Compression Settings You are able to specify compression settings for the generation of AVI video clip files Specifying these settings is a prerequisite if you want to include AVI files in e mail notifications sent out by rule triggered not
391. of 3 seconds To enable disable prebuffering select clear the Enable prebuffering check box When enabling remember to specify a prebuffer size Specifying Prebuffer Size Select or type the required prebuffer size in seconds in the Prebuffer size box Clicking the Prebuffer size box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one second The number of seconds you specify in the Prebuffer size box must be sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements Using Prebuffering in Rules The use of prebuffering enables you to create rules specifying that recording should begin prior to the event or time triggering the rule Maximum Storage Limits The Record tab s Maximum storage limits specify how long recordings are kept in the database for Tip With archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the database For the microphone s database you are able to specify a maximum time limit e g one day as well as a maximum database size limit e g two gigabytes Whichever of the two limits is reached first will apply e Specifying a Maximum Storage Time Limit To specify a maximum time limit select or type the required values in the Time period boxes Days Hours and Minutes On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Clicking the Time period boxes up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one day hour minute respectively Specifying a Ma
392. of a camera s images Parts of images in which motion should be ignored this way are called exclude regions Disabling motion detection in specific areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is Swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass by in the background To use exclude regions select the Use exclude regions check box Defining Exclude Regions When you select the Use exclude regions check box the preview image will be divided into selectable sections by a grid The grid may be visible or hidden depending on whether the Show grid check box is selected or not The density of the grid is determined by the value in the Grid size list See Grid Features in the following for detailed information To define exclude regions drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down Left mouse button selects a grid section right mouse button clears a grid section Selected areas will be highlighted in blue provided the Show regions check box is selected You are able to define as many exclude regions as you require On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 IAEA Exclude region defined in the preview window In this case the grid is visible The blue exclude area indications will only appear in the preview image on the Motion tab not in any other preview images in NetEVS Manager or access cl
393. of external input and output units on a device verify that sensor operation is recognized by the device Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces or via CGI script commands Also check the NetEVS release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are supported for the devices and firmware used e Enabling Input When inputs are detected with the Hardware Detection Wizard they are by default disabled You can easily activate inputs when needed If a device has several inputs you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 In the navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 In the overview pane expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the input is placed 3 Right click the required input and select Enabled e Specifying Input Properties Each input typically has several properties You can access these properties in two ways e Inthe navigation pane expand Devices and select Inputs Then in the overview pane expand the required inputs folder and select the required input Or e Inthe overview pane select a device group to define settings for all inputs in the group or expand a device group and select the required input The properties of the selected input or the common properties for all inputs in a selected device group will be displayed on the following tabs e Info Tab The Info tab lets you view and edit basic i
394. oftware CD For Ocularis Client Lite system requirements simply see System Requirements Installation Typically Ocularis Client Lite is downloaded from the surveillance system server then installed on your computer Alternatively your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install Ocularis Client Lite from a CD see Installation from CD To download and install Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server do the following 1 Verify that your computer meets Ocularis Client Lite s minimum system requirements 2 Open an Internet Explorer browser version 6 0 or later and connect to the Surveillance system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator The address is typically http Management Server address port installation where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server When you are connected to the surveillance system server you will see a welcome page 3 On the welcome page click the required language link for Ocularis Client Lite OTip Depending on your security settings you may receive one or more security warnings Do you want to run or save this file Do you want to run this software or similar exact wording depends on your browser version When this is the case accept the security warnings by clicking Run or similar exact
395. oice Example of an exported log txt file viewed in Notepad 182 E Uta peri tet Hanepad A x Pe Edi Foral Ver Help Timestamp Level EventType Source Description A 11 4 2007 1 47 26 PM Error Communication Error Camera 14 perico Communication Error 11 44 2007 1 47 33 PH Error Comunication Error C mera 10 Device Comunication Error 1 4 P007 1 47 37 PM Error Communication Error Camera 17 Divice Communication Error 11 4 2007 1 47 39 PH Error Comunication Error Camera 11 Device Comunication Error Cayo 1 48 34 PM Error Communication error camera 18 Device Communication Error M1 44 7007 1480 PM Error Communication Error C mera 18 Device Comunication Error 11 4 2007 1 40 13 Pm Error Comsundcicion Error cCisora 18 Davidico Comunicar ton Error 11 4 7007 1 49 41 PH Error Communication Error cineri 18 Device Comunication Error 11 4 7007 1 40 52 PM error Communication error camara 18 Divico Communication error On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 You are able to target the exported log content by specifying which log which log elements and which time range to include in the export For example you are able to specify that only the System Log s error related log messages from between January 2nd 2007 15 00 00 and January 4th 2007 14 59 59 should be included in your export To export a log do the following 1 Expand the Management Server Logs item in the NetEVS Man
396. ompted to connect to a server Specify the name of the required SQL Server in the example the server is called MM01232 and connect with the defaults 2 Connect to Server ES Miroi DY Windows Server Syitem SOL Server 2005 tal e AO me Arrate Wwrdow Ayerbe tent ni Cerea tea so Ciena Tip You do not have to type the name of the SQL server If you click inside the Server name field and select lt Browse for more gt you can select the required SQL Server from a list instead 2 Once connected you will see a tree structure in the Object Explorer in the left part of the window Expand the SQL Server item then the Databases item We are primarily interested in the Surveillance database Object Explorer ix af 32 E Ug MMo1z32 SOL Server 9 0 3042 3 Databases a m n ma n o m o n m nm E lg Surveillance 5 a Survedlancelog On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 415 NetEVS 2 0 3 User Manual The Surveillance database contains your entire NetEVS system configuration including recording servers cameras inputs outputs users rules alerts patrolling profiles etc No Surveillance database Surveillance is the default name of the database containing the system configuration If you can find the database but it is not called Surveillance it could be because you gave the database another name during the Management Server installation In the following example we will assume that the dat
397. on the Rule Wizard will prompt you to specify a text for the log entry Tip When specifying the log text you will be able to quickly On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual Generate alert lt alert type gt Start plugin on lt devices gt Stop plugin on lt devices gt Apply new settings on NetEVS 2 0 insert variables such as DeviceName EventNamef etc into the log message wording No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Generates an alert Alerts will be 1 logged in the alert log and 2 selectable user rights permitting when browsing recordings in Ocularis Client Lite When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select an alert Only one alert can be selected it is not possible to select several alerts Note This type of action requires that at least one alert has been defined see Managing Alerts No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Starts one or more plugins When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select required plugins and on which devices to start the plugins Note This type of action requires that
398. on detection while using the wizard default Clear check box to disable motion detection while using the wizard Note that this setting only applies while the Hardware Detection Wizard is in use When the wizard is not in use motion detection will be active for all cameras for which it has been enabled regardless of this setting Why would I want to disable motion detection while using the Hardware Detection Wizard Motion detection is a key element in the surveillance system and is thus by default enabled for all cameras on the system However motion detection uses a relatively large amount of On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 computing resources If your system features a very large number of cameras and motion detection is enabled on all cameras the system may thus be slowed down slightly and adding of new cameras may take longer than usual In order to be able to add new cameras as quickly as possible you therefore have the option or disabling motion detection while the Hardware Detection Wizard is used e PTZ manual session timeout Patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted manually by Ocularis Client Lite users with the necessary user rights This setting lets you specify how much time should pass before regular patrolling is resumed after a manual interruption The setting will apply for all PTZ cameras on your NetEVS system e Management Server Logs The Management Server Log tab lets you s
399. on that camera and generate alert Employee Clocking In Alerts triggered this way will be visible in two places e Inthe Management Client s alert log e In Ocularis Client Lite where users rights permitting will be able to view a list of triggered alerts while browsing recordings Alerts listed in Ocularis Client Lite are clickable allowing the users to quickly jump to the time at which an alert was triggered All triggered alerts will be visible in Ocularis Client Lite it is not possible to prevent certain types of alerts from being listed in Ocularis Client Lite e Adding New Alerts 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts right click Alerts and select Add New Alert Type Grip Alternatively you may simply press CTRL N on your keyboard This will open the Add New Alert Type window 2 In the Add New Alert Type window specify the following e Name Type a name for the alert Use an easily understandable name when the alert is triggered the name will appear in the Alert Log as well as in Ocularis Client Lite e Description Optional Type a description of the alert for example stating what the alert is meant to be used for The description will become available when viewing the properties of the alert in the properties pane It will also become visible if you pause your mouse pointer over the alert when viewing the alerts list in the overview pane 3 When ready click OK The new alert will b
400. one or more failover servers then select Edit Group Members from the menu that appears This will open the Select Group Members window From the Available box in window s left side select the required failover servers s then click the Add button to move the selected failover server s to the Se ected box in the right side of the window Select Group Members Failover Group 1 g Ailai Teed Fakti Gesuge E Padova Server 1 Fairs Group 1 g rare F mere S rre 4 Fadewer Serve 1 Co Lema Orip Alternatively simply drag and drop failover servers between the two boxes When ready click OK The required failover servers now belong to the group gt B Falower Groups Failover Server 1 G Unused Failover Servers Note A failover server can only be a member of one group at a time Editing Failover Group Properties Select the required failover group in the overview pane e On the Info tab you can edit the name and description of the selected failover group e On the Sequence tab you can edit the sequence in which failover servers within the group should take over from unavailable recording servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 137 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Enabling Failover Servers A failover server must be enabled before it will be able to take over from regular recording servers 1 In the overview pane select the required failover server Falowes Groups l Failover Group 1 tJ Fail
401. one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of the Rule Wizard the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop recording Without this stop action recording would potentially continue indefinitely You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Start feed Begin video feed from camera devices to NetEVS When the feed on from a device is started video will be transferred from the device lt devices gt to NetEVS in which case live viewing and recording of video will be possible 326 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual Set live frame rate on lt devices gt NetEVS 2 0 IMPORTANT While this type of action enables access to selected cameras video feeds it does not guarantee that video will be recorded as cameras recording settings must be specified Separately When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to specify on which devices feeds should be started tip NetEVS has a default rule ensuring that feeds are always started on all cameras Note however that the default rule may have been manually deactivated or modified See About Rules for more information Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed
402. onfiguration database on the SQL Server Once you are done creating moving or updating being database owner of the Management Server s system configuration database on the SQL Server will suffice SQL Server Express Edition users only Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express a tool downloadable for free from On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 www microsoft com downloads Among its many features for managing SQL Server Express databases are some easy to use backup and restoration features Download and install the tool on your existing Management Server and on the server which will be your future Management Server you will need it for backup as well as restoration e Backing Up the System Configuration Orhe following only applies if you are storing your NetEVS system s configuration in a SQL Server Express Edition database on the Management Server itself Prerequisite Stop the Management Server Service to prevent configuration changes being made This is important since any changes made to the NetEVS configuration between the time you create a backup and the time you restore it on your new Management Server will be lost If changes are made after the backup you will have to make a new backup 1 Open Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express from Windows Start menu by selecting A Programs gt Microsoft SQL Server 2005 gt SQL Server Management Studio Express When you open the tool you are pr
403. or the device when accessing it this way 6 Optional To see any devices for which the wizard has not automatically been able to detect a hardware driver select the Show unknown hardware check 256 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 box This will include any unknown hardware in the list Such unknown devices will be indicated by question mark icon 2 For such devices you are able to manually specify user name password and hardware driver Remember to select the Include check box for each manually specified device When ready click Next 7 On the last step of the wizard verify the information then click Finish 8 The devices are added to the recording server and will appear in the NetEVS Manager s lists Recording Server ce zJ Recording Server 1 ee ED Axis 207 Network Camera 10 10 50 37 p Lab Cam 4 dp Input 12 Si Qutput 10 5 Arie 207 Metwuk Canera 10 10 92 3 Blue Sector Cam 3 ap Input 18 ol Output 16 Anis MANE Metis mak p EN T 1 1 4 Fy Example of added devices listed in overview pane e Assisted Hardware Detection To use assisted hardware detection do the following 1 On the first step of the Hardware Detection Wizard select Assisted Hardware Detection and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard the wizard will ask you to enter information about the required hardware For each required device specify IP address port number if other than the
404. or your rule Input Activated Input Changed or Input Deactivated Click OK to confirm your selection On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual 10 11 OTip NetEVS 2 0 Click the devices recording servers management servers link in the initial rule description In the Select Devices and Groups dialog select the required input Click OK to confirm your selection Click Next to continue to the Rule Wizard s step 2 Step 2 Conditions and select if necessary a condition Continue to step 3 Step 3 Actions and select one or more actions Click Next to continue to step 4 Step 4 Stop criteria and select a stop criteria Click Next to continue to step 5 Step 5 Stop actions and select a stop action Click Finish to save the rule When you create a rule based on an input event the actions you specify in the rule do not have to relate to the device on which the external input was changed you can easily specify that the actions should take place on one or more different devices even across recording servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 157 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Layout Customizing the Management Client s Layout You can rearrange panes in the Management Client and thus customize its look to suit your needs If you rearrange the panes you can always reset the entire layout to the NetEVS Manager s default layout e Resizing Panes You can resize panes by simply dragging the borders of t
405. orage area no devices will yet be using it Later you are able to select use of particular storage areas for particular cameras when opening the Database Configuration Wizard while working with a camera see Camera Database Management e Default The check box lets you select if the new storage area should be the recording server s default storage area i e the storage area in which database content is automatically stored unless you specifically define other storage areas for particular cameras Note that only one storage area can be the default area Then click Next 3 The new storage area will be created A bar displays how the creation job progresses AAA When the creation job is complete you will be informed whether the job was On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 241 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual successful or whether it failed If the job failed you will be able to view a status message indicating what caused the failure Stal Desle Horage aiea Success Example Indication of successful creation job Sbabus dde Create slorage aiea Fa Example Indication of failed creation job with link to status message 4 Click Finish e Change Default Storage Area To change the default storage area on a recording server do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Change default storage area and click Next 2 In the Defau t column on the second step of the
406. ordings are stored in separate subdirectories under the selected archive location Technically each performed archiving is thus stored individually although this fact will be completely transparent when browsing the archived recordings in access clients such as Ocularis Client Lite The fact that archived recordings are stored individually means that you are able to view a list of each performed archiving with exact timestamps information about the recordings included in each performed archiving e Path Path to the archive directory e Begin time Date and time of the oldest recording included in the performed archiving 196 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e End time Date and time of the most recent recording included in the performed archiving e Viewing the Current State of a Microphone To view the current state of a microphone in the Management Client do the following 1 In the navigation pane expand Devices and select Microphones 2 In the overview pane expand the All Microphones folder and select the required microphone OrTip You may select a group of microphones for example All Microphones to view the current status of all microphones in the group 3 Information about the current status of the selected microphone is presented in the preview pane When a microphone is not active it is shown as e Using Device Groups for Convenient Microphone Management You are able t
407. orer browser connect to the NetEVS Management Server at the following address http Management Server address port installation admin where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server This will open the Management Server s built in web page If not accessing the web page on the Management Server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the Management Server NetEVS NetEVS contains a set of administrative applications which are downloaded and installed from this page User applications can be found on the default download page If you want to view this page in another language use the language menu in the top right corner Video Device Drivers Installer Video Device Drivers enable supported devices cameras video encoders etc to communicate with the surveillance system Video Device Drivers must be installed on each recording server Video Device Drivers Installer 3 9 Device Pack Management Client Installer The NetEVS Management Client is the system s administration application used for setting up hardware recording servers security etc Management Client Installer 2 0b English Recording Server Installer The NetEVS Recording Server has features for recording of video and audio feeds and for communication with cameras and other devices in the surveillance system
408. ossibility of losing contact with the surveillance system while the Management Server is down even though some users might not experience loss of contact at all e Prerequisites You will need 414 Your NetEVS software installation file for installation on the new Management Server Your initial license lic file i e the one you used when initially installing NetEVS not the lic file which is the result of your license activation License activation is among other things based on the specific hardware on which the activation took place therefore an activated lic file cannot be reused when moving to a new server Note that if you are also upgrading your NetEVS software in connection with the move you will have received a new initial lic file together with your new Software License Code SLC If you activated NetEVS on the old server and you are installing the same software version on the new server Contact OnSSI support notify us that the software is being moved and ask for your computer information to be reset An already activated license lic file cannot be reused on a new server Send an e mail to Ssupport onssi com and include your Software License Code SLC If possible send the e mail from the e mail address with which you previously registered your SLC Network SQL Server users only Administrator rights on the SQL Server are required whenever you need to create move or upgrade the Management Server s system c
409. ossible to select several preset positions Note This type of action requires that the devices to which the action will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom devices and that at least one preset position has been defined for those devices You define preset positions for a PTZ camera on the Presets tab No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Moves one or more particular cameras to their respective default preset positions When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select which devices the action should apply for Note This type of action requires that the devices to which the action will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom devices and that On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 329 NetEVS 2 0 Set device output to lt state gt Send notification to lt profile gt Make new lt log entry gt 330 User Manual default preset positions have been defined for those devices You define default preset positions for a PTZ camera on the Presets tab No compulsory stop action This type of action does not require a stop action although it will be possible to specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an event or after a period of time Sets an output on a device to a particular state activated or deactivated When selecting t
410. ot click the Locations button to browse for the required domain In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user names initials or other types of identifier which Active Directory will be able to recognize Tip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the names initials etc you have typed are recognized by Active Directory Click OK The selected users groups are now added to the Users amp Groups tab s list of users who have been assigned the selected role Mame ig Karen Smith ACME ks Joe Testername ACME t On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Viewing a Group s Roles With the Effective Roles feature you are able to view all roles of a selected user or group This ability is especially convenient if you are using groups in fact it is the only way of viewing the roles of individual group members 1 Open the Effective Roles window There are three ways in which you can open the Effective Roles window e From the NetEVS Manager s menu bar by selecting Tools gt Effective Roles e From the overview pane when working with roles by right clicking anywhere inside the pane then selecting Effective Roles e From the navigation pane by expanding Security then right clicking Roles then selecting Effective Roles 2 In the Effective Roles window s Enter user field type the user name of the required user OTIip By cli
411. ou are now able to verify or change the common settings 2 If required you are able to specify settings for the device group s individual speaker types as well From the menu above the settings list select the required type of speaker to verify or change the settings of the selected type of speaker On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 3 If you have made changes to the settings save your changes by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar aa e Record Tab The Record tab lets you specify recording and storage settings for the selected speaker Speakers recording and storage settings are completely independent of cameras and microphones Note Recordings of what is being said through a speaker will only be saved in the speaker s database when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met IMPORTANT Although what is being said through a speaker can be recorded and archived there is currently no way of playing back or exporting such recorded outgoing audio Features for playing back and exporting recorded outgoing audio will be available in subsequent releases as soon as possible e Enabling and Disabling Recording Recording is by default enabled To enable disable recording for the selected speaker select clear the Record tab s Enable recording check box Note Recording must be enabled for the speaker before you are able to record i e save audio from the speaker A
412. ou want to back up your archived recordings In each of the recording server s archive directories separate sub directories are automatically created These sub directories are named after the GUID of the recording server What is a GUID A GUID is a Globally Unique IDentifier a unique 128 bit number used to identify components on a Windows system Example of a GUID 469c37e4 28ad 487b bcb7 e5fd7e5a609a Since you are able to able to store recordings from different cameras in the same archive and since archiving for each camera is likely to be performed at regular intervals further sub directories are also automatically added These sub directories each represent approximately an hour s worth of recordings The one hour split makes it possible to remove only relatively small parts of an archive s data in case the maximum allowed size of the archive is reached On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 71 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 72 The sub directories are named after the GUID of each camera p us the date and time of the most recent database record contained in the sub directory Naming structure Archive Name Recording Server GUID Camera GUID plus date and time of most recent recording Example OurArchive b82e691f 67cf 4177 a0b9 e69077d4d75a 469c37e4 28ad 48 1b bcb7 e5fd7 e5a609a 2007 04 30 14 30 20 In the example the latest recording contained in the sub directory is from twenty seconds past half past two i
413. over Server if a Fail ih racer rr A 2 In the properties pane select Enable this failover server e Editing Failover Server Properties 1 In the overview pane select the required failover server E Falove Groups Failover Group o Failover Server 17 Me Esilrmar Green 3 G 2 On the Info tab in the properties pane you are able to edit the following Ae Pane Dee eee Hare fado Gan 1 Dipenpior Host rew LDF gpt GEH Database lecabon Edesa abate 2 Enable this ladover server e Name Name of the failover server as it will appear in the Management Client in logs etc 138 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Description Optional description of the failover server for example a description of the server s physical location e Host name Non editable field displaying the network address of the failover server e UDP port The port number used for communication between failover servers By default port 8844 is used Tip The port used by the failover server for polling i e regularly checking the state of relevant recording servers is by default port number 11000 If required you can change that port number on the recording server s Failover Tab e Database location This field specifies the path to the database which the failover server should use for storing recordings while taking over from a regular recording server When the regular
414. part of your Windows Features dialog should look like this el Windows Features Turn Windows features on or off 17 To turn a feature on select ts check box To burn a Feature off clear its A A E Ba ff niternet Information Serv E O FTP Publishing r E EL Web Management Tools B 115 6 Management Compatibilty ITS 6 Management Console FA 115 6 Scripting Tools fv 115 6 WMI Compatibility o US Metabase and ITS 6 configuration compati E 115 Management Console ITS Management Scripts and Tools OL 115 Management Service J World Wide Web Services Application Development Features Common Http Features Health and Diagnostics Performance Features o Security Basic Authentication Client Certificate Mapping Authentication Digest Authentication L IIS Client Certificate Mapping Authentication IP Security Request Filtering URL Authorization Windows Authentication E Microsoft NET Framework 3 0 H O Microsoft Message Queue MSMO Server a E Print Services Pa m HAA aj es cs cs cs os EH mm El ho p1 Eee oe d SET ELT PU aia a 7 3 Click OK If Server Runs Windows 2008 Server 4 If automatic IIS installation fails you will see an error message asking you to install IIS manually In the error message box click the Install IIS Manually button 28 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 5 You will now see the Server Manager window In th
415. peaker is attached on the hardware Settings Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit basic settings for a selected speaker or for all speakers within a selected device group However if the selected device group contains 400 speakers or more the Settings tab is unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Note Content of the Settings tab may vary depending on the types of speakers selected The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 371 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual You are typically able to change values when you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table e Specifying Common Settings for All Speakers in a Device Group If using device groups see Managing Speakers you are able to quickly specify common settings for all speakers within a given device group 1 In the speaker list in the Management Client s overview pane click the required device group On the Settings tab all settings which are common to all of the device group s speakers will be listed Depending on the amount and type of speakers in
416. pecify settings for NetEVS s five different Management Server logs See Logging Settings for more information e Mail Server The Mail Server tab lets you specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail server you are going to use with your NetEVS system See Outgoing SMTP Mail Server Settings for more information e AVI Generation The AVI Generation tab lets you specify compression settings for the generation of AVI video clip files Specifying these settings is a prerequisite if you want to include AVI files in e mail notifications sent out by rule triggered notification profiles See AVI Compression Settings for more information e Network The Network tab lets you specify local IP address ranges See Managing Local IP Address Ranges for more information Output About Outputs On many devices you are able to attach external units to output ports on the device This allows you to activate deactivate lights sirens etc through NetEVS Output may be used when creating rules You can create rules that automatically activate or deactivate outputs and rules that trigger actions when the state of an output is changed Outputs can also be triggered manually from the Management Client and Ocularis Client Lite On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 225 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Devices output ports are automatically detected when you add the devices to NetEVS through the Management Client s Hardware Detection Wizard regardless of which
417. per second FPS and the rule will increase the live frame rate to 25 FPS when applied The effect will be a higher quality live video for as long as motion is detected on the camera Note that recording frame rate the frame rate with which video sequences will be Saved is specified separately and will not be affected by this rule tip If you want to permanently change the default frame rate for a camera do not use a rule Change the camera s default frame rate on the Settings tab instead Note Motion is normally detected by NetEVS when video received from cameras is analyzed This is the type of motion detection dealt with in this example However some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such hardware configurable motion detection can also be used in NetEVS rules although that is beyond the scope of this example Prerequisites This rule is based on motion detection on a specific camera Therefore motion detection must be enabled on the camera in order for the rule to work as intended Before creating a rule like this always verify the following 334 Motion detection is enabled for the camera in question To verify that motion detection has been enabled for a camera expand Devices in the Management Client s navigation pane and select Cameras This will display a list of cameras in the overview pane Select the required camera from the list and select the Motion
418. played on the web page for example if particular language versions of Ocularis Client Lite are required in your organization For this purpose you use the Download Manager e Accessing the Download Manager You access the Download Manager on the server running the Management Server software In Windows Start menu select A Programs gt Download Manager gt Download Manager e Download Manager Is Not User Rights Management Tool The Download Manager lets you control which components users are able to download and install However it is important to know that the Download Manager cannot be used for managing users rights to use the components Such rights are determined by roles you define roles in the Management Client e Default Configuration of Download Manager and Web Page On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 49 NetEVS 2 0 50 User Manual The Download Manager has a default configuration This ensures that your organization s users can access standard features without you having to set up anything The default configuration provides administrators with access to downloading recording servers the Management Client as well as video device drivers This content is displayed when the web page is automatically loaded at the end of the Management Server installation as well as when the web page is accessed by entering the URL http Management Server address port installation admin where Management Server address
419. ple you have created a rule specifying that recording should start when a door is opened being able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may also be important How Does Prebuffering Work Prebuffering is possible since NetEVS continuously receives streams of video from connected cameras unless the transfer of video from cameras has in some way been disabled Storing video from before the initial boundaries of a recording is therefore not a problem video passes through NetEVS anyway When prebuffering is enabled for a camera NetEVS continuously records video from the camera s stream and provisionally stores it in the database for a specified number of seconds before automatically deleting it unless the provisionally stored video turns out to be required for a recording in which case it is automatically added to the recording The following example illustrates how prebuffered video is added to a recording This is the stream received by NetEVS gt These are the initial boundaries of a recording as defined for example by start and stop events m However a rule specifies that recording should start five seconds prior to the start event so five seconds of prebuffered video is added On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 91 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual This is what is actually recorded a Enabling and Disabling Prebuffering Prebuffering is enabled by default with a prebuffer si
420. port it 6 Click Finish to end the activation process Note You cannot activate more licenses than you have purchased To view your total number of licenses expand Basics in the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane and select License Information If you have added more cameras than you have licenses for you must get additional licenses before you can activate them e Activating Licenses after the Grace Day Period Note If the grace day period is exceeded before activation all cameras which are not activated within the given period will become unavailable and will not be able to send data to the surveillance system If you exceed the grace day period before you activate a license the license is not lost You can simply activate the license as usual Tip Configuration added cameras defined recording servers and other settings will never be removed from the Management Client if a license is activated too late Additional Licenses Getting Additional Licenses What if you want to add or if you already have added more device channels cameras or dedicated input output boxes than you currently have licenses for In that case you must buy additional licenses before the cameras will be able to send data to your NetEVS system On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 167 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual To get additional licenses for your NetEVS system contact your OnSSI NetEVS vendor When you have received an updated license file lic wi
421. pported for the devices and firmware used Enabling Microphones When microphones are detected with the Hardware Detection Wizard they are by default disabled You can easily enable microphones when needed If a device has several microphones you can enable one some or all of them as required 1 In the navigation pane expand Servers and select Recording Servers 2 Inthe overview pane expand the relevant recording server and find the device on which the microphone is placed 3 Right click the required microphone and select Enabled Note On some devices a microphone can also be enabled disabled on the device itself typically through the device s own configuration web page If a microphone does not work after enabling it in the Management Client you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to the microphone being disabled on the device itself Specifying Microphone Properties You configure individual microphones by selecting the required microphone in the list then specifying the microphone s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane e Info Tab The Info tab lets you view and edit basic information about a selected microphone The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the microphone The name will be used whenever the microphone is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply
422. preset positions required for the patrolling profiles must be defined To define preset positions for a PTZ camera expand Devices in the Management Client s navigation pane and select Cameras Then in the overview pane expand the A Cameras folder This will display a list of all cameras Select the required PTZ camera from the list and select the Presets tab in the properties pane For details of how to define preset positions on the Presets tab see Preset Positions Once you have defined the required preset positions patrolling profiles for the PTZ camera are defined on the neighboring Patrolling tab For details of how to define patrolling profiles on the Patrolling tab see Patrolling Creating the Rule 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts then right click Rules and select Add New Rule Be o O 2 pene CTRL N E a a Validate All Rules a Refresh F5 J Tip Instead of right clicking to select Add New Rule you may simply press CTRL N on your keyboard 2 The Rule Wizard opens Type a name for the new rule in the Rule name field In this example the rule will cover a specific camera simply called PTZ Camera and how it should behave upon an activated input We therefore overwrite the default rule name e g New Rule 001 with a descriptive name lane PTZ Camera to Back Doo on Back Door Sensor lr Grip Always use a descriptive name for the rule
423. presets can subsequently be imported into NetEVS by selecting Use presets from device Note If importing presets from the camera device any presets you have previously defined for the camera in NetEVS will be removed this will affect any patrolling profiles in which these presets are used as well as any rules in which the affected patrolling profiles are used Note If you later wish to edit such device defined presets editing should take place on the camera device e Assigning a Default Preset Position If required you are able to assign one of a PTZ camera s preset positions at the camera s default preset position On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 99 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 100 Having a default preset position can be useful because it allows you to define rules specifying that the PTZ camera should go to the default preset position under particular circumstances for example after the PTZ camera has been operated manually To assign a preset position as the default simply select the required preset in your list of defined preset positions then select the default preset box below the list Only one preset position can be the default preset position Editing a Preset Position To edit an existing preset position defined in NetEVS presets imported from a device Should be edited on the device itself do the following 1 Select the required preset position in the Presets tab s list of available preset positions for the ca
424. process If archiving is not ongoing no information is displayed e Estimated completion Displays an estimated completion time for any Ongoing archiving process If archiving is not ongoing no information is displayed While archiving is ongoing a bar displays the percentage of completion e Next scheduled Displays the date and time of the next scheduled archiving Archive Wizard The Database Archiving Configuration Wizard normally just referred to as the Archive Wizard helps you create archives and manage a recording server s archiving settings What is an archive An archive is a directory to which recordings from selected cameras will be moved at scheduled intervals thus enabling you to store recordings in excess of what is possible in cameras default databases For more detailed information see About Archiving To access the wizard select the required recording server in the overview pane select the Archiving tab in the properties pane then click the Archive Wizard button Note The following describes the Archive Wizard as it appears when accessed while working with a recording server s archiving settings A different version of the wizard is available when working with a camera s archiving settings On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 273 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Welcome to the Database Archiving Configuration Wizard This wizard helps you configure and maintain archives for devices on recording servers
425. pse all texts from expanding drop down links in a help topic simply click the title of the topic on the help system s Contents tab Printing Help Topics To print a help topic navigate to the required topic and click the help window s Print button When you click the Print button a dialog box may ask you whether you wish to print the selected topic only or all topics under the selected heading When this is the case select Print the selected topic and click OK Tip When printing a selected help topic the topic will be printed as you see it on your screen Therefore if a topic contains expanding drop down links click each required drop down link to display the text in order for it to be included in your printout This allows you to create targeted printouts containing exactly the amount of information you require On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 149 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Input About Inputs On many devices you are able to attach external units to input ports on the device Input units are typically external sensors Such external sensors may for example be used for detecting if doors windows or gates are opened Input from such external input units is treated as events by NetEVS Such events can be used in rules For example you could create a rule specifying that a camera should begin recording when an input is activated and stop recording 30 seconds after the input is deactivated Devices input ports are automat
426. put The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the output The name will be used whenever the output is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar OTip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the output A description is not compulsory The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when placing the mouse pointer over the output s name in the overview pane P Red Sectos Back Doci Output y Red Sector Entrance Output _ a P Red Sector preplion Output Cutout shusted by entrance to red sector To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 227 NetEVS 2 0 228 User Manual e Hardware name Name of the hardware on which the output is situated The field is non editable However the hardware name can be changed by clicking the Go To button next to the field Clicking the Go To button will take you to the hardware information where the name is editable e Unit number Non editable fie
427. quirements it is often a good idea to create many simple rules rather than a few complex rules Even though this will lead to you having more rules it will generally make it much easier for you to maintain an overview of what your rules do Keeping your rules simple also means that you will have much more flexibility when it comes to deactivating activating individual rule elements with simple rules you can simply deactivate activate entire rules when required Wizard Guides You through Creating Rules You create and manage your rules in the Management Client In the Navigation pane expand the Rules and Alerts folder then select Rules When you create rules you will be guided by the Rule Wizard Rule Wizard Hara Caras 2 Motor seed Record Derep Records math Pesser pobla wher mobon a Gesched on Camera 2 Acie E Sep 5 piopi Fast Deke ado abordo pilah O Mowe camera bo i piersi position Set device output lo cras _ Send robheabor la cprableo iHe ree log entry Example of the Rule Wizard during the creation of a TE The Rule Wizard provides a highly intuitive approach e It helps you stay focused by listing only relevant options e It ensures that a rule will not contain missing elements e Based on your rule s content it automatically suggests suitable stop actions i e what should take place when the rule no longer applies ensuring that you will not unintentionally create a nev
428. r On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 367 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Database Management Manage individual cameras microphones and speakers through the Database Configuration Wizard The wizard conveniently guides you through the processes of emptying or moving databases Note Recordings will only be saved in the databases when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met To manage a database select the required camera microphone or speaker in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane then select the Record tab in the properties pane On the Record tab click the Database Wizard button to open the Database Configuration Wizard When you open the Database Configuration Wizard this way it lets you select between two options empty or move the database Database Configuration Wizard Welcome to the Database Configuration Wizard O On S S This wizard helps you configure and maintain databases for devices on recording servers NetEVS Ev O Empty database for device Move database for device To continue click Next Database Configuration Wizard displaying database management options Tip The Database Configuration Wizard lets you select different options if opened while working with a recording server see Recording Server Database Management e Empty Database for Device To empty the database of the selected camera microphone or speaker do the following in the Database Configura
429. r of preview images you want in your preview pane as well as their frame rate select Options gt General from the Too s menu e Show Recording Streams By default the information shown with preview images in the preview pane will concern cameras live streams shown in green text If you want information about recording streams instead select Show Recording Streams Recording stream information will be shown in red text Action Menu de Edit View Action Tools He an Add New Device Group CTRL N qa Edt Device Group Members ag Delete Device Group DELETE Rename Device Group FE FY Go To Hardware a Refresh FS Example only Action menu changes depending on context _ The Action menu s content depends on your selection in the navigation pane and therefore the type of work you are doing The content of the Action menu corresponds to the menu shown when you right click an element in the navigation pane On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Refresh is always available and reloads the requested information from the Management Server Especially useful when two or more administrators are working with the surveillance system at the same time Commands available when working with e Licensing The Action menu features commands concerning license activation e Activate License Online lets you activate and update your license through the internet e Activate License Offline l
430. r Settings window appears Verify change the following settings e Management Server hostname IP address Lets you specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the Management Server to which the recording server Should be connected This information is necessary in order for the recording server to be able to communicate with the Management Server e Management Server port Lets you specify the port number to be used when communicating with the Management Server Default is port 9993 although you are able to change this if required 5 When ready click OK 6 To start the recording server service again right click the notification area s recording server icon and select Start Recording Server Service On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 239 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual start Recording Server Service Show Stabus Messages Change Settings About Exit Recording Server Manager Database Management Recording Server Database Management When working with a recording server you manage the recording server s database storage areas through the Database Configuration Wizard which conveniently guides you through each process What is a storage area A storage area is a directory in which database content primarily recordings from the cameras connected to the recording server is stored A default storage area is automatically created for each recording server when the recording ser
431. r moving databases Note Recordings will only be saved in the databases when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met TO manage a database select the required camera microphone or speaker in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane then select the Record tab in the properties pane On the Record tab click the Database Wizard button to open the Database Configuration Wizard When you open the Database Configuration Wizard this way it lets you select between two options empty or move the database Database Configuration Wizard Welcome to the Database Configuration Wizard urati O O n S S This wizard helps you configure and maintain databases for devices on recording servers NetEVS d O Empty database for device Move database for device Database Configuration Wizard displaying database management options OrTip The Database Configuration Wizard lets you select different options if opened while working with a recording server see Recording Server Database Management 198 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Empty Database for Device To empty the database of the selected camera microphone or speaker do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Empty databases for device and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the check boxes next to the databases you want to empty Empl
432. r on your system you have several options for managing added IP hardware Note Configuration and management of individual camera settings such as a camera s recording settings input settings and output settings takes place on a more detailed level see Managing Cameras Managing Inputs and Managing Outputs 258 Editing Basic Hardware Settings IP etc You are able to edit basic settings such as IP address host name for added hardware 1 Under the required recording server in the overview pane right click the required hardware unit From the menu that appears select Edit IP Hardware Recording Server dp ln Delete IP Hardware DELETE E Alert Rename IP Hardware F2 a Refresh FS This will open the Edit Hardware window in which you are able to edit the following On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Name Name with which the hardware will appear in the NetEVS Manager s lists etc Tip You are also able to quickly change the name of a hardware unit by selecting Rename IP Hardware from the menu e Description Optional A description or other information about the hardware unit The description will among other places appear when you pause your mouse pointer over the hardware unit in the overview pane Example e Hardware URL URL IP address or host name of the hardware unit e User name User name required to access and use the hardware u
433. r recording server is up and running again recordings from the failover server will be merged into the relevant databases on the regular recording server When ready click Next 7 A failover server has two services e A Failover Server service which handles the processes of taking over from the regular recording server e A Recording Server service which enables the failover server to act as a recording server while the regular recording server is unavailable The wizard will ask you to select a user account under which the services will run On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 25 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Service Loe On Setup Sence hbd log on ss 9 The predefined socouri G Tha eocoure Passa Carlen tb Mets deco The Serra sere vel be slanted sra Hii moart les computer is member of a domain de socouri rust either be Local Saben oro dor ube accu How to Select a User Account a Select This account b Click the Browse button This will open the Se ect User window c In the Se ect User window verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If not click the Locations button to browse for the required domain d In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user name Orip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the name you have entered is recognized e Click OK f Specify the password for the user account in th
434. r s menu bar select Too s gt Options This will open the Options dialog 2 In the Options dialog select the Network tab 3 Select the unwanted IP address range 4 Click the Remove button 5 When ready click OK 170 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Logging About Logging In the Management Client you are able to view five different logs related to the Management Server e The System Log records system related information e The Audit Log records remote user activity e The Alert Log records alerts triggered by rules e The Event Log records event related information e The Rule Log records rules in which the Make new lt log entry gt action has been specified NetEVS has a number of default settings related to its five different logs For information about how to verify or change these settings see Logging Settings You are able to export logs and save the exported logs as tab delimited text txt files ata location of your choice see Exporting Logs for more information Logging Settings NetEVS has a number of default settings related to its five different Management Server logs the System Log the Event Log the Audit Log the Rule Log and the Alert Log To verify or change these settings do the following 1 Go to the NetEVS Manager s menu bar and select Tools gt Options 2 In the Options window select the General tab On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 171 NetEVS 2 0 User
435. r the cameras in question the procedure is described under Camera Database Management Upon doing this you will be able to remove the storage area 3 The storage area will be removed without further warning A bar displays how the removal job progresses SR RR SRR RRR RRR RRR EA When the removal job is complete you will be informed whether the job was successful or whether it failed If the job failed you will be able view a status message indicating what caused the failure Remove thotage aiea Example Indication of successful removal job Sbabus O E Example Indication of failed removal job with link to status message 4 Click Finish On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 243 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Recording Server Properties Info Tab You are able to verify or edit the name and description of a selected recording server on the Info tab To access the Info tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Info tab in the properties pane Properties Recording server information Name Recording Server 1 Description Covers Sector 1 First Floor Physicall located in room 6022 For hardware queries contact Joe atx 1234 Host name OnsSsI_1233 Local web server address http 192 168 11 244 7563 Public web server address Time zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada Ed Info g Settings B Storage E Archiving Failover ES lt gt Info tab d
436. r thus uses the token to validate the client s token against the local time in the recording server s own time zone The validity of a token expires after a while It is therefore important that time on your Management Server and all of your organization s recording servers is synchronized minute and second wise hours may of course be different in different locations around the world If time on the servers is not synchronized you may experience that a recording server is ahead of the Management server s time When a recording server is ahead of the Management server s time it may result in a client s token expiring on the recording server earlier than intended by the Management Server Under unfortunate circumstances you might even experience that a recording server claims that a client s token has already expired when it receives it effectively preventing the client from viewing recordings from the recording server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 397 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual How to synchronize time on your organization s servers depends on your network configuration internet access use of domain controllers etc Often servers on a domain are already time synchronized against the domain controller If so you should be fine as long as all required servers belong to the domain in question If your servers are not already time synchronized it will be necessary to synchronize the servers time against a time server preferably the sa
437. ras are by default enabled Microphones speakers inputs and outputs are by default disabled This means that microphones speakers inputs and outputs must be individually enabled before they can be used on the NetEVS system The simple reason for this is that surveillance systems inherently rely on cameras whereas the use of microphones etc is highly individual depending on organizations needs Under the required recording server in the overview pane enabled disabled devices are indicated the following way examples show indications for an output Disabled Enabled On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 261 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual The same method for enabling disabling is used for cameras microphones speakers inputs and outputs Enabling 1 Under the required recording server in the overview pane right click the required camera input or output 2 From the menu that appears select Enabled 3 H Recording Server 1 o o 3 Abingdon Road Entrance Cam 10 10 50 7 p Camera 21 ep input ap de Dupa Rename Device FZ 153 Allerton Sh PAEZ p Cameri Enabled d p Ingai J Refresh FS Disabling To disable a device for example for licensing or performance purposes simply clear the Enabled selection in the menu e Renaming Individual Devices 1 Under the required recording server in the overview pane right click the required device
438. ration Section s Fields The Database Configuration section contains the following fields e Database Name Non editable field displaying the name of the database used for the speaker e Database Path Non editable field displaying the path to the database used for the speaker e Used Space Non editable field displaying the current size of the database for the speaker e Database Wizard The Database Configuration section features a Database Wizard button Clicking the Database Wizard button will start the Database Configuration Wizard with which you are able to quickly and conveniently empty or move the database for the speaker Archiving Archiving Tab You are able to view and manage the archiving settings of a selected speaker on the Archiving tab Note Being able to manage a speaker s archiving settings requires that one or more archives have been defined on the recording server to which the speaker belongs See About Archiving for more information Note Another tab called Archiving will be displayed if you view the properties of a recording server this is where you create and manage the recording server s archives For more information see Archiving tab Recording Server Properties What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a speaker s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the speaker s def
439. rchive Unavailable in the following Occurs when an archive for a recording server becomes unavailable for example if the connection to an archive located on a network drive is lost When this is the case it will not be possible to archive recordings You can use the event to for example trigger a notification profile so an e mail notification is automatically sent to relevant people in your organization Occurs when a database disk is full A database disk is considered to be full when there is less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk In order to prevent operating system failures due to insufficient disk space the oldest records in the database will automatically be deleted for all cameras recording on the disk in question when less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk containing the database regardless of any time or size limits specified for the database This will help ensure that at least 500 MB of disk space will be available for operating system use Occurs if a database becomes corrupted in which case NetEVS will automatically attempt two different database repair methods a fast repair and a thorough repair Occurs when a storage area for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable see Database Storage Area Unavailable in the following You can for example use the event to start recording if it has been stopped by a Database Storage Area Unavailable event see the following Oc
440. rchive Wizard select Remove archive on recording server and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the archive you want to remove Make your selection by selecting the check box next to the name of the required archive dore Name Path Dence Ucege Dalsi Note that you cannot remove an archive if use of the archive has been specified for one or more cameras or if the archive is the recording server s default archive e What to Do if the Archive Is In Use The number of cameras using the archive will be displayed in the Device Usage column duchore Hama Path Device Ursae D Oustechnve CAD unAnchinee G gi OOE The number must be zero before you can remove the archive To select another archive for the cameras or disable archiving for the cameras do the following a By clicking the number in the Device Usage column you are able to see which cameras are using the archive On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 279 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Message Report EJES The followang dences ara using the wehime Blue Sector Ertr nce Cam Example only in this case a single camera is using the archive b Leave the Archive Wizard by clicking Cancel c Go to the Archiving tab for each camera by selecting the required camera in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane and either select another archive for the camera or disable archiving for the camera d When ready start t
441. rded as motion This way you are able to allow insignificant changes which should not be regarded as motion On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Pixels in which motion is detected are highlighted in green in the preview image Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted OTip Your exact sensitivity slider setting is indicated by a number from 0 300 in the right side of the slider This way you are able to compare the exact sensitivity slider setting between cameras Orip If you find the concept of motion detection sensitivity difficult to grasp try dragging the slider to the left towards the highest possible sensitivity 0 position The more you drag the slider towards the highest possible sensitivity position the more of the preview image becomes highlighted in green This is because with a very high sensitivity level even the slightest change in each pixel will be regarded as motion Motion Slider The Motion slider determines how many pixels in the camera s images image must change before it is regarded as motion The selected motion level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion indication bar above the sliders The black vertical line in the motion indication serves as a threshold When detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level the bar changes color from green to red indicating a positive detection Motion indication bar
442. rding server On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 139 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Failover Server Service Administration When you have installed a failover server you are able to check the state of the Failover Server service by looking at the Failover Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the failover server The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Failover Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray it is located at the far right of the Management Server computer s Windows taskbar PL EN Q A Ed 10 33 am Example Failover Server service icon in notification area note that failover servers also have a Recording Server service other icon e Failover Server Service State Icons The following icons represent the states of the Failover Server service LE Failover Server service is enabled and started The failover server must be enabled through the Management Client see Managing Failover Servers and the service must be started in order for the failover server to be able to take over from regular recording servers ta Failover Server service is stopped To start the Failover Server service right click the icon and select Start Failover Server Service LE Failover Server service is starting Appears when the Failover Server service is in the process of starting Under normal circumstances the icon will a
443. rdware is capable of creating events themselves For example some cameras are themselves able to detect motion or static moving objects and their detections can be used as events in NetEVS Such events must obviously be configured on the hardware before they can be used in NetEVS therefore they are called hardware configurable events Read more about hardware configurable events for cameras inputs and microphones respectively Events Overview When creating an event based rule in the Rule Wizard see About Rules and Managing Rules you are able to select between a number of different events 124 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Selec tan Event El gt ie i gt i Y Moton 5lopped 9 Hra Lorbgursble A epu Actores T Input Changed Input Deactivated Moon End event T Hotin Slated event TIn k Comrramicabon Eno E Comercio Stared T Commision Slopped TE Feed Overa Slanted K Feed Overicw Slapped zal Select an Event dialog from the Rule Wizard In order for you to get a good overview selectable events are listed in groups according to whether they are e Related to plugins aA Plugins e Dependent on hardware configuration 12 Hardware Contiguable e Built into NetEVS itself eu e Related to recording servers Recording Servers e User defined events Y User defined Each type of event is described in the following CTA PESTO Motion Started Occurs when NetEVS d
444. re detection NetEVS automatically scans for available hardware within one or more specified IP address ranges With assisted hardware detection you manually specify the IP address of each required device Both options offer the possibility of automatically detecting the correct hardware drivers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 63 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual LI verify that each recording server s storage areas will meet your needs See Recording Server Database Management what is a storage area A storage area is a directory in which the databases containing recordings from the cameras connected to the recording server are stored each individual camera database by default has a maximum size of 5 GB A default storage area is automatically created for each recording server when the recording server is installed on the system Connected cameras databases are stored in the recording server s default storage area unless you specifically define that another storage area should be used for storing the databases of particular cameras If required a wizard lets you add further storage areas on the recording server computer itself or at another location for example on a network drive edit which storage area should be the default area etc Dlverify that each recording server s archiving settings will meet your needs See About Archiving What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default dat
445. red for your patrolling profile Select Preset Back Dhow Canned Food Sechon t Diary Product Sechon Foach Produce Sechon db Sid Piscina Feed 5echon ate Hound Goods hector 50 Diit Sortie Ga DAAROOR 4 Click OK The selected preset positions are added to the list of preset positions for the patrolling profile Moie Daytime Patrolling te ate Back Dou tr Canned Foods Section ts Dary Products Section eo 5 The preset position at the top of the list will be used as the first stop when the camera patrols according to the patrolling profile the preset position in second position from the top will be the second stop and so forth If required change the sequence by selecting the required preset position and using the up down buttons DE Tip If required you can easily add more preset positions to the list by clicking the Add button or remove unwanted preset positions from the list by selecting the unwanted preset position then clicking the Remove button e Specifying How Long to Stay at Each Preset Position for When patrolling the PTZ camera will by default remain for five seconds at each preset position specified in the patrolling profile before it moves on to the next preset position To change the number of seconds for which the PTZ camera will remain at a specific preset position do the following 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 In the list of pre
446. refore not in itself guarantee that audio feeds will automatically be fed to the NetEVS system as the default rule may subsequently have been deactivated or modified IMPORTANT While the default rule enables access to connected microphones and speakers audio feeds immediately upon installing the system it does not guarantee that audio will be recorded as recording settings must be specified separately IMPORTANT Although what is being said through a speaker can be recorded and archived there is currently no way of playing back or exporting such recorded outgoing audio Features for playing back and exporting recorded outgoing audio will be available in subsequent releases as soon as possible e Default Record on Motion Rule NetEVS comes with a number of default rules one of them is the Default Record on Motion Rule The rule ensures that as long as motion is detected in video from cameras the video will be recorded provided recording is enabled for the cameras in question recording is by default enabled IMPORTANT While the default rule specifies recording based on detected motion it does not guarantee that video will be recorded as individual cameras recording may On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 307 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 308 have been disabled for one or more cameras Even when recording is enabled Keep in mind however that the quality of recordings may be affected by individual camera s recording settings
447. required changes and click OK when ready e Accepting Received Commands As part of the image exchange between computers on the NetMatrix system other computers exactly which computers are defined as part of your NetMatrix Monitor application s configuration are able to send commands to your NetMatrix Monitor The commands typically tell your NetMatrix Monitor to connect to or disconnect from an image feed from a particular camera As part of the configuration your NetMatrix Monitor may have been set up to automatically accept all received commands in which case new video feeds will automatically be displayed in your NetMatrix Monitor window If your NetMatrix Monitor has not been set up to automatically accept all received commands you will be prompted to accept all received commands before they are executed When a command is received a small dialog will be displayed in the bottom right corner of your screen The dialog will display the IP address or host name of the sender as well as information about the command itself To accept the command click the Accept button If you do not want to accept the command click the Decline button e Alerts upon Executed Commands As part of the configuration your NetMatrix Monitor may have been set up to automatically display alerts each time a command is executed When this is the case a small alert box will be displayed in the bottom right corner of your screen upon each executed command
448. requires that at least one device on your system has an audio unit connected The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when pre alarm images are received from a camera Pre alarm images are available for selected cameras only such cameras are capable of sending of one or more single still On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual Input Activated Input Changed Input Deactivated Motion Started HW Motion Stopped HW NetEVS 2 0 images from immediately before an event took place to the Surveillance system via SMTP e mail Note This type of event requires that at least one camera on your system supports pre alarm images The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself tip Consider using prebuffering defined on the Record tab as an alternative to pre alarm images Occurs when an external input unit connected to an input port on a device is activated Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an input port The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when the state of an external input unit connected to an input port on a device is changed regardless of which state the external input unit is changed to Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an input port The event will not work u
449. rerequisites are described in How to Create Typical Rules How a Rule Is Triggered Rules can be triggered by two types of conditions e Events When events occur on the surveillance system for example when motion is detected when the system receives input from external sensors On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 etc e Time When specific periods of time are entered for example Thursday 16th August 2007 from 07 00 to 07 59 or every Saturday and Sunday e What You Can Cover in a Rule Your exact number of options depends on the type of rule you want to create and on the number of devices available on your system Rules however provide a high degree of flexibility You are able to combine event and time conditions you are able to specify several actions in a single rule and very often you are able to create rules covering several or all of the devices on your system You can make your rules as simple or complex as required For example you can create very simple time based rules Example Very Simple Time Based Rule On Mondays between 08 30 and 11 30 time condition Camera 1 and Camera 2 should start recording action when the time period begins and stop recording stop action when the time period ends And you can create very simple event based rules involving events on one device only Example Very Simple Event Based Rule When motion is detected event condition on Camera 1 Camera
450. rform stop action on Motion End from Camera 1 This is just what we want we do not need to change any of the wizard s suggestions However we still need to define exactly which kind of stop action should take place when motion ends on Camera 1 12 Click Next to move to the next step of the wizard 13 In this step the wizard suggests one or more stop actions based on the previously selected start actions In this example Based on the start action set frame rate in our rule description the wizard automatically suggests the stop action restore default frame rate It furthermore suggests that the default frame rate should be restored immediately after the last detected motion lest Edk the mle descopitn chcx an underined fem Perform an action on Motion Start from Camera 1 set live frame rate on the device on which event ocurre to 25 frames per second Pertorm stop action on Motion End from era 1 restore deta ne frame rate immediately This is also just what we want we do not need to change it although by clicking the immediately link we could have specified a delay of e g three seconds 14 Your rule is by default active meaning that once you have created it it will be applied as soon as the rule s conditions are met If you do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Rule Wizard window Lamera 1 Li vw Arte QTip You can always activate deactiv
451. rnal output unit connected to an output port on a device is deactivated Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an output port Occurs when a user of Ocularis Client Lite no longer requests a live stream from a device Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is started on a camera Note This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session as opposed to a PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically triggered by an event is stopped on a camera Note This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras Occurs when recording is started Occurs when recording is stopped Occurs when settings on a device are successfully changed Occurs when an attempt is made to change settings on a On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 129 NetEVS 2 0 Changed Error q Archive Available Archive Unavailable Database Disk Full Database Repair Database Storage Area Available Database Storage Area Unavailable 130 User Manual device and the attempt is unsuccessful Occurs when an archive for a recording server becomes available after having been unavailable see A
452. roups with the selected role should be able to use The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half you select the view group for which you want to specify role rights In the lower half you then specify how users groups with the selected role should be able to access the selected view group e Visible Determines whether users groups with the selected role will be able to see the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in access clients e ReadOnly Determines whether users groups with the selected role will be able to make changes to the selected view group and any views contained in the view group in access clients If ReadOnly is selected users groups with the selected role will not be able to make changes When you make selections for a view group the icon representing the view group in the upper half of the tab changes to reflect your selections View group for which no selections have been made e View group for which Visible has been selected e EaView group for which Visible and ReadOnly have been selected e View group for which ReadOnly has been selected e NetDVMS Server Rights Note Specifying role rights on the NetDVMS Servers tab is only relevant if you have integrated NetDVMS servers into your NetEVS solution see Integrating NetDVMS Servers for more information The tab is divided into two halves In the upper half you select the NetDVMS server for which you want to specify role
453. rrently apply for some but not all devices within a device group You can still select or clear such square filled check boxes but note that your choice will in that case apply for a devices within the device group Alternatively select the individual devices in the device group to verify exactly which devices the right in question applies for e PTZ Rights Relevant only if PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras are available on your NetEVS system the PTZ tab lets you specify which features users groups with the selected role should be able to use The PTZ tab is divided into two halves In the upper half you select the PTZ camera or device group for which you want to specify settings note that only PTZ cameras and device groups containing PTZ cameras are available for selection In the lower half you then specify what users groups with the selected role Should be able to do when operating the selected PTZ cameras in Ocularis Client Lite On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 289 NetEVS 2 0 290 User Manual DB Cameras y Bulding A Cameras 5 Bulking E Cameras La Al Cameras p Camera 1 ler PTZ control Tiue PTZ Priority hel ecru ns scin sten of PTZ presets False Allow PTZ control Allow PanTitZocm contra BS Users i Groups 59 Device a gt PTZ Y Speech E Ap lt gt The following rights are available e Allow PTZ Control Determines whether users groups with the selected role are able to use t
454. rver Manager The Recording Server Settings window appears You are able to change the following settings Management Server hostname IP address Lets you specify the IP address example 123 123 123 123 or host name example ourserver of the NetEVS Management Server to which the recording server should be connected This information is necessary in order for the recording server to be able to communicate with the Management Server Management Server port Lets you specify the port number to be used when communicating with the NetEVS Management Server Default is port 9993 although you are able to change this if required Web server port Lets you specify the port number to be used for handling web server requests for example for handling PTZ camera control commands and for browse and live requests from Ocularis Client Lite Default is port 7563 although you are able to change this if required Alert server port Lets you specify the port number to be used when the recording server listens for alert socket TCP information some devices use TCP alert socket for sending event messages Default is port 5432 although you are able to change this if required SMTP server port Lets you specify the port number to be used when the recording server listens for SMTP information some devices use SMTP e mail for sending event messages Default is port 25 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 43 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual although you ar
455. rver running Windows Vista or Windows 2008 Server Internet Information Services IIS is under normal circumstances automatically installed This happens when you click the Internet Information Services step in the NetEVS Management Server Installation window If the automatic installation fails you can install IIS manually e Solution Install IIS Manually The way in which you install IIS manually depends on the server s Windows version If Server Runs Windows Vista 1 If automatic IIS installation fails you will see an error message asking you to install IIS manually In the error message box click the Install ITS Manually button 2 You will now see the Windows Features dialog In this dialog locate Internet Information Services e Select the Internet Information Services top level check box and expand it e Select Web Management Tools expand it select IIS 6 Management Compatibility expand it and select IIS 6 Management Console IIS 6 Scripting Tools IIS 6 WMI Compatibility and IIS Metabase and IIS 6 configuration compatibility e Select ITS Management Console On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 27 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual e Select World Wide Web Services expand it and select Application Development Features Common Http Features Health and Diagnostics Performance features and Security e Expand Security and select Basic Authentication Request filtering and Windows Authentication When ready the IIS
456. rver service is stopping Appears when the Recording Server service is in the process of stopping Under normal circumstances the icon will after a short while change to Recording server is stopped aq A Indeterminate state Appears when the Recording Server service is initially loaded and until the first state information is received upon which the icon will under normal circumstances change to the Recording server is starting icon and subsequently to the Recording server is running icon Ha Recording Server service is running offline Typically appears when the Recording Server service is running but the Management Server service is not E Recording Server must be authorized by administrator Appears when the Recording Server service is loaded for the first time Administrators authorize the recording server through the NetEVS Management Client In the Management Client s navigation pane expand the Servers list select the Recording Server node then in the overview pane right click the required On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 41 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 42 recording server and select Authorize Recording Server Starting the Recording Server Service 1 Right click the notification area s recording server icon 2 From the menu that appears select Start Recording Server Service start Recording Server Service Show Stabus Messages Change Settings About Exit Recording Server Manager Stopping the Recording
457. s http Management Server address port installation admin where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server This will open the Management Server s built in web page If not accessing the web page on the Management Server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the Management Server A et EVS noes ca of administrative applications which are downloaded and insta lled fr rom this page Use pplications can n be rad nd on Sika pae ult down aad page If you want to view this page in another language use the ri nguage menu in the top right cor Video Device Drivers Installer Video Device Drivers enable supported devices cameras video encoders etc to communicate with the surveillance system Video Device Drivers must be installed on each recording server Video Device Drivers Installer 3 9 Device Pack Management Client Installer The NetEVS Management Client is the system s administration application used for setting up hardware recording servers security etc Management Client Installer 2 0b Recording Server Installer The NetEVS Recording Server has features for recording of video and audio feeds and for communication with cameras and other devices in the surveillance system Recording Server Installer 2 0b English 3 The web page is available i
458. s and click Finish when ready 3 Now open a browser and connect to the Management Server s web page at the following address http Management Server address port installation where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server 4 From the web page install the new version of Ocularis Client Lite On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 37 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Services Basic Administration Management Server Service Management Server Service Administration When the NetEVS Management Server software is installed you are able to check the state of the Management Server service by looking at the Management Server service icon in the notification area of the computer running the Management Server The notification area icon also lets you start and stop the Management Server service view status messages etc Tip The notification area is occasionally also known as the system tray it is located at the far right of the Management Server computer s Windows taskbar EN a 10 33 AM Example Management Server service icon in notification area e Management Server Service State Icons The following notification area icons represent the states of the Management Server service E Management Server service is running To stop a running Management Server service right click the ico
459. s and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically able to change values when you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 15 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table PTZ Tab The PTZ tab is only available if the selected hardware is a video encoder What is a video encoder A video encoder also known as video server is a piece of hardware which is able to stream video from a number of connected cameras Video encoders contain image digitizers making it possible to connect analog cameras to a network For video encoders the use of PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom must be enabled on the hardware level before you can use the PTZ features of PTZ cameras attached to the video encoder The Settings tab lets you enable the use of PTZ separately for each of the video encoder s channels To access the PTZ tab select the required hardware in the overview pane then select the PTZ tab in the properties pane Note Not all video encoders support the use of PTZ cameras Even video encoders which support the use of PTZ cameras may require configuration such as installation of additional drivers typically through accessing a browser based configuration interface on the device s IP address before PTZ cameras can be used 264 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0
460. s to preset positions o False Users groups with the selected role will not be able to move the selected PTZ camera s to preset positions o True Users groups with the selected role will be able to move the selected PTZ camera s to preset positions Note For the rights to work the role must also be granted the right to view Ocularis Client Lite in Live mode This right is granted as part of the application rights Furthermore the PTZ camera s must be visible in Ocularis Client Lite you determine as part of the device rights e Speech Rights Relevant only if loudspeakers are available on your NetEVS system the Speech tab is divided into two halves In the upper half you select the speaker or device group for which you want to specify settings In the lower half you then specify what users groups with the selected role should be able to do when operating the selected speaker s in Ocularis Client Lite The following rights are available e Speak live Determines whether users with the selected role will be able talk through the selected speaker s e Speak priority When several Ocularis Client Lite users want to talk through the same speaker at the same time conflicts may occur This setting lets you alleviate the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected speaker s by users groups with the selected role Specify a priority from Very low to Very high Example You specify that the role Security Manager shoul
461. s cl D Cameras Lab Cameras D Lab Cam 1 lt P Lab Cam 2 p Lab Cam 3 ap LabCam 5 Lab Cam amp Lab Cam 7 Lab Cam 8 2 Lab Cam 9 Lab Entrance Cam Red Sector Cameras gt Retal rea PTZ Cameras Camera list in this example device groups are used to group cameras The camera list provides an overview of all cameras on your system e Configuring Individual Cameras Configure individual cameras by selecting the required camera in the list then specifying the camera s required settings on the tabs in the Properties pane e The Info tab for managing the selected camera s name etc e The Settings tab for managing selected camera s general settings e The Record tab for managing the selected camera s recording and database storage settings e The Presets tab for managing the selected camera s preset positions tab is only available if the selected camera is a PTZ camera PTZ is short for 78 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Pan Tilt Zoom The Patrolling tab for managing the selected camera s patrolling profiles tab is only available if the selected camera is a PTZ camera The Archiving tab for managing the selected camera s archiving settings Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from the camera s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving
462. s finished searching it will list detected devices Initially the list will only contain known hardware i e devices for which the wizard is automatically able to detect a hardware driver The wizard is able to automatically detect hardware drives for a very large number of devices Tip For a preview image from camera devices in the list click the browser button Ej to access the camera s default web page You may be asked to provide the user name and password for the device when accessing it this way 6 Optional To see any devices for which the wizard has not automatically been able to detect a hardware driver select the Show unknown hardware check box This will include any unknown hardware in the list Such unknown devices will be indicated by question mark icon For such devices you are able to manually specify user name password and hardware driver Remember to select the Include check box for each manually specified device When ready click Next 7 On the last step of the wizard verify the information then click Finish 8 The devices are added to the recording server and will appear in the NetEVS Manager s lists Recording Server cy Ho Recording Server 1 a EB Ame 207 Nebwork Camera 10 70 50 37 p Lab Cam 4 ofp Input 12 yy Output 10 Se Ante 207 Network Canmera 10 10 52 3 Blue Sector Cam 3 ap Input 18 ud Output 16 Axis 207 Metwork Camera 10 10 92 5 Example of added dev
463. s on select one of the following solutions e Solution 1 Enable Web Server HTTP Service This solution lets you enable Management Server login without having to Switch Windows Firewall off 1 On the Windows Firewall dialog s Advanced tab click the Settings button in the Network Connection Settings section 2 On the Advanced Settings dialog s Services tab make sure the Web Server HTTP option is selected 3 When ready click OK twice to close the Windows Firewall related dialogs e Solution 2 Switch Windows Firewall off Note that switching Windows Firewall off may leave the computer vulnerable to access by unauthorized users unless another firewall is used to protect the computer 32 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 On the Windows Firewall dialog s General tab select Off 2 Click OK e Issue Changes to SQL Server Location Prevents Database Access This is an issue if using an MS SQL Server database as the NetEVS Management Server database If the location of the SQL Server is changed for example by changing the host name of the computer running the SQL Server access to the database will be lost e Solution Run Management Server Database Installation Step Again See Management Server Installation When running the database installation you will during the database preparation process be asked whether you want to create a new database use an existing database or overwrite an exist
464. s pane 214 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Properties Sena niicemahon TANTI Liri Phage Fand bh JPEG creared ine 5 C MPEG O bx GP inio de Settings Shesms Recod LO Archiving Y Ever The tab will by default list a single stream the selected camera s default stream used for live video as well as for video which is being recorded for playback purposes e How to Add a Second Stream 1 On the Streams tab click the Add button This will add a second stream to the list you cannot have more than two streams 2 In the Stream column select the required type of stream 3 If you want to use the stream for live video select the check box in the Live column Leave the check box cleared if you only want to use the stream for video which will be recorded You can use the same stream for both live and recorded video if required You cannot use two different streams for the same purpose for example for live video 4 If you want to use the stream for recorded video select the check box in the Record column Leave the check box cleared if you only want to use the stream for live video Note how the selection in the Plugins column always follows the stream you have selected for recorded video This is because the integrated plugin which NetEVS uses for motion detection is always applied on the video stream which will be recorded 5 Click the Save button in NetEVS Manager s toolbar daran
465. scanning software on the computer on which the camera databases you want to archive are located or on a computer to which data is archived it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning all the data which is being archived This may affect system performance negatively Also virus scanning software may temporarily lock each file it scans which may further impact system performance negatively If possible you should therefore disable any virus scanning of camera databases and archiving locations Frequently Asked Questions about Archiving Can I Create an Archive on a Network Drive Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself or at another location which can be reached by NetEVS for example on a network drive What Happens when the Maximum Size of an Archive is Reached On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 When you create archives through the Archive Wizard you specify a maximum size limit for the archive in days and gigabytes When either of the two maximum limits is reached recordings in excess of the specified number of days gigabytes will be removed However in order not to remove more recordings than necessary excess recordings will be removed in chunks of approximately one hour s worth of recordings What Happens if a Scheduled Archiving Fails If a scheduled archiving fails for example because the archive is located on
466. se before the initial boundaries of a recording Use of prebuffering can be highly advantageous It allows you to save audio from before the events or times used to start recordings How Does Prebuffering Work Prebuffering is possible since NetEVS continuously receives streams of audio from connected microphones unless the transfer of audio from microphones has in some way been disabled Storing audio from before the initial boundaries of a recording is therefore not a problem audio passes through NetEVS anyway When prebuffering is enabled for a microphone NetEVS continuously records audio from the microphone s stream and provisionally stores it in the database for a specified number of seconds before automatically deleting it unless the provisionally stored audio turns out to be required for a recording in which case it is automatically added to the recording The following example illustrates how prebuffered audio is added to a recording This is the stream received by NetEVS a On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 203 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 204 These are the initial boundaries of a recording as defined for example by start and stop events However a rule specifies that recording should start five seconds prior to the start event so five seconds of prebuffered audio is added This is what is actually recorded Enabling and Disabling Prebuffering Prebuffering is by default enabled with a prebuffer size
467. se 136 Creating Fallo ver SOU DSi A E A a 136 Adding Failover Servers to a GroUPuiianaana a 137 Editing Failover Group Properties occcccocccnnnanccccncccn nana rar rre 137 Failover Server Service Administration 0cooccccccccccccnnnnnnnrrcnrrcna rara rro 140 HaraWware Detection WizZa diria adan 143 FICID SS te AAA a 148 Using the BUEN EID SYSTEM arin a A T A A 148 Navigating the Built in Help Syst M arceri naa N 148 HNK Im Ae TODI Seurue a A aauataoneneaeannas 149 PANINO HEIDA ODI C Siorra A AA 149 PUE a Ce eee o ot ry er en ee 150 ADOUU TIPUS tasas 150 Manadginda IDU ad idad dde 150 Defining Input Related Rules ccccccsccssseeeeeeeeeecccnseeeeeeeesseeggeenatteesessaguaes 156 GY OU scan priests wiaw e an 158 Customizing the Management Client s LayOUt occccccccccccnnccccnnncnna nara 158 A O ee nan ie anne ee pe Sener ct eee ree 164 ADOULE EICCNSING artista 164 Viewing Your License INfOrMatiOn ccccc cece cece eeseeee seen ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaaes 165 LNCENSEACEIV AUIOM E ss 166 Additonal IcenNSES ani a a e eas wee aeeaawenves 167 Focal IP Aadress Rahe Sendra a TAT 169 Managing Local IP Address RangeS atinada 169 LOGGING seanna a a T E lactea cidad 171 ADOUELO IT E A E dd 171 Logging SENOS O 171 LOQ S canes dteresigev ade veer deel ate RNE 173 EXDO otro ctra sean mauge sages conse argo 182 NCAA AA den muon ea hese miner aces 185 Managing NetMatix RECIDICNUS seais ii 185 Defining Rules Sending Video to NetMatr
468. select Roles Then select the required role in the overview pane Mame Pa Administrators Buling B Securty Stat i Ei Debina Ava In the properties pane select the Users amp Groups tab On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 297 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual di Users t Groupe EP Device af PTZ e Speech E Appkcation Y Use 3 On the Users Groups tab click the Add button This will open the Select Users and Groups dialog Select Users or Groups Azi 2eect tree obert bape Users or Groups Object Types Erc theg location Entes the obgect names bo select examples PEE 4 In the Select Users or Groups window verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If not click the Locations button to browse for the required domain 5 In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user names initials or other types of identifier which Active Directory will be able to recognize Tip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the names initials etc you have typed are recognized by Active Directory 6 Click OK The selected users groups are now added to the Users amp Groups tab s list of users who have been assigned the selected role Role Setting Name Karen Smith ACME ks fa Joe Testername ACME Viewing a User s Roles With the Effective Roles feature you are able to view all roles of
469. self Exact use of tampering detection depends on the configuration of the devices in question Occurs when a device detects a temperature change that a certain temperature is exceeded or similar Note The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Exact use of temperature detection depends on the configuration of the devices in question Occurs when a device detects that a video signal is lost Note The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Exact use of this type of detection depends on the configuration of the devices in question Occurs when a connection to a device is lost or when an attempt is made to communicate with a device and the attempt is unsuccessful Occurs when communication with a device is successfully established Occurs when communication with a device is successfully stopped Feed overflow occurs when a recording server is unable to process received video as quickly as specified in the configuration and therefore is forced to discard some of the images Orip This rare event can be used for triggering actions that will help you avoid the problem e g for lowering the recording frame rate Occurs when feed overflow see description of the Feed Overflow Started event ends On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual Live Client Feed Requested Output Activated Output Changed Output Deactivated Live Client Feed Terminated PTZ Manua
470. self or at another location which can be reached by NetEVS for example on a network drive e Configuring and Managing Archiving for a Recording Server You configure and manage a recording server s archiving settings through the Archive Wizard available from the recording server s Archiving Tab The wizard takes you through the steps required in order to e Create new archives for the recording server e Change existing archives e Remove archives e Default Archive For each recording server you are able to create one or more archives For recording servers with more than one archive the default archive is simply the archive directory to which archiving will take place if use of another of the recording server s archive directories has not deliberately been specified for certain cameras Only one archive directory can be the recording server s default archive e If you create more than one archive for a recording server you must thus select which of the archives should be the recording server s default archive You do this through the Archive Wizard e If you only create one archive for a recording server the archive will automatically be the recording server s default archive e Enabling and Configuring Archiving for Individual Devices On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 267 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 268 Once archiving has been configured for a recording server you can enable archiving for individual cameras microphones or
471. ser Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 In the overview pane s Time Profiles list right click the required time profile and select Edit Time Profile Time Profiles iw 2 Time Profiles A Time profile 001 2 Time profile 002 Time profile 003 E dd New Time Profile CTRL N Edt Time Profile Delete Time Profile DELETE Refresh FS Tip Instead of right clicking to select Edit Time Profile you may simply select the required time profile and press F2 on your keyboard This will open the Time Profile window 2 In the Time Profile window edit the time profile as required Remember that a time profile may contain more than one time period and that time periods may be recurring Orip The small month overview in the top right corner of the Time Profile window can help you get a quick overview of the time periods covered by the time profile as dates containing specified times are highlighted in bold In the following example the bold dates indicate that time periods have been specified on a number of days and that a recurring time may have been specified on Mondays 4 September 005 b 5 MM TW TF 4 EZ a E E 731 meer 1314 5 16 17 g 20 21 22 23 24 pb 27 25 29 30 Bold dates in month overview indicate that times have been specified on those dates You browse months by clicking the small back forward buttons 3 When you have made the required changes to the time profile click the Time Profile w
472. ser Manual NetEVS 2 0 Llenable and configure output if any See About Outputs LIcreate rules See About Rules What is a rule Rules are a central element in NetEVS The behavior of an NetEVS system is to a very large extent determined by rules Rules determine highly important settings such as when cameras should record when PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom cameras should patrol when notifications should be sent etc Tip When creating rules you may also want to use time profiles for quickly making rules apply within or outside predefined periods of time or notification profiles for quickly making rules send pre configured e mails with video clips if required to selected recipients LJada roles See About Roles What is a role Roles determine which NetEVS features users and groups are able to use In other words roles determine rights Lladd users and or groups of users See About Users and Groups Tip If you have a server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller on your network NetEVS lets you quickly add users and or groups from Active Directory Dlactivate licenses See About Licensing Why must licenses be activated When installing the system you used a single temporary license The temporary license is only valid for a certain number of days After this initial period ends all recording servers and cameras on your system will require activation of their individual licenses You must therefor
473. set positions for the selected patrolling profile select the preset position for which you want to change the time On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 103 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 104 righe D atime Patrolling W sia Back Door er Canned Foods Section Dary Products Section 3 Specify the required time in number of seconds in the Wait time secs field Position Fiesa I0 Eak Dogu m a agit bra oas Ln i If required repeat for other preset positions Customizing Transitions By default the time required for moving the camera from one preset position to another known as transition is estimated to be three seconds During this time motion detection is by default disabled on the camera as irrelevant motion is otherwise likely to be detected while the camera moves between the preset positions You can however customize the transitions between each of the preset positions in a patrolling profile You are able to customize the following e The estimated transition time e The speed with which the camera will move during a transition e Which plugins to disable during transition To customize transitions between preset positions in a patrolling profile do the following 1 Select the required patrolling profile in the Profile list 2 Select the Customize transitions check box Customize transitions This will add transition indications to the list of preset positions for the selected patrolling profi
474. sing recorded audio from the selected microphone s in Ocularis Client Lite Speaker Related Rights When specifying role rights for speakers the following rights are available e Visible Determines whether the selected speaker s will be visible in Ocularis Client Lite e Listen to live audio Determines whether listening to live audio from the selected speaker s will be possible in Ocularis Client Lite On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 287 NetEVS 2 0 288 User Manual e Browse audio This feature is currently not supported Determines whether browsing of recorded audio from the selected speaker s will be possible in Ocularis Client Lite e Export audio This feature is currently not supported Determines whether the export feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected speaker s in Ocularis Client Lite e Get sequences This feature is currently not supported Determines whether the Sequences feature can be used when browsing recorded audio from the selected speaker s in Ocularis Client Lite IMPORTANT Although what is being said through a speaker can be recorded and archived there is currently no way of playing back or exporting such recorded outgoing audio Therefore some of the speaker related rights currently have no effect Features for playing back and exporting recorded outgoing audio etc will be available in subsequent releases as soon as possible Input Related Rights When specify
475. speakers You are also able to select which of a recording server s archives should be used for the individual device 1 In the navigation pane expand Devices and select either Cameras Microphones or Speakers as required 2 In the overview pane select the required device 3 In the properties pane select the Archiving tab Viewing Archived Recordings You view archived recordings in Ocularis Client Lite As long as the archived recordings are stored locally or on accessible network drives you can use Ocularis Client Lite s many features kinetic timeline browser search evidence export etc when browsing archived recordings just like you would with recordings stored in a cameras regular databases The fact that you are viewing archived recordings will be completely transparent Note Remember that individual user rights may prevent particular users from viewing recordings from particular cameras just as is the case when browsing recordings from cameras regular databases Backing Up Archived Recordings Many organizations want to back up their recordings using tape drives or similar Exactly how you do this is highly individual depending on the backup media used in your organization However the following is worth noting Back Up Archives Rather than Camera Databases Always create backups based on the content of archives not based on individual camera databases Creating backups based on the content of individual ca
476. st 4 By default you will log in to the Management Server with your active Windows account This means that if you are currently logged in as for example JohnSmith you will by default log in to the Management Server as JohnSmith as well e If you wish to log in to the Management Server with your active Windows account this is the default login option select Windows Authentication current user in the Authentication field e If you wish to log in to the Management Server with a different Windows account select Windows Authentication in the Authentication field then type the required user name and password in the User name and Password fields respectively Orip If you have logged in with Windows Authentication before you can simply select 62 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 previously entered user names from the list Orip When using Windows Authentication you have the option of selecting Remember password in which case you will not have to type the password at subsequent logins 5 Click the Connect button to open NetEVS Manager Getting Started In the following the tasks typically involved in setting up an NetEVS system are listed Note that although information is presented as a checklist a completed checklist does not in itself guarantee that the NetEVS system will match the exact requirements of your organization To make the system match the needs of your organization it is highly re
477. st also know the IP address of the NetEVS Management Server or any router or firewall used How to Create Typical Rules The following examples provide step by step descriptions of how to create a number of rules typically required by NetEVS administrators 332 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note The descriptions are examples only If wishing to base real life rules on the examples be prepared to substitute the examples device names and parameters with device names and parameters relevant to your system Numerous other rule configurations are possible If the rule you require is not listed among the examples it by no means indicates that the rule you require cannot be created in NetEVS Basic Rules e Use Higher Live Frame Rate on Motion Ensures that when motion is detected on a specific camera NetEVS will use a higher than default live frame rate for the camera and return to using the camera s default live frame rate when motion is no longer detected The effect is higher quality live video whenever there is motion PTZ Related Rules e Use Specific PTZ Patrolling Profile During Specific Part of Day Ensures the following During a specific part of the day a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile i e a definition of the points between which the PTZ camera should move When the specified part of the day ends the PTZ camera will stop patrolling e Use D
478. stems Inc 53 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual oH Admin O Axis 209 FD Camera 192 168 10 21 Sp Camera 4 5 Axis 214 Camera 192 168 10 36 Camera 5 54 H amp A Rules and Alerts Rules Time Profiles Notification Profiles A Alerts Y User defined Events B Security Pa Roles EE Server Logs E System Log E Audit Log Alert Log Event Log f Rule Log DAA Axis 221 Camera 192 168 10 41 Camera 2 do Input 2 do Input 3 Output 3 S Sony SNC DF40 Camera 192 168 10 56 Camera 1 http 192 168 11 244 7563 Public web server address Time zone ERE E AE e When working with rules time and notification profiles users roles etc the Management Client window typically contains a menu bar and three panes o Inputs Q Outputs HA Rules and Alerts Rules E Time Profiles Notification Profiles A Alerts Y User defined Events e When viewing logs the Management Client window typically contains only the El Default Start Audio Feed Rule LE Default Start Feed Rule E New Rule 001 menu bar and two panes NetEVS Manager a EN Rules and Alerts Rules Time Profiles E Notification Profiles A Alerts Y User defined Events A Security Navigation Pane Default Record on Motion Rule X Clear Refresh UTC Time 4 29 2009 8 12 06 PM Local Time 4 29 2009 4 1
479. system has an external input unit connected to an input port The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when the state of an external input unit connected to an input port on a device is changed regardless of which state the external input unit is changed to Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an input port The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when an external input unit connected to an input port on a device is deactivated Note This type of event requires that at least one device on your system has an external input unit connected to an input port The event will not work until configured on the hardware itself Occurs when a camera detects motion in its video stream In addition to NetEVS s motion detection some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such camera detected motion detection can also be used in NetEVS rules Note The event will not work until configured on the camera hardware itself Exact use of camera based motion detection depends on the configuration of the cameras in question Occurs when a camera no longer detects motion in its video stream See also the description of the Motion Started event above Note The event will not work until configured on the camera hardware itself Exact use of camera
480. t Help Back Cancel Database Configuration Wizard displaying recording server database storage area management options 240 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Tip The Database Configuration Wizard lets you select different options if opened while working with individual cameras see Camera Database Management e Create New Storage Area for Recording Server To create a new storage area for use by a recording server do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Create new storage area on recording server and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard specify the following information in the vacant white row e Storage Name A descriptive name for the new storage area e Path The path to the directory in which the new storage area should be located The storage area does not necessarily have to be on the recording server computer itself Ortip The directory does not have to be an existing directory if it does not exist it will automatically be created Slorage Name Demos Usage Delsuk Local Default New Stage es C MedaDalabace Wentvea Example Specifying name and path of a new storage area e Device Usage The field displays a link to information about which devices are using the particular storage area i e which camera s recordings are stored there Since you still are in the process of creating the new st
481. t and Day of week is lt days gt First Select conditions to apply Within selected lime in lt lime profile Outside selected time in time prohle Within the time pernod lt stathme gt to lt cendbme Me Day of week is cdays gt Our selection is immediately reflected in the initial rule description in the lower half or the wizard window Next Ede the mle descnption chck an underlined tem Perform an action in a time interval within the time period startifime to eadtrare and day of week is days Gitip If we had previously created a suitable time profile covering the required period of time we could have just selected the time condition Within selected time in lt time profile gt then pointed to the time profile in question Read more about time profiles under Managing Time Profiles 7 Click the underlined items in the rule description in order to specify its exact content starttime Clicking the starttime link lets you specify required start time In this example we want the start time to be one o clock in the afternoon so we specify 13 00 and click OK Time of Day E Select bre 1300 endtime The endtime link works just like the starttime link We specify 18 00 days Clicking the days link lets you specify required days of the week gt In this example our rule should only apply on Saturdays so we select Saturday and click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 341 NetEVS 2 0
482. t even though the user defined events can be triggered from outside the surveillance system only authorized users will be able to do it When user defined events are used this way you may not always want them to be available for manual triggering in Ocularis Client Lite You can use roles to define which user defined events should be visible in Ocularis Client Lite see Specifying the Rights of a Role for more information Whichever way you choose to use user defined events each user defined event must first be added through the Management Client 132 Adding a New User defined Event 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select User defined Events 2 In the overview pane right click Events and select Add New User defined Fvent 3 Type a name for the new user defined event and click OK The newly added user defined event will now appear in the list in the overview pane User rights permitting see roles the user defined event can now be manually triggered from Ocularis Client Lite Already connected Ocularis Client Lite users must log out and log in again before the user defined event will be visible Remember to create one or more rules specifying what should take place when the custom event occurs Editing the Name of an Existing User defined Event 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts and select User defined Events 2 In the overview pane select the
483. t Activated Output Changed or Output Deactivated Click OK to confirm your selection Click the devices recorders servers link in the initial rule description In the Select Devices and Groups dialog select the required output Click OK to confirm your selection On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 231 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 232 7 Click Next to continue to the Rule Wizard s step 2 Step 2 Conditions and select if necessary a condition 8 Continue to step 3 Step 3 Actions and select one or more actions 9 If you do not want to define a stop action skip this step If you want to define a stop action for instance to deactivate the output again click Next to continue to step 4 Step 4 Stop criteria and select a stop action 10 Click Finish to save the rule Tip When you create a rule based on an output event the actions you specify in the rule do not have to relate to the device on which the external output was activated you can easily specify that the actions should take place on one or more different devices even across recording servers On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Public Addresses Managing Public Addresses You define a recording server s public IP address on the Network tab To access the Network tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Network tab in the properties pane Why Use a Public Address When an access client such as Oc
484. tab in the properties pane On the Motion tab verify that the Enable motion detection check box is selected Peart cit Po F gt Ti Damma Bie Sector y Pius Sectee Back Doce ia 5 tab FIZ Sy Lab PTZ 1 Y Lb PTI Camera 2 Sp Lab Com 1 O Pad actos T Hed Secta L cara E ay Al Lara r Mobor prever A eerapey ana 50 he je Opiraged detector C Uns cece Hor ed GP hic Record ka Aschrang 4 hair Arrow indicates position of Enable motion detection check box On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note that other settings on the Motion tab such as Sensitivity will determine what will be interpreted as motion Merely enabling motion detection may thus not be sufficient to meet your requirements Time spent on finding the best possible balance of motion detection settings under different conditions day night calm windy weather etc will help you later avoid unnecessary recordings etc Note Motion is typically detected by NetEVS when video received from cameras is analyzed This is the type of motion detection dealt with in this example However some cameras are depending on configuration of the camera hardware themselves able to detect motion Such hardware configurable motion detection can also be used in NetEVS rules although that is beyond the scope of this example Creating the Rule 1 In the NetEVS Manager s navigation pane expand Rules and Alerts then right click Rules and select Add
485. tab s preview image will move to the selected preset position OTip If the preview image does not appear to move to the selected preset position when you click the Test button verify that preview image does not already show the selected preset position In that case try testing another preset position first PTZ Patrolling Patrolling is the automatic movement of a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom camera between a number of preset positions Thus before you are able to work with patrolling you must have specified at least two preset positions for the camera You manage patrolling on the Patrolling tab which is available only when the selected camera is a PTZ camera Patrolling profiles are the definitions of how patrolling should take place This includes the order in which the camera should move between preset positions how long it should remain at each position for etc You are able to create an unlimited number of such patrolling profiles and use them in your rules For example you may create a rule specifying that one patrolling profile should be used during daytime opening hours and another during nights On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 101 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual PaE Patrolling Profile Daytime Add New Rename Delete 0 Initial Transition Position E gt e a D Ea Preset id El 3 La Lab gt Shelves Shelves Fay shelves gt Table Tabl gt Table C gt Table gt Window
486. ted rule can easily be activated later Deactivating a Rule 1 In the overview pane select the required rule 2 Clear the Active check box in the properties pane Eda Ly O eae iy F 54 Flutes iii hip Fra Auk Mura El Mp Second Hulk uy Tard Fita 101 Third Pida Demen Erre Contre Pres he ar Seow oe Me art e Bj Sed Bho bimi Ee ri Doing L P bra Perea Waris dary Peotone ea i Lipa aliii te ikea unt A Ppa AN fihi Ej O B Bije ban Bank em Piik bra be ee Arrow estes Active check box 3 Save the setting by clicking the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar 4 The deactivated rule will be indicated by a different icon in the Rules list 314 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Aules Y x pa Ed t My Firs ES ule P d Rule Example Different icon indicates that third rule is deactivated Activating a Rule When you want to activate the rule again simply select the required rule select the Activate check box and save the setting e Deleting a Rule 6 Tip You do not necessarily have to delete an unwanted rule you may also just temporarily deactivate the rule by clearing the Active check box in the Rule Information pane for the rule in question then saving the setting by selecting the NetEVS Manager s File menu The Active check box Pardos E de hie Fi S Auka El Hip Fired Flute Youre l Mp Second Fiuk Ms Tew Fhe Bip Tard Fila E i
487. teps of the Rule Wizard the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Restore default recording frame rate Without this stop action the default recording frame rate would potentially never be restored You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Begins PTZ patrolling the continuous moving of a camera between a number of preset positions according to a particular patrolling profile the exact definition of how patrolling should be carried out including the sequence of preset positions timing settings etc for a particular PTZ camera When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select a patrolling profile Only one patrolling profile on one device can be selected it is not possible to select several patrolling profiles Note This type of action requires that the device to which the action will be linked is a PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom device and that at least one patrolling profile has been defined for the device You define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of the Rule Wizard the On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual Pause patrolling on lt devices gt Move camera to lt preset gt position Mo
488. th to the database used for the speaker e Used Space Non editable field displaying the current size of the database for the speaker e Database Wizard On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 363 NetEVS 2 0 364 User Manual The Database Configuration section features a Database Wizard button Clicking the Database Wizard button will start the Database Configuration Wizard with which you are able to quickly and conveniently empty or move the database for the speaker Archiving Tab You are able to view and manage the archiving settings of a selected speaker on the Archiving tab Note Being able to manage a speaker s archiving settings requires that one or more archives have been defined on the recording server to which the speaker belongs See About Archiving for more information Note Another tab called Archiving will be displayed if you view the properties of a recording server this is where you create and manage the recording server s archives For more information see Archiving tab Recording Server Properties what is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a speaker s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the speaker s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice See About Archiving for more information To access the Archivin
489. th the new licenses you can activate your licenses See Activating Licenses for more information Tip In the short period until you get the additional licenses you can disable some less important cameras to allow some of the new cameras to run instead To disable or enable a camera expand Recording Servers in Management Client s navigation pane then select the required recording server right click the required camera and select Enable 168 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Local IP Address Ranges Managing Local IP Address Ranges When an access client such as Ocularis Client Lite connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Access clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers e When access clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers e When access clients connect from the internet the surveillance system should reply with the recording servers public addresses i e the address of the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which
490. that recordings from the last 20 calendar days before the current point in time will be stored This is important since depending on recording settings some days may not yield any recordings at all Old recordings from days in excess of the specified number will be removed from the archive IMPORTANT Note that this is one of two maximum size settings for the archive The Archive Retention GB setting specified in the neighboring field may mean that recordings are removed from the archive before the specified number of days is reached Orip If you want to specify indefinitely select a value of O zero e Archive Retention GB Select the maximum number of gigabytes of recording data to store in the archive Example If you want to store up to 100 gigabytes of recording data in the archive select 100 Recording data in excess of the specified number of gigabytes will be On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 275 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual removed from the archive IMPORTANT Note that this is one of two maximum size settings for the archive The Archive Retention days setting specified in the neighboring field may mean that recordings are removed from the archive before the specified number of gigabytes is reached IMPORTANT An archive always requires 50 megabytes of free space the actual maximum size of your archive will thus be the amount of gigabytes you specify minus 50 megabytes Suctora Hama Daaba Relenton hour
491. the Hardware Detection Wizard select Automatic Hardware Detection and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard the wizard will suggest one or more IP address ranges on which to detect devices The number of suggested ranges will depend on the number of network interface cards on the recording server By default NetEVS will scan the IP address range s for devices on port 80 If the suggested IP address ranges are acceptable simply go to step 3 Occasionally you may want to remove or edit the suggested IP address ranges change the default port number or add further IP address ranges On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 143 NetEVS 2 0 144 User Manual Removing an Unwanted IP Address Range To remove an IP address range select the unwanted IP address range and click the Remove button You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the IP address range in question Editing an IP Address Range To edit an IP address range select the required range and click the Fdit button This will open the Add IP Range to Scan dialog which lets you edit the IP address range by changing the beginning and end of the IP address range as required Tip The beginning and end IP address may be identical allowing you to only scan for a single device if required If scanning for devices which support TCP HTTP most devices do keep the Use TCP port scanning box selected You are also able to change the port number to scan
492. the device is merely stopped Camera requires attention Note that some icons may be combined as in this example where Camera is On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 79 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual enabled is combined with Camera is recording since a recording camera is also an enabled camera Database Management Camera Database Management Manage individual cameras microphones and speakers through the Database Configuration Wizard The wizard conveniently guides you through the processes of emptying or moving databases Note Recordings will only be saved in the databases when recording is enabled and recording related rule criteria are met To manage a database select the required camera microphone or speaker in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane then select the Record tab in the properties pane On the Record tab click the Database Wizard button to open the Database Configuration Wizard When you open the Database Configuration Wizard this way it lets you select between two options empty or move the database Database Configuration Wizard Welcome to the Database Configuration Wizard 10 O O n S SI This wizard helps you configure and maintain databases rding servers NetEVS for devices on reco O Empty database for device Move database for device Next gt gt Cancel Database Configuration Wizard displaying database management options Tip The Database Configuration Wizar
493. the menu that appears select Show Status Messages Shop Management Server Service Show Status Messages k About Exit Management Server Manager The Management Server Status Messages window appears listing time stamped status messages On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 39 NetEVS 2 0 40 i Sh 20017 1 SM 2007 10 30 33 AA 2007 1023 Sn SOOT 103 SO 200 10 see 20 202007 10 36 20 2 01 007 10 eo AO 2007 10 36 19 Sin SOO 10 35 18 AN O 10 ee 1B SH 2007 10 36 16 Se 07 10 35 16 SN 2007 10 35 07 SM 00710745 AN Ar 10 Sa Sn SOOT 10 Viewing Version Information Mero Succes siaa recado para bees REA TAREA dde Dere Hated Succertdy migkned margar p iiey modules Duen ribdced recosding perce Ore mod Succacifudy iria mi pith Sumen miisired commard processor 5 ridad here Paul Suei reed chen vernon miar Sueca anpbed eederral play A Gove abel Sugeh masked log module Succenihuy ridad secundy module Wisiting for SOL server lo be online Sucnerifuly appded new coniguratorn Succertid loaded conpor fle Serene abre Example only User Manual Knowing the exact version of your Management Server service is often a benefit for example in case you ever need to contact product support 1 Right click the notification area s Management Server service icon 2 From the menu that appears select About Shop Management Server Service Show Stabus Messages Exit Mer Emane Server Manag
494. tion Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Empty databases for device and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the check boxes next to the databases you want to empty Empty Then click Next 3 In order to prevent accidental data deletion you will be asked to confirm that you want to permanently delete all media data for the device in question 368 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 If you are sure click Yes 4 The database will be emptied A bar displays how the emptying job progresses AAA When the emptying job is complete you will be informed whether the job was successful or whether it failed If the job failed you will be able view a status message indicating what caused the failure Empty database lor device Camera E Example Indication of successful emptying job 2l Empty datatess lor device Tamera 1 Example Indication of failed emptying job with link to status message 5 Click Finish e Move Database for Device If several storage areas exist on the recording server on which the selected camera microphone or speaker belongs you are able to move the database to another storage area Moving the database will not affect its content and you will be still able to record during the move IMPORTANT Before moving a database make sure sufficient free space is available at the new storage area This is especially important if moving a large
495. to step 3 of the wizard 8 On step 3 of the wizard first specify which actions to perform In this example we want patrolling according to a specific patrolling profile We therefore select the action Start patrolling on lt device gt using lt profile gt ist Select actions to perform T Start recording on lt devices gt Start feed on lt devices _ Set ive frame rate on devices gt Set recording frame rate on lt devices gt w Start patrolling on lt dewice gt using lt prohle gt Pause patroling on lt devices gt Based on the selection of actions the wizard extends the rule description and prompts us to specify the required device and patrolling profile Jext Edi the rule descripbon click an underlined item sertorm an action in a time interval ihm selected time in patine Jari palaling on device using profit 9 Click the underlined items in the extension of the rule description in order to specify their exact contents On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 347 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual In this example we first click the device link and in the Select device dialog opening we select a device and click OK Select Device x 5 Cameras 3 All Cameras 45 Lab Cameras Parking bel E Y Parking Lat E cam 1 7 a cc com h Parking Lot E cam 2 H Fed Sector Cameras 5 Retal desea PTZ Cameras A cancel Then we click the profile link and select a patrolli
496. to the NetMatrix Monitor s Configuration dialog For Ocularis Client Lite look at the view in the Ocularis Client Lite Setup mode See the separate NetMatrix Monitor or Ocularis Client Lite documentation for more information 7 In the Type field select the type of NetMatrix recipient you are adding a NetMatrix Monitor or an Ocularis Client Lite Note NetEVS does not verify that the specified port number or password is correct or that the specified port number password or type corresponds with the actual NetMatrix recipient Therefore make sure that you enter the information correctly 8 Click OK to save the settings You are now able to use the NetMatrix recipient in rules See Defining Rules Sending Images to NetMatrix Recipients for more information about including NetMatrix recipients in rules e Editing NetMatrix Recipients 1 From the NetEVS Manager s Too s menu select NetMatrix Configuration 2 Select an NetMatrix recipient from the list and click the Edit button in the NetMatrix Configuration dialog 3 Edit the relevant settings and click OK to save your changes e Removing NetMatrix Recipients To remove a NetMatrix recipient from your NetEVS system do the following Note If you remove a NetMatrix recipient any rule that includes the NetMatrix recipient will stop working 1 From the NetEVS Manager s Tools menu select NetMatrix Configuration 2 Select a NetMatrix recipient from the list and click the
497. torage area Moving the database will not affect its content and you will be still able to record during the move IMPORTANT Before moving a database make sure sufficient free space is available at the new storage area This is especially important if moving a large database since the moving process may take time and the database may become even larger if the database must store new recordings during that time As a rule of thumb sufficient free space means at least the size of the database allowing for the fact that it may grow plus 500 MB If sufficient free space is not available at the new storage drive you risk data being deleted The wizard described in the following helps you determine database and storage area sizes Orip A recording server s storage areas can be managed through the Database Configuration Wizard when the wizard is opened while working with a recording server see Recording Server Database Management To move the database of the selected camera microphone or speaker do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Move database for device and click Next 2 On the second step of the wizard select the required storage area On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 81 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Device Name Used Storage Mame Free Path Include media data Camera 9 0 15 GB Local Default se 33 00 GE LU MediaDlatabase Local Detauk OurOher5torags rea R i a Selectin
498. tput immediately after the event click the immediately link in the initial rule description and select an interval between the event and the activation deactivation of the output Click OK to confirm your selection Click the state link in the initial rule description and select whether you want to activate or deactivate the output Click OK to confirm your selection Click the devices link in the initial rule description and select which output you want to activate or deactivate Click OK to confirm your selection If wanted you can select more actions in the Rule Wizard s step 3 Step 3 Actions Do so or simply click Next to continue to the next step In Rule Wizard s step 4 Step 4 Stop criteria select one of the stop actions for instance to deactivate the output after a certain time or event Click Finish to save the rule e Defining a Rule where an Output Triggers an Action In the Rules feature all registered external output activation deactivation or change is treated as an event Based on an event you are able to specify a wide variety of actions to take To define a rule where an output activates an action do the following 1 2 Start the Rule Wizard In Rule Wizard s step 1 Step 1 Type of rule select the Perform an action on lt event gt option Click the event link in the initial rule description In the Select an Event dialog s Built in group select the appropriate option for your rule Outpu
499. tricted access to the entire NetEVS system For this reason it is not necessary to specify role settings for the Administrators role i Users amp Groups i r Role settings tabs are not available for Administrators role as users and groups with this role have unrestricted access to the system You add users and groups to the Administrators role just as with any other role see Assigning Users amp Groups to a Role IMPORTANT Users with local machine administrator rights on the computer running the Management Server will automatically have administrator rights on the Management Server It is therefore important that you verify which users have local machine administrator rights on the computer running the Management Server Only users whom you trust as administrators of your NetEVS system should have local machine administrator rights on the computer running the Management Server 282 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Managing Roles Adding a Role e Added Roles Become View Groups By default each role you define is also created as a view group when you add a role in the Management Client the role will by default appear as a view group for use in Ocularis Client Lite What is a view group The way in which video from one or more cameras is presented in the access clients is called a view A view group is basically a container for one or more such views for use in Ocularis Client Lite In Ocularis C
500. trix recipient regardless whether it is a computer with the NetMatrix Monitor or Ocularis Client Lite must be configured to receive NetMatrix triggered video See the NetMatrix Monitor and Ocularis Client Lite documentation for more information e Adding NetMatrix Recipients To add an existing NetMatrix recipient i e an existing NetMatrix Monitor or Ocularis Client Lite installation through the Management Client NetEVS Manager do the following 1 From the NetEVS Manager s Tools menu select NetMatrix Configuration 2 In the NetMatrix Configuration dialog click the Add button to open the Add New NetMatrix dialog Add New NetMatrix Name Reception Front NetMatrix details Address 10 10 10 111 Port 12345 os Password Type NetMatrix Monitor e Ocularis Client Lite ae 3 In the Name field enter a descriptive name for the NetMatrix recipient 4 In the Address field enter the IP address or the host name of the required NetMatrix recipient 5 In the Port field enter the port number used by the NetMatrix recipient installation On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 185 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 6 In the Password field enter the NetMatrix recipient s password Remember that passwords are case sensitive i e there is a difference between typing amanda and Amanda Tip If in doubt you can find the port number default 12345 and password this way For an NetMatrix Monitor application go
501. ts you view and edit basic information about a selected speaker The Info tab contains the following fields e Name Name of the speaker The name will be used whenever the speaker is listed in NetEVS and access clients A name is not compulsory but highly recommended The name does not have to be unique To change the name simply overwrite the existing name and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar r a Orip If you change the name it will be updated throughout NetEVS This means that if the name is used in for example a rule the name will automatically change in the rule as well e Description Description of the speaker A description is not compulsory The description will appear in a number of listings within NetEVS For example the description will appear when pausing the mouse pointer over the speaker s name in the NetEVS Manager s overview pane To specify a description simply type the description and click the Save button in the NetEVS Manager s toolbar On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 359 NetEVS 2 0 360 User Manual e Hardware name Name of the hardware with which the speaker is connected The field is non editable However the hardware name can be changed by clicking the Go To button next to the field Clicking the Go To button will take you to the hardware information where the name is editable e Unit number Non editable field displaying the unit on which the speaker is attached on the
502. two ways e Select Windows and click the browse button to the right of the Username field to use the Windows authentication method which authenticates the administrator through the administrator s Windows login OF e Select Basic and enter the NetDVMS administrator s user name and password in the Username and Password fields Note The reason why it is important that you enter the NetDVMS administrator information is that you as administrator then will have unlimited rights to data from both NetEVS and the NetDVMS installation The connection to the NetDVMS server is now established but no roles in the NetEVS Management Client except the Administrator role have been given access to data from the NetDVMS server See Defining Roles with Access to NetDVMS Servers for more information about giving users access to data from added NetDVMS servers Note Remember to define the network configuration settings so the NetEVS Management Server will be able to handle the token authentication of clients for added NetDVMS severs Note In the NetEVS Management Client you must add all NetDVMS servers you would like to receive data from The NetDVMS system s internal master slave setup cannot be reused by NetEVS e Network Configuration With the network configuration settings you specify the NetEVS Management Server s server address so that the NetEVS Management Server can handle the token authentication of clients for added NetDVMS severs
503. u do not want the rule to be active straight away clear the Active check box in the top part of the Rule Wizard window Retail Area FI vw Arte Gtip You can always activate deactivate the rule later 15 Click the wizard s Finish button This will add your new rule to the list of rules een bly First Aule My Second Rule Retail Area PTZ Saturday Aftemoon Use Different Patrolling Profiles for Day Night This requires two near identical rules one for each patrolling profile When you have created the first rule you can easily make a copy of it and quickly create the second rule based on the copy Note Both rules are covered in this example The rules described in the following are examples only If wishing to base real life rules on the examples be prepared to substitute the examples device names and parameters with device names and parameters relevant to your system 344 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 These rules ensure the following e During daytime a specific PTZ camera will patrol according to a specific patrolling profile In this example daytime is defined by a time profile covering the period between 08 00 and 20 00 on all days of the week e During nights the PTZ camera will patrol according to another patrolling profile In this example nights are defined as periods not covered by the daytime time profile Prerequisites This rule is based on a PTZ camera being
504. u enable disable archiving for the camera in question For more information see Archiving tab Camera Properties fach slate 5 amd E rated completo Hi itha 1201 2007 11 50 00 Sm Selig Qi io L Storage E Ahin e Archiving Tab s List of Archives Each archive you have added through the Archive Wizard will be listed with the following information e Name Name of the archive e Progress Displays the percentage of completion for any ongoing archiving process If archiving is not ongoing no information is displayed e Location Path to the archive directory 272 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Disk Free Space Free space left on the disk on which the archive is located not free space left in the archive itself e Used Space Space used in the archive e Default Checked box indicates which archive is the recording server s default archive e Schedule Archiving schedule i e how often archiving should take place Orip You may have to use the tab s horizontal scroll bar to view all columns in the list e Accessing the Archive Wizard To access the Archive Wizard from the Archiving tab click the tab s Archive Wizard button e Monitoring Archives Status The lower part of the Archiving tab displays status information about the archive you have selected in the list in the upper part of the tab e Started Displays the start date and time of any ongoing archiving
505. u may be asked to provide user name and password for the device when accessing it this way 3 Repeat for each required device When ready click Next 4 On the last step of the wizard verify the information then click Finish 5 The required devices are added to the recording server and will appear in the NetEVS Manager s lists On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 147 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Help System Using the Built in Help System The NetEVS Management Client features a comprehensive built in help system To use the built in help system simply press the F1 key on your Fa keyboard When you press F1 the built in help system will open in a separate window allowing you to easily switch between help and the Management Client itself As an alternative to pressing the F1 key click the toolbar s Help button a The built in help system is context sensitive This means that when you press F1 or click the Help button while working in a particular part of the Management Client the help system automatically displays a help topic describing that part or a task related to that part Navigating the Built in Help System You are always able to freely navigate between the help system s contents To do this simply use the help window s four tabs Contents Search and Favorites or use the links inside the help topics Contents Search Favorites Blossa e Contents Tab Lets you navigate the help system based o
506. u should now remove the old version and install the new one 1 On the required computers open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs In the Add or Remove Programs dialog select the NetEVS Management Client Manager entry and click the Change Remove button A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s steps and click Finish when ready Now open a browser and connect to the Management Server s web page at the following address http Management Server address port installation admin where Management Server address is the IP address or host name of the Management Server and port is the port number which IIS has been set up to use on the Management Server If not accessing the web page on the Management Server itself log in with an account which has administrator rights on the Management Server 4 From the web page install the new version of the Management Client 36 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Upgrading Ocularis Client Lite Ocularis Client Lite users should now remove their old Ocularis Client Lite versions and install the new one 1 On the required computers open Windows Add or Remove Programs dialog Start gt Control Panel gt Add or Remove Programs 2 Inthe Add or Remove Programs dialog select the Ocularis Client Lite entry and click the Remove button A wizard window will open Follow the wizard s step
507. ual NetEVS 2 0 Video Device Drivers Managing Video Device Drivers Video device drivers are small programs used for controlling communicating with the camera devices connected to a recording server The video device drivers should therefore be installed on each recording server on your NetEVS system Video device drivers are installed automatically during the initial installation of your NetEVS system However new versions of video device drivers are released from time to time Making New Video Device Driver Versions Available for Installation The latest version of video device drivers are available for download from WWW ONSSI COM Once you have downloaded the latest version of video device drivers you are able to make the latest version available for download to recording servers through the Download Manager Once the video device drivers have been made available for download administrators of recording servers are able to connect to the Management Server s web page and download the drivers from there Installing Video Device Drivers IMPORTANT During the installation process the Recording Server service must be stopped see Recording Server Service Administration 1 On the computer running the recording server shut down any software including the Recording Server service 2 With an Internet Explorer browser connect to the NetEVS Management Server at the following address http Management Server address port
508. ularis Client Lite connects to a surveillance system an amount of initial data communication including the exchange of contact addresses goes on in the background This happens automatically and is completely transparent to users Access clients may connect from the local network as well as from the internet and in each case the surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and recorded video from the recording servers e When access clients connect locally the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and port numbers See also Managing Local IP Address Ranges e When access clients connect from the internet the surveillance system should reply with the recording server s public address i e the address of the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers To provide access to the surveillance system from outside a NAT Network Address Translation firewall NetEVS lets you use public addresses and port forwarding This will allow access clients from outside the firewall to connect to recording servers without using VPN Virtual Private Network Each recording server and failover server can be mapped to a specific port and the port can be forwarded through the firewall to the server s internal address See more about defining the public address in the following Enabling
509. ule On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 325 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Wizard makes sure you specify such stop actions when necessary stop actions are typically specified on one of the last steps of the wizard First Select stop action bo perform Move camera lo lt presel gt position _ Set device output to lt state gt Send notification to lt profiles Selecting stop actions In the example note the compulsory stop action selected dimmed the non relevant stop actions dimmed and the optional stop actions selectable Each type of action is described in the following For each type of action stop action information is listed as well Action Description Start Begin recording i e begin saving video in the database of the recording selected camera When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to specify when recording should start either immediately or a number of seconds before the triggering event beginning of the triggering time interval as well as on which devices the action should take place Note This type of action requires that recording has been enabled on the cameras to which the action will be linked Being able to save video from before an event or time interval is only possible if prebuffering is enabled for the cameras in question You enable recording and specify prebuffering settings for a camera on the Record tab Stop action required This type of action requires
510. und and outbound Used for communication between recording servers and the Management Server Port 11000 inbound and outbound Used by failover servers for polling i e regularly checking the state of recording servers Port 12345 inbound and outbound Used for communication between NetEVS and NetMatrix recipients Any other port numbers you may have selected to use Examples If you have changed the IIS Default Web Site port from its default port number 80 to another port number or if you have integrated NetDVMS servers into your NetEVS solution in which case a port must be allocated for use by the NetDVMS Image Server service The port numbers can be changed Different port numbers may therefore be used in your organization See Recording Server Service Administration for information about changing the recording server related port numbers Tip Consult the administrator of your organization s firewall if in doubt about how to open ports for traffic On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Servers Must Be Time Synchronized Part of the security surrounding the use of remote access clients with NetEVS is based on so called tokens When a client logs in to the surveillance system the client receives a token from the Management Server The token contains important security related time information The Management Server also sends a similar token to the required recording server s This is partly
511. unit on which the input can be found on the hardware For hardware capable of having more than one input unit attached the unit number will typically indicate the number of the input port to which the input is attached For hardware with for example four input ports the numbers will typically range from 0 to 3 e Settings Tab The Settings tab lets you verify or edit key input settings for a selected input or for all inputs within a selected device group If the selected device group contains 400 or more inputs the Settings tab will be unavailable for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time Note The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the devices in question and is thus likely to vary depending on the input selected The content of the Settings tab may vary but you will typically see the following property e Input rises on Lets you define whether the input signal should be considered rising on Circuit closed or Circuit open The value of this setting is used on the input s Events tab where you define properties for input events Input Rising event Input Falling event and Input Changed event See the description of the Events tab in the following 152 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 The content of the Settings tab is displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the
512. ure you can quickly make the components available again You can remove components which have previously been made available through the Download Manager This will remove the installation of the components on the Management Server The components will disappear from the Download Manager but installation files for the components will be kept in the Managements Server s Installers folder so you can re install them later if required To remove components 1 In the Download Manager click the Remove features button 2 In the Remove Features window select the features you want to remove 3 Click OK You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected features If you are sure click the Yes button You can remove installation files for non required features from the Management Server This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use certain features typically non relevant language versions See Non Required Components Removal from Management Server for more information Virus Scanning Information If you are using virus scanning software on the Management Server it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager If allowed in your organization disable virus scanning on the Management Server For more information see Virus Scanning Information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc
513. use Setup mode in Ocularis Client Lite e Status API Determines whether users groups with the selected role are able to use the Status API Application Program Interface The Status API is used in connection with NetCentral an add on product that provides complete overview of surveillance system status and alarms User defined Event Rights Relevant only if user defined events are available on your NetEVS system the User defined Events tab is divided into two halves In the upper half you select the user defined event for which you want to specify settings In the lower half you then specify what users groups with the selected role should be able to do with the selected user defined event in Ocularis Client Lite The following right is available e Trigger user defined event Within Ocularis Client Lite s Live mode it is possible to manually trigger your surveillance system s user defined events This right determines whether users with the selected role should be able to trigger the selected user defined event in Ocularis Client Lite Note For the right to work the role must also be granted the right to view Ocularis Client Lite in Live mode This right is granted as part of the application rights On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e View Group Rights The ViewGroup tab lets you specify which view groups i e groups of views in access clients see Managing View Groups for more information users g
514. used Active Directory to browse for the user the user s roles will be displayed automatically Users amp Groups 296 Add Roles Before Users and Groups In NetEVS you define roles first then you add users groups to the roles Roles determine which of NetEVS s features users and groups are able to use In other words roles determine rights Once you have defined roles you can add users and groups see Assigning Users amp Groups to a Role Users and Groups Normally Added through Active Directory Users and groups are normally added from Active Directory although users can also be added without Active Directory What ts Active Directory Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating systems it identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them Users as well aS groups are specified centrally in Active Directory Using Active Directory for adding existing user and group information to NetEVS has several benefits The fact that users as well as groups are specified centrally in Active Directory means that you will not have to create any user accounts from scratch in NetEVS It also means that you will not have to configure any authentication of users on NetEVS authentication is handled by Active Directory Prerequisites In order to be able to add users and groups through the Active Directory service a server with Active Directory installed
515. used for web server communication typically port 7563 e Time zone Non editable field displaying the time zone in which the recording server is located Settings Tab You are able to verify or edit the settings if any of a selected recording server on the Settings tab To access the Settings tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Settings tab in the properties pane Note The content of the Settings tab is determined entirely by the recording server in question and may thus vary depending on the recording server selected For some recording servers no settings will be available Any content on the Settings tab will be displayed in a table in which the first column lists the available settings and the second column lists the value of each setting You are typically but not always able to change the values When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 15 the allowed range will be displayed in the information box below the settings table Storage Tab You are able to view and manage storage areas on a selected recording server on the Storage tab What is a storage area A storage area is a directory in which database content primarily recordings from the cameras connected to the recording server is stored A default storage area is automatically created for each recordin
516. value of each setting You are typically able to change values Do the following to change a property 1 Select the row with the property you want to change 2 Click the button to the right of the properties column 3 Change the value of the property 4 In the NetEVS Manager s toolbar click the Save button When you have changed a setting to a non default value the value will appear in bold When a value must be within a certain range for example between 0 and 100 the allowed range will be displayed in the grey information box below the settings table e Events Tab On the Events tab you define events based on changes of the input s state from circuit opened to circuit closed or the reverse order The events you define can subsequently be used in rules Note You can define events for a selected input but not for all inputs in a device group 1 In the navigation pane expand Devices and select Inputs 2 In the overview pane select the required input 3 Select the Events tab and click the Add New button On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 153 NetEVS 2 0 154 User Manual Properties i Configured Everts Select Driver Event EJ ESATE 2 Inpa Plena erent ta Ing Faling event Cae Deere Ge Seng Gp into Event 4 In the Select Driver Event dialog select the appropriate option Input Rising event Input Falling event or Input Changed event 5 Click OK Your selected type of input
517. ve to default preset on lt devices gt NetEVS 2 0 wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Stop patrolling Without this stop action patrolling would potentially never stop You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Pauses PTZ patrolling the continuous moving of a camera between a number of preset positions When selecting this type of action the Ru e Wizard will prompt you to specify the devices on which patrolling should be paused Note This type of action requires that the devices to which the action will be linked are PTZ Pan Tilt Zoom devices and that at least one patrolling profile has been defined for those devices You define patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab Stop action required This type of action requires one or more stop actions Depending on how the action was triggered the stop action may be performed either on an event or after a period of time In one of the subsequent steps of the Rule Wizard the wizard will automatically prompt you to specify the stop action Resume patrolling Without this stop action patrolling would potentially pause indefinitely You will also have the option of specifying further stop actions Moves a particular camera to a particular preset position When selecting this type of action the Rule Wizard will prompt you to select a preset position Only one preset position on one camera can be selected it is not p
518. ved they are stored in a certain sub directory structure within the archive Note During all regular use of your NetEVS system the sub directory structure will be completely transparent to the system s users as they browse all recordings with Ocularis Client Lite regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not Knowing the sub directory structure is thus primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings In each of the recording server s archive directories separate sub directories are automatically created These sub directories are named after the GUID of the recording server What is a GUID A GUID is a Globally Unique IDentifier a unique 128 bit number used to identify components on a Windows system Example of a GUID 469c37e4 28ad 487b bcb7 e5fd7e5a609a Since you are able to able to store recordings from different cameras in the same archive and since archiving for each camera is likely to be performed at regular intervals further sub directories are also automatically added These sub directories each represent approximately an hour s worth of recordings The one hour split makes it possible to remove only relatively small parts of an archive s data in case the maximum allowed size of the archive is reached The sub directories are named after the GUID of each camera p us the date and time of the most recent database record contained in the sub directory Naming structure Archive Name R
519. ver is installed on the system Recordings from connected cameras are stored in individual camera databases in the recording server s default storage area unless you specifically define that another storage area should be used for storing the databases of particular cameras Through the wizard you can add further storage areas on the recording server computer itself or at another location for example on a network drive edit which storage area should be the default area etc IMPORTANT To ensure the smooth running of the system there must always be at least 500 MB of free space on a storage area If less that 500 MB of free space is available data will automatically be deleted until 500 MB of free space is again available on the storage area To open the Database Configuration Wizard select the required recording server in the Management Client s overview pane then select the Storage tab in the properties pane On the Storage tab click the Database Wizard button to open the Database Configuration Wizard When you open the Database Configuration Wizard this way it lets you select between three options Database Configuration nfigur Welcome to the Database Configuration Wizard LOA ONSSI pen This wizar d helps you configure and maintain databases devi for devices on recording servers Create new storage area for recording server 3 N Change default storage area Remove storage area To continue click Nex
520. video to display You will however still be able to access the window by clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area also Known as the system tray typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen VISADO DAI 10 Example only your notification area may have different content On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Notification Area Shortcut Menu By right clicking the NetMatrix Monitor icon in Windows notification area you get access to another shortcut menu Show Window Contig Exit The shortcut menu has the following options e Show Window Restores the NetMatrix Monitor window in either regular or full screen view depending on configuration e Config Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window Note that before the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor e Exit Shuts down the NetMatrix Monitor application Note that before the application closes you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double clicking the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop e Shutting Down the NetMatrix Monitor Application Closing the NetMatrix Monitor window by clicking the close button in the NetMatrix Monitor window s title bar will not
521. ween different cameras Refer to the documentation for your cameras for exact information NetEVS supports such multi streaming so cameras can establish two independent streams to the recording server with different resolution encoding and frame rate For more information see Managing Multi streaming Managing Multi streaming Some cameras support multi streaming with which you can establish two independent streams to the recording server a stream for live viewing and another stream for playback purposes with different resolution encoding and frame rate Note Only some cameras support multi streaming Even when cameras support multi streaming individual multi streaming capabilities may vary considerably between different cameras Refer to the documentation for your cameras for exact information To see if a camera offers different types of streams you can also view the Settings tab You manage multi streaming on the Streams tab The tab is only available when the selected camera or device group supports multi streaming However if you select a device group with 400 or more cameras the Streams tab will not be available for viewing and editing because changing settings for so many devices in one go takes too long time To access the Streams tab expand Devices in the Management Client s navigation pane expand the relevant camera folder in the overview pane select the required camera and then select the Streams tab in the propertie
522. which may further impact system performance negatively If possible you should therefore disable any virus scanning of camera databases and archiving locations On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 e Frequently Asked Questions about Archiving Can I Create an Archive on a Network Drive Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself or at another location which can be reached by NetEVS for example on a network drive what Happens when the Maximum Size of an Archive is Reached When you create archives through the Archive Wizard you specify a maximum size limit for the archive in days and gigabytes When either of the two maximum limits is reached recordings in excess of the specified number of days gigabytes will be removed However in order not to remove more recordings than necessary excess recordings will be removed in chunks of approximately one hour s worth of recordings What Happens if a Scheduled Archiving Fails If a scheduled archiving fails for example because the archive is located on a network drive which is temporarily unavailable NetEVS will retry archiving after an hour If that fails another retry will take place after yet another hour and so forth If the time of the next scheduled archiving is reached between two retries an archiving attempt will be made at the scheduled time if that attempt fails NetEVS will retry archiving after an hour and so forth How
523. will be able to select either a predefined system account or a particular user account in which case the service will use the specified user account to log in to the computer acting as recording server Tip If the computer acting as recording server is a member of a domain select the predefined account Local System or make sure you specify a user account which belongs to the domain in question Note If using network drives you should always specify a particular user account which has access to the network drives in question as the Recording Server service will not be able handle the network drives otherwise How to Select a Predefined System Account 18 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 1 Select This predefined account 2 Select Local System Local Service or Network Service as applicable 3 Click OK How to Select a Particular User Account 1 Select This account 2 Click the Browse button This will open the Select User window 3 In the Select User window verify that the required domain is specified in the From this location field If not click the Locations button to browse for the required domain 4 In the Enter the object names to select box type the required user name Tip Typing part of a name is often enough Use the Check Names feature to verify that the name you have entered is recognized 5 Click OK 6 Specify the password for the user account in the Password fi
524. wizard select the storage area you want to become the default storage area Note that only one area can be the default storage area Then click Next 3 The default storage area will be changed A bar displays how the changing job progresses SRR SSR PRR RRR RRR RRR SSS aa RR RRR RRS ERR RRR When the changing job is complete you will be informed whether the job was successful or whether it failed If the job failed you will be able to view a status message indicating what caused the failure Stait s Set New Slorsge Area a defaull slotage area Succes Example Indication of successful changing job dde Set New Storage Ares at delaull storage area Fal Example Indication of failed changing job with link to status message 4 Click Finish e Remove Storage Area To remove an existing storage area on a recording server do the following in the Database Configuration Wizard 1 On the wizard s first step select Remove storage area on recording server and click Next 2 In the leftmost column on the second step of the wizard select the storage area you want to remove Then click Next 242 On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Note Storage areas in use by cameras cannot be selected If the storage area you want to remove is in use by cameras do the following First click the link in the Device Usage column to see which cameras are using the storage area Then change the storage area fo
525. xample patrolling should be paused on our PTZ camera In the Select Group Members window we therefore drag PTZ Camera to the Selected list and click OK On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 353 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 354 device Clicking the device link lets you select to move another device than the device s on which patrolling was paused You are also able to select to move the device on which patrolling was paused In this example we select to move the same PTZ camera on which patrolling was paused and click OK Select Device ES p Cameras All Cameras H Lab Cameras H Parking hot E gt Red Sector Cameras Retail Area PTZ Cameras preset Clicking the preset link lets you select which preset position the PTZ camera Should move to You will be able to select from a list of preset positions defined for the PTZ camera you selected before In this example we select a preset position called Back Door and click OK Select a Preset E Dry Products Section a Fresh Produce Section Frozen Foods Section Hiosa Goods Section Pouki Sector Soft Orik Sechon A immediately The wizard automatically suggests that the camera moves to the preset position immediately after it has paused patrolling Clicking the immediately link lets you specify a delay if required In this example the wizard s suggestion immediately suits us fine so we simply leave it as
526. ximum Storage Size Limit By default the maximum size of a microphone s database is 5 GB To specify a different maximum database size limit select or type the required value in gigabytes in the Size box hip The value in the Size box is shown with two decimals By selecting the number before or after the separator you are able to increase reduce the numbers in increments of one unit This way you are able to specify a very specific maximum database size for example of 4 13 gigabytes IMPORTANT In order to prevent operating system failures due to insufficient disk Space the oldest records in the database will automatically be deleted for all cameras microphones and speakers recording on the disk in question when less than 500 MB of space is left on the disk containing the database regardless of any time or size limits specified for the databases This will help ensure that at least 500 MB of disk space will be available for operating system use and by using archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the databases e Database Configuration The Record tab s Database configuration section displays information about the database used for the microphone Database Configuration Section s Fields The Database Configuration section contains the following fields e Database Name Non editable field displaying the name of the database used for the microphone e Database Path Non editable field displaying th
527. ximum size limit of the archive is about to be reached and consequently if any existing data needs to be removed before the new data can be archived What Happens if Archiving Is Not Finished before the Next Scheduled Archiving NetEVS system inserts a compulsory period of archiving free time after each finished archiving job This ensures that archiving jobs do not overlap in time See also the answer to the previous question How long does it take to complete a scheduled archiving On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 271 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Archiving Tab You are able to view and manage the archiving settings of a selected recording server on the Archiving tab Management of the recording server s archiving settings takes place through the Archive Wizard which you can access from the Archiving tab What is archiving Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from a camera s default database to another location This way the amount of recordings you are able to store will not be limited by the size of the camera s default database Archiving also makes it possible to back up your recordings on backup media of your choice See About Archiving for more information To access the Archiving tab select the required recording server in the overview pane then select the Archiving tab in the properties pane Note Another tab called Archiving will be displayed if you view the properties of an individual camera this is where yo
528. y Then click Next 3 In order to prevent accidental data deletion you will be asked to confirm that you want to permanently delete all media data for the device in question If you are sure click Yes 4 The database will be emptied A bar displays how the emptying job progresses When the emptying job is complete you will be informed whether the job was successful or whether it failed If the job failed you will be able view a status message indicating what caused the failure Empty databases lor device Camera E Example Indication of successful emptying job E mpy dalabasa for device Camera 1 Example Indication of failed emptying job with link to status message 5 Click Finish e Move Database for Device If several storage areas exist on the recording server on which the selected camera microphone or speaker belongs you are able to move the database to another storage area Moving the database will not affect its content and you will be still able to record during the move IMPORTANT Before moving a database make sure sufficient free space is available at the new storage area This is especially important if moving a large database since the moving process may take time and the database may become even larger if the database must store new recordings during that time As a rule of thumb On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 199 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual 200 sufficient free space means at least the s
529. y components required by the Management Server e One or more Recording Servers for recording video feeds and for communicating with cameras and other devices e The Management Client for configuration and day to day management of the system Even though the web page opens automatically on the Management Server computer you will in most cases want to install the key components on other computers than the Management Server itself This is no problem since installation takes place through the web page which can easily be accessed from other computers See Recording Server Installation and Management Client Installation for further information On Net Surveillance Systems Inc 15 NetEVS 2 0 User Manual Recording Server Installation OIf upgrading from a previous version of NetEVS make sure you read the upgrade information Note Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet enclosed with the software CD before installing any part of NetEVS The NetEVS Recording Server is used for recording video feeds and for communicating with cameras and other devices The recording server is typically installed on one or more separate computers rather than on the NetEVS Management Server itself 1 On the computer on which you will install the recording server shut down any software running If upgrading it is highly recommended that you remove any previous versions of the recording server before upgrading 2 With an Internet Expl
530. ystem should reply with the recording server s public address i e the address of the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers To provide access to the surveillance system from outside a NAT Network Address Translation firewall NetEVS lets you use public addresses and port forwarding This will allow access clients from outside the firewall to connect to recording servers without using VPN Virtual Private Network Each recording server and failover server can be mapped to a specific port and the port can be forwarded through the firewall to the server s internal address See more about defining the public address in the following Enabling Public Access To enable public access select the Network tab s Enable public access box Defining Public Address and Port When public access is enabled you are able to define the recording server s public address and public port number in the Public address and Public port fields respectively As public address use the address of the firewall or NAT router which clients accessing the surveillance system from the internet must go through in order to reach recording servers Specifying a public port number is compulsory it is always a good idea that port numbers used on the firewall or NAT router are different from the ones used locally On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2
531. ystem should reply with the recording server s public address i e the address of the firewall or NAT Network Address Translation router and often also a different port number which is then forwarded to recording servers To provide access to the surveillance system from outside a NAT Network Address Translation firewall NetEVS lets you use public addresses and port forwarding This will allow access clients from outside the firewall to connect to recording servers without using VPN Virtual Private Network Each recording server and failover server can be mapped to a specific port and the port can be forwarded through the firewall to the server s internal address See more about defining the public address in the following On Net Surveillance Systems Inc User Manual NetEVS 2 0 Enabling Public Access To enable public access select the Network tab s Enable public access box Defining Public Address and Port When public access is enabled you are able to define the recording server s public address and public port number in the Public address and Public port fields respectively As public address use the address of the firewall or NAT router which clients accessing the surveillance system from the internet must go through in order to reach recording servers Specifying a public port number is compulsory it is always a good idea that port numbers used on the firewall or NAT router are different from the ones used locally
532. ze of 3 seconds To enable disable prebuffering select clear the Enable prebuffering check box When enabling remember to specify a prebuffer size Specifying Prebuffer Size Select or type the required prebuffer size in seconds in the Prebuffer size box Clicking the Prebuffer size box up down arrows will increase reduce the value in increments of one second The number of seconds you specify in the Prebuffer size box must be sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements Example If like in the following rule example you plan to be able to save video from five seconds prior to detected motion the prebuffer size must be at least five seconds Using Prebuffering in Rules The use of prebuffering enables you to create rules specifying that recording should begin prior to the event or time triggering the rule Example Your ability to use the below rule specifying that recording should start on a camera five seconds before motion is detected on the camera depends on prebuffering being enabled for the camera in question Perform an action on Motion Started from Red Sector Entrance Cam start recording seconds before on tl Detail from a rule relying on prebuffering e Maximum Storage Limits The Record tab s Maximum storage limits specify how long recordings are kept in the database for OTip With archiving you are able to store recordings beyond the maximum limits of the camera s database 92 On Net Surveil

Table Of Contents

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents